WIDEN POLK PARKWAY MP 17.97 TO 23.75 – DESIGN BUILD...

WIDEN POLK PARKWAY MP 17.97 TO 23.75 – DESIGN BUILD FPID NO. 416537-1-52-01

PACE ROAD INTERCHANGE MP 23 –

DESIGN BUILD FPID NO. 416537-2-52-01

TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS

Structural Sections: Div 2 - 5 Prepared by: William C. Bentley, PE

FL No. 30335

Architectural Sections: Div 1 & Div 6 - 14 Prepared by: Gary L Kranston, RA

FL No. AR0011541

Mechanical Sections: Div 15 Prepared by: Kyle J. Cartier, PE

FL No. 53269

Electrical Sections: Div 16 Prepared by: Howard J. Paige, PE

FL No. 48198

BENTLEY ARCHITECTS ++ ENGINEERS, INC. Vendor No. 59-3045321, BPE CA No.5898, BPA & ID No. AAC002023

665 West Warren Avenue, Longwood, FL 32750 T: 407.331.6116 BAEonline.com

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION TITLE DISCIPLINE DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT – TOLL PLAZA All Section 01740 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS All

DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK Section 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Structural Section 02200 EARTHWORK Structural Section 02280 SOIL TREATMENT Architectural Section 02401 DEWATERING Structural DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Section 03310 CONCRETE WORK Structural Section 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE Structural

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Section 04220 UNIT MASONRY Architectural DIVISION 05 – METALS Section 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Structural Section 05300 METAL DECKING Structural Section 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING Architectural Section 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS Architectural DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Architectural DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07111 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Architectural Section 07210 BUILDING INSULATION Architectural Section 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS Architectural Section 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Architectural Section 07900 JOINT SEALANTS Architectural DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Architectural Section 08710 FINISH HARDWARE Architectural DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09220 PLASTER AND STUCCO Architectural Section 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Architectural Section 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING Architectural Section 09900 PAINTING Architectural


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Section 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS FOR STEEL Architectural Section 09980 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS FOR ALUMINUM Architectural DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10431 GANTRY SIGNS Architectural Section 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES Architectural DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT "Not Used" DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12570 FURNISHINGS Architectural DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION "Not Used" DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS "Not Used" DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS Mechanical Section 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS Mechanical Section 15170 MOTORS Mechanical Section 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Mechanical Section 15222 MECHANICAL TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, EXCA. Mechanical Section 15245 VIBRATION ISOLATION Mechanical Section 15260 PIPING INSULATION Mechanical Section 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION Mechanical Section 15484 FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEMS Mechanical Section 15510 CONDENSTATE PIPING Mechanical Section 15535 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES Mechanical Section 15786 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Mechanical Section 15890 DUCTWORK Mechanical Section 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES Mechanical Section 15936 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Mechanical Section 15985 CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERTATION Mechanical Section 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Mechanical DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Section 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical Section 16012 SUBMITTALS Electrical Section 16013 SUBSTITUTIONS Electrical Section 16014 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND REG. REQUIREMENTS Electrical


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Section 16015 ELETRICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Electrical Section 16090 TEST AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Electrical Section 16095 DEMO OF COMPLETED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Electrical Section 16098 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Electrical Section 16111 CONDUIT Electrical Section 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS Electrical Section 16114 CABLE TRAYS Electrical Section 16118 DUCT BANK Electrical Section 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Electrical Section 16130 BOXES Electrical Section 16140 WIRING DEVICES Electrical Section 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Electrical Section 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING Electrical Section 16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS Electrical Section 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES Electrical Section 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Electrical Section 16421 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE Electrical Section 16441 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Electrical Section 16461 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS Electrical Section 16470 PANELBOARDS Electrical Section 16471 TOLL OPS EQUIP, PANELBOARDS, AND CONTROL SYS Electrical Section 16476 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Electrical Section 16477 FUSES Electrical Section 16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS Electrical Section 16485 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS Electrical Section 16496 ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH Electrical Section 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES Electrical Section 16530 SITE LIGHTING Electrical Section 16610 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Electrical Section 16620 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS Electrical Section 16622 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS Electrical Section 16726 INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYS Electrical Section 16727 INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYS Electrical Section 16741 VOICE/DATA SERVICE PATHWAYS AND WIRING Electrical Section 16761 TELEPHONE SYSTEM-MAINLINE Electrical Section 16762 TELEPHONE SYSTEM-RAMPS Electrical Section 16783 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION PATHWAYS Electrical

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT - TOLL PLAZA

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for Toll Plaza

project closeout. The requirements include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Functional Building Acceptance and Final Acceptance inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Document submittals. 3. Operating instructions and maintenance manual submittals. 4. Submittal of warranties, guarantees, and maintenance agreements. 5. Final cleaning. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS: Section 01740. 1.03 FUNCTIONAL BUILDING ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to a request for an inspection for Functional Building Acceptance, the Design-

Build firm shall maintain the following procedures: 1. The Design-Build firm shall conduct weekly walk-through inspections in the

presence of the Engineer in the month prior to the request for Functional Building Acceptance. Each inspection shall determine outstanding work necessary to meet the Functional Building Acceptance requirements stipulation under this Section. A list of outstanding work required will be updated by the Engineer with the Design-Build firm weekly. The outstanding work list will be reduced progressively from the initial weekly inspection until, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Design-Build firm's work qualifies as to the state of readiness for the formal inspection punch-list prior to Functional Building Acceptance by the Department.

B. Functional Building Acceptance for Toll Plazas shall require that the following be

accomplished:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. The stage of completeness that constitutes the state of Functional Building

Acceptance is based on the essential completion of the Contract requirements including, but not limited to, the following:

a. All civil, structural, architectural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical

work is complete for the operation of collecting tolls. b. Letter from the Design-Build firm stating that all code violations have

been corrected along with copies of Final Inspection Reports representing each discipline to the Building Inspection/Permitting Agency.

c. All mechanical, electrical, security, fire alarm, and uninterruptible power

systems have been made operational and tested under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's qualified factory representative, in the presence of the accepting authority having jurisdiction over the Work.

1. The manufacturers have issued a certified letter of compliance and

satisfactory operation to the Engineer. 2. The manufacturers have provided the required operation training,

for the purpose of aiding the Department's maintenance and operations personnel to become familiar with the systems.

d. Turn over all releases enabling the Department unrestricted use of the

Work and access to services and utilities. e. Complete clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up

and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. f. Provide the Engineer with the following list of approvals and

certifications: 1. Letter of approval from the Building Inspection/Permitting Agency

inspector. 2. Fire pump test certification by the State Fire Marshal. 3. Fire alarm test certification by the State Fire Marshal. 4. Certification of successful smoke removal and stairwell

pressurization tests by the State Fire Marshal. 5. Certification that standpipes and sprinkler systems meet pressure

and flow tests by the State Fire Marshal.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

6. Certification and acceptance of standby generator liquid propane tanks by the Division of LP Tanks/Department of Insurance.

7. Certification and acceptance of standby generator underground and

aboveground tanks by the Department of Environmental Protection.

g. Toll collection operations can be conducted without interruption. 2. Upon the confirmation that the above requirements have been satisfied, the

Design-Build firm shall request the Engineer to schedule an inspection for Functional Building Acceptance.

3. The Design-Build firm shall provide the Engineer with a list of all items needed

from the Engineer to request a Certificate of Occupancy for the facilities constructed for this project. These items may include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Certification that the structure meets or exceeds the flood plain criteria

defined in the FEMA document 44 CFR - Part 60. b. Certification of compliance to the Department of Environmental

Regulation Management Pollution Control. 4. After these items are provided, the Design-Build firm may apply to the Building

Inspection/Permitting Agency for a Certificate of Occupancy for the facilities constructed by this project. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Occupancy, the Design-Build firm shall provide the following:

a. Insurance change-over. b. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the

Engineer. Advise the Engineer of change-over in security provisions. C.. After the Design-Build firm receives the Certificate of Occupancy, the Department will

make a declaration of Functional Building Acceptance covering only that portion of the Project subject to Functional Building Acceptance, will occupy the new facilities, and will have two (2) weeks to list any deficiencies not apparent during the inspection for Functional Building Acceptance.

D. Functional building acceptance shall continue until Final Acceptance. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Prior to a request for an inspection for Final Acceptance, the Design-Build firm shall maintain the following procedures:

1. The Design-Build firm shall conduct weekly walk-through inspections in the

presence of the Engineer in the month prior to the request for Final Acceptance. Each inspection shall determine outstanding work necessary to meet the Final Acceptance requirements stipulation under this Section. A list of outstanding work required will be updated by the Engineer with the Design-Build firm weekly. The outstanding work list will be reduced progressively from the initial weekly inspection until, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Design-Build firm's work qualifies as to the state of readiness for the formal inspection punch-list prior to Final Acceptance by the Department.

B. Final Acceptance for the Project shall require that the following be accomplished: 1. All record documents, maintenance manuals and equipment operational

instructions have been turned over to the Department’s representatives and equipment operational demonstrations have been performed.

2. All landscaping has been placed and the first three (3) months maintenance of the

twelve (12) month establishment period has been successfully completed. 3. All punch list items completed and accepted. 4. Certification that construction meets the requirements of the Water Management

District permit. 5. Remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools and

equipment, mock-ups, and similar elements. 6. Turn over Warranties, Guarantees, Workmanship Bonds, Maintenance

Agreements, Final Certifications, and similar closeout documents on various materials, systems and equipment, neatly bound and in order to the Engineer.

7. Turn over extra stock as specified in other Technical Special Provisions to the

person designated by the Engineer to be in charge of the operation and maintenance of the building.

8. Provide instruction to Department in maintenance of equipment and finishes. 9. Turn over special tools for items such as louver vanes, adjustable dampers,

thermostats, allen-head locking devices, to the person designated by the Department, to be in charge of the operation and maintenance of the building, as required by applicable Technical Special Provisions.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Upon Final Acceptance, the Department shall provide written notice to the Design-Build firm and copy of said notice to Turnpike Toll Operations, Facilities and Maintenance for maintenance of the Project excluding landscaping.

D. During the period of Final Acceptance, inspections will be held periodically with the

Design-Build firm and the Department’s representatives to determine acceptability of plant establishment in accordance with the Landscape Technical Maintenance Plan. Fifteen (15) days prior to the completion of the twelve (12) month establishment period, an inspection will be held to determine the acceptability of the landscaping.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. PART 4.00 – BASIS OF PAYMENT Not Applicable. END OF SECTION

GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS 01740-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 01740 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for

guarantees, warranties, and related repairs (or replacement) required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product

warranties do not relieve the Design-Build firm of responsibilities in performance of the Work stipulated in the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2004 Edition, as amended, Article 5-13 - Recovery Rights, Subsequent to Final Payment.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. PROJECT CLOSEOUT - TOLL PLAZA: Section 01700. B. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are

specified to be warranted are included in other TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS. C. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to the

Department are specified elsewhere in the TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS. 1.03 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER WARRANTIES A. All manufacturer and equipment supplier warranties shall commence on the Date of

Functional Building Acceptance of the total Contract as acknowledged in writing by the Department, and taken over for use by the Department.

1. Lift Stations, Septic Systems, Water Wells, Security, Fire Alarm, HVAC,

Plumbing Fixtures and Plumbing Systems, and Telephone/Intercom, Radio, and Standby Power Systems will not be accepted nor the initiation of warranty start recognized until these systems are functioning properly and acknowledged as accepted in writing by the Department.

B. Written warranties made to the Department are in addition to implied warranties, and

shall not limit duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Department can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS 01740-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Ensure that all warranties comply with these stipulations prior to submission.

C. Repairs:

1. All repairs or replacements resulting from a breach of warranty shall be promptly performed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Department prior to the Date of Functional Building

Acceptance. If the Department designates a commencement date for warranties other than the Date of Functional Building Acceptance, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties on the Department's request.

B. Warranties shall be submitted properly executed by the supplier or manufacturer, or a

combination thereof, as stipulated in other TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Warranties shall also be fully identified and contain all appropriate terms and conditions.

C. Provide a bound manual for all manufacturer and equipment supplier warranties required

by the Contract Documents. Identify each warranty with proper Specification Section. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS "Not Used" PART 3.00 - EXECUTION "Not Used" PART 4.00 – BASIS OF PAYMENT Not Applicable. END OF SECTION

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1.0 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and contract documents, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the mainline toll plaza facilities as indicated on the drawings.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 3 Section "Concrete work” for removal of existing concrete

2. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Department's property.

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Department's property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Department's designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.

1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Department's property, demolished materials shall


FPID 416537-2-52-01

become the Design-Build firm's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Design-Build firm's option.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction” (most recent version), for information only, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Proposed dust-control measures.

C. Proposed noise-control measures.

D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:

E. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

1. Interruption of utility services.

2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

3. Use of elevator and stairs.

4. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Toll Plaza operations.

5. Coordination Department's partial occupancy of completed Work.

6. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

F. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.

G. Inventory of items to be removed by Department.

H. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations.

I. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Comply with all OSHA regulations as applicable.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Department assumes no responsibility for actual condition of toll plazas or portions thereof to be selectively demolished.

B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

1.08 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate and arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Office of Toll Operations.

1.09 EXISTING WARRANTY

A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS

2.01. REPAIR MATERIALS

A.. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.

B. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials as specified in plans or relevant portion of specifications.

PART 3.0 - . EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Engineer.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.02 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Department and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Department and to governing authorities.

C. Provide not less than 72 hours' written notice to Department if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

D. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving building to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

2. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

E. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with Toll Operations.

C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of vehicles and people around selective demolition area.

3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.

B. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

C. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

D. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolish and remove to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

B. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited.

7. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations.

C. Demolish concrete in small sections. Cut concrete at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; use of power-driven impact tools shall be done with care to avoid damage to adjacent structures, and to avoid damage to structures and Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing equipment that shall remain.

D. Break up and remove concrete foundations, unless otherwise shown to remain.

E. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.06 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations.

B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.

C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Department's property and legally dispose of them.

3.08 CLEANING`

A. Sweep the demolition area including tunnel broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

PART 4.00 – BASIS OF PAYMENT BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2

END OF SECTION

EARTHWORK 02200-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Earthwork includes, but is not limited to; excavation, backfill, compaction and

preparation of subgrade for buildings, tunnel, islands, and pavements associated with the Mainline Toll Plaza complete as indicated on Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. SOIL TREATMENT: Section 02280. B. DEWATERING: Section 02401. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All work shall conform to Sections/Indexes of

the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2004 Edition, as amended.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS "Not Used" PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK AND COMPACTION A. All earthwork and compaction under buildings, tunnel, islands, and pavements shall be

in accordance with the specified FDOT Sections/Indexes.

PART 4.00 BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION

SOIL TREATMENT 02280-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 02280 SOIL TREATMENT

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide soil treatment for termite control at all concrete slabs and foundations to be

developed into occupied areas including, but not limited to: 1. Equipment Buildings 2. Equipment Slabs 1.02 RELATED WORK A. EARTHWORK: Section 02200. B. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310. C. UNIT MASONRY: Section 04220. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator’s Qualifications: 1. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in the State of Florida in

accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. All work shall comply with the Florida Building Code, latest edition including

revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's technical data, complete with written substrate preparation

and soil treatment application instructions. Include EPA-Registered Label. 2. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets. B. Applicator’s Qualifications:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Submit documented evidence of applicator’s qualifications. 2. Submit a copy of the applicator’s current state license. C. Certificate of Compliance: 1. Submit a copy of the applicator’s Certificate of Compliance required by the

Florida Building Code. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: 1. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading

operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. 2. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or

during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil treatment solution manufacturer and EPA-Registered Label requirements.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. General: Provide an EPA-Registered emulsifiable, concentrated termiticide that dilutes

with water, specially formulated to prevent termites infestation. Termiticide shall be clearly labeled for use as a preventative treatment to new construction. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent.

1. Dilute with water to concentration level compliant with manufacturer’s written

instructions. 2. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to plants. B. Products: Provide one of the following products: 1. “Dragnet FT” permethrine; FMC Corp. 2. “Prevail FT” cypermethrine; FMC Corp. 3. “Demon TC” cypermethrine; Zeneca Professional Products.

1. “Prelude” permethrine; Zeneca Professional Products.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3.01 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of

treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Soil treatment solutions may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by soil treatment solution manufacturer.

B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution in accordance with EPA-Registered

Label directions. Distribute the treatment evenly. C. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete

placement or other construction activities. D. Post signs in areas of application warning workers that soil treatment solutions have

been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. E. Re-apply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other

construction activities following application. F. Protect treated areas from rainfall if left exposed for extended period.

PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2

END OF SECTION

DEWATERING 02401-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 02401 - DEWATERING PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide dewatering for construction of Mainline Toll Plaza structures below grade level. B. Obtain all permits required for dewatering operations. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. EARTHWORK: Section 02200. B. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering Programs: 1. Prior to Start of All Work: Prior to beginning all Work, the Design-Build firm

shall submit for review a detailed plan of his dewatering system, including standby equipment, showing the arrangement and location of wells or wellpoints, methods of installation, location of headers and discharge line and points of discharge disposal.

a. Prior to beginning all Work, the Design-Build firm shall submit all

applicable permits together with documentation of compliance of the Design-Build firm’s dewatering system, equipment, and disposal with permit provisions and requirements.

2. After Installation of System and Prior to Excavation: After completion of the

dewatering installation and prior to commencement of excavation, the Design-Build firm shall submit for review a detailed plan of the dewatering system as constructed, together with test data and computations demonstrating that the system is capable of achieving the specified result.

3. Deactivation Plan: The Design-Build firm shall submit for review a plan for

deactivation of the system at least one week prior to deactivation. The deactivation plan shall include calculations of the adequacy of the structure to resist uplift and procedures for abandoning wells and other items left in place.

DEWATERING 02401-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. Review by the Engineer shall not relieve the Design-Build firm of responsibility for the adequacy of the dewatering system to achieve the required results.

B. Stormwater Plan: The Design-Build firm shall submit for review a plan to handle stormwater during heavy rain events so as to prevent soil erosion and temporary flooding of the excavation and partially completed works.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING SYSTEM A. The Design-Build firm shall supply a dewatering system capable of allowing the

construction of the basement, tunnel and building in the dry. B. The dewatering system shall control the ground water in a manner that will preserve the

strength of the foundation soils, will not cause instability of the excavation slopes and will not result in damage to existing structures (if occurring), and utility lines.

C. The water level shall be lowered in advance of excavation utilizing wells, wellpoints or

similar methods. D. The water level as measured in piezometers installed in the water table aquifer shall be

maintained as shown on the Drawings.

E. Opening pumping with sumps and ditches will be permitted only if it does not result in boils, loss of fines, softening of the ground or instability of slopes.

F. Wells and well points shall be installed with suitable screens and filters so that

continuous pumping of fines does not occur. 3.02 STANDBY EQUIPMENT A. The Design-Build firm shall provide standby equipment installed and ready to operate to

assure continuous pumping throughout the Construction. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF WATER A. The Design-Build firm shall be responsible for the disposal of water generated by his

operations.

DEWATERING 02401-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. The Design-Build firm shall devise a plan which will be acceptable to all agencies having jurisdiction.

C. The Design-Build firm shall remove all temporary facilities constructed for the Design-Build firm's use, remove all soil deposits occurring as a result of an operation, clean any existing drainage facilities used and restore to original condition all temporary site alterations.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The department reserves the right to reject any stormwater plan proposal which features

the use of design data considered by the Engineer to be inadequate, insufficient or undesirable.

B. The department reserves the right to reject any dewatering system proposal that features

the use of design data considered by the Engineer to be inadequate, insufficient, or undesirable.

PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE WORK 03310-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 03310 - CONCRETE WORK PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings and includes the 2 inch thick

concrete composite topping on the precast twin tees of the canopy roofs. B. The work also includes cementitious waterproofing applied over exposed pit walls and

floors at toll booths. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. SOIL TREATMENT: Section 02280.

B. DEWATERING: Section 02401. C. STRUCTURAL PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: Section 03410.

D. UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER: Section 07111.

E. BENTONITE WATERPROOFING: Section 7170 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise

indicated or specified:

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. AASHTO M 182 Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

b. ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

c. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.

d. ACI 306 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.

e. ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

f. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. g. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

h. ACI 504R Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. Referenced Standards. 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

a. Manual of Standard Practice.

5. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CE):

a. CE CRD-C 513 Specification for Rubber Waterstop.

b. CE CRD-C 572 Specification for Polyvinyl-Chloride Waterstops.

6. United States Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology; Product Standards (PS):

a. PS-1 U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

B. Concrete Testing Service: Design-Build firm shall retain an independent testing

laboratory. 1. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the

FDOT (hereinafter referred to as the “Department”), at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Retests shall be performed at the Design-Build firm's expense.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for proprietary materials and items, including

reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, cementitious waterproofing, and others as requested by the Department.

B. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and

placement of concrete reinforcement. Conform to ACI 315, showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and formed openings through concrete structures.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test as specified.

D. Material Certificates: It is preferable to provide copies of materials certificates in lieu of

materials laboratory test reports when permitted by the Department. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Design-Build firm, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. The design and removal of all formwork is solely the responsibility of the Design-Build

firm. B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork,

for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Cardboard tube forms are not acceptable. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection.

1. Use medium density overlay (MDO) plywood conforming to PS-1 M.D. Overlay,

Group 1, Exterior Grade. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be

unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a

maximum of 350 g/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

E. Form Ties: Use factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form

ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.

1. Unless otherwise indicated and except as noted, provide ties so portion remaining

within concrete after removal is 1-1/2 inches inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1 inch diameter in concrete surface.

2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters,

chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports conforming to CRSI Specifications, unless otherwise acceptable.

1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where

base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with

forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2).

3. Where underside of lintels are exposed, bars shall be suspended such that chairs

which cause spalling are not used. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: The materials used in concrete must be certified from the source and shall conform to the requirements of Division III of 2004 FDOT Standard Specifications:

1. Portland Cement: Section 921.

2. Fine Aggregate: Section 902. Only silica sand will be permitted except as

provided in 902-5.2.3.

a. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances.

3. Coarse Aggregate: Section 901.

a. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use coarse aggregates containing

spalling-causing deleterious substances.

4. Water: Section 923.

5. Admixtures: Section 924.

6. Slag, Fly Ash, and Other Pozzolanic Materials: Section 929.

7. The materials used in concrete shall contain no hardened lumps, crusts, or frozen matter and shall not be contaminated with dissimilar material.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Types of Cement: Unless a specific type of cement is designated elsewhere, cement used in concrete shall be Type I, Type IP, Type IS, Type IP(MS), Type II, or Type III.

C. Fly Ash, Slag, and Other Pozzolanic Materials: Fly ash, slag, or other pozzolanic

materials may be used as a cement replacement or as an admixture in concrete when Type I, Type II, or Type III cement is used.

D. Mixing Different Coarse Aggregates: Substitution of aggregate of the same type and

grade from a different source in an approved concrete mix may be permitted at the discretion of the Department.

E. Admixtures:

1. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

2. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, and contain not more than

0.1 percent chloride ions.

3. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM D 495, Type D, and contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

4. Water Reducing Non-Chloride Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D,

and contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

5. Water Reducing Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, and contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

6. Chemical admixtures or additives containing calcium chloride ions shall not be

permitted. Provide admixture manufacturer=s written certification that chloride ion content is zero percent.

F. Material Storage:

1. Cementitious Materials Storage: As a minimum, each plant shall comply with

material specifications and provide a separate and clearly labeled weatherproof facility to store each brand and/or cementitious material available during Department work. Each storage facility shall provide a suitable, safe, and convenient means of collecting cementitious materials samples.

2. Aggregate Storage: As a minimum, each plant shall provide suitable bins,

stockpiles, or silos to store and identify aggregates without mixing, segregating or contaminating the different sources or grades. Identification shall include Department approved pit number and aggregate type/gradation.

3. Stockpiles - General Requirements: Whichever of the allowable methods of

stockpiling aggregates, as specified below, is used by the concrete producer, it


FPID 416537-2-52-01

shall be his responsibility to handle the aggregates in such a manner as to minimize segregation and to recover materials from the stockpile for use in the mix in a manner that it will fall within the limits of the Specifications. Stockpiles shall be maintained in a well drained condition to minimize free water content. The Producer shall make available to the Department’s personnel, for sampling, the necessary quantities of aggregate on the recovery side of the stockpile where feasible, for their testing at a frequency necessary to ensure compliance with the Specifications.

4. Forming Stockpiles by Clamshell: Stockpiles of either coarse or fine aggregates

shall be built-up in layers not to exceed 3 feet in height. Each layer shall be completely in place before the next layer is started.

5. Forming of Ramped Stockpiles: When truck and bulldozers are used to form a

ramp-type stockpile, such stockpiles shall be constructed in lifts not exceeding 3 feet in height and a slope that will prevent segregation. Generally, only rubber-tired equipment will be permitted on the stockpile. Equipment other than rubber-tired equipment may be permitted by the Department when the Producer can show that the equipment produces no detrimental effect.

6. Forming Stockpiles by Belt Conveyor: When the stockpile is formed by a belt

conveyor system, the discharge end of the conveyor shall be adjustable in height and capable of moving circularly, or the Producer shall provide means of keeping coning of stockpiles to a minimum to reduce segregation. Questions of segregation shall be resolved by sampling the aggregate from the last conveyor belt before entering overhead storage.

7. Storage of Aggregates in Silos: When aggregates are stored in silos the overhead

charge shall be so arranged that segregation of the aggregates does not occur. The silos shall be maintained in reasonably full condition, as full as practicable.

8. Wetting Coarse Aggregate Stockpiles, Storage Bins, and Silos: The entire surface

of the coarse aggregate shall be continuously and uniformly sprinkled with fresh water for a period of 24 hours preceding their introduction into the concrete mix to assure uniformity of concrete consistency. Any request for deviations from the 24-hour sprinkling requirements shall be addressed for consideration by the District Materials Engineer.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell type or centerbulb type waterstops at construction

joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. Provide either rubber or PVC waterstops as follows:

1. Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. Products: Provide rubber waterstops by one of the following manufacturers: (1) The Burke Co.

(2) Progress Unlimited. (3) Williams Products, Inc. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572. a. Products: Provide polyvinyl chloride waterstops by one of the following

manufacturers: (1) Afco Products. (2) The Burke Co.

(3) W.R. Meadows, Inc. (4) Progress Unlimited. (5) Vinylex Corp. B. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where

indicated. Use only materials specified in Section 07111 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged nonstaining grout. Provide grout

specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 1. Products: Provide one of the following nonshrink, nonmetallic grouts (conforming

to ASTM C 1107):

a. "Euco-NS"; Euclid Chemical Co.

b. "Vibropruf #11"; Lambert Corp. c. "Masterflow 928"; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. d. "Sonogrout 14"; Sonneborn Building Products-Chemrex Inc.

2. High Heat Resistant Grout (Generator Building):

a. Product: AF-100"; Sauereisen. D. Hardener/Sealer/Dustproofer:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Products: Provide one of the following hardener/sealer/dustproofers:

a. "Burk-O-Lith"; The Burke Co. b. "Surfhard"; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Saniseal"; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. d. "Lapidolith"; Sonneborn Building Products-Chemrex, Inc. E. Sealer for Form-Lined Concrete and Adjacent Vertical Concrete: Colorless, proprietary

solution for sealing concrete surfaces. 1. Product: "Clear Pruf"; The Burke Co. F. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9

oz./sq. yd., conforming to AASHTO M 182, Class 2. G. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. H. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming curing

compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1-D. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. Compound to be clear and colorless at time of application and not change to a yellow or amber color over time and exposure.

1. Products: Provide one of the following liquid membrane forming curing

compounds: a. "Clear Seal"; Tamms Div., LaPorte Construction Chemicals.

b. "Masterkure 200W"; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. c. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries.

d. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn Building Products-Chemrex, Inc. I. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 1059. Where concrete placement will be protected

(interior) or delayed, use rewettable Type 1 bonding agent. Where concrete will be


FPID 416537-2-52-01

placed immediately after application of bonding agent, use non-rewettable acrylic Type II.

1. Products, Rewettable Type Bonding Compounds: Provide one of the following

products:

a. "Euco Weld"; Euclid Chemical Co.

b. "Hibond"; Lambert Corp.

c. "Everweld"; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

2. Products, Non-Rewettable Type Bonding Compounds: Provide one of the following products:

a. "Acrylic Bondcrete"; The Burke Co.

b. "SBR Latex"; Euclid Chemical Co.

c. "Acrylbond"; Lambert Corp.

d. "Sonocrete"; Sonneborn Building Products-Chemrex, Inc. J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two component 100 percent solids material suitable for

use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit project requirements.

1. Products: Provide one of the following epoxy adhesives: a. "Burke Epoxy M.V."; The Burke Co. b. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620"; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod"; Sika Chemical Corp. K. Joint Filler Material: Preformed strips of asphalt saturated fiberboard, conforming to

ASTM D 1751.

L. Cementitious Waterproofing: Cement-based, 2-component, polymer modified waterproofing slurry. Provide as a waterproof seal over all exposed concrete sidewalls and floors of toll booth pits.

1. Product: "SikaTop Seal 107"; Sika Chemical Corp.

2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

B. Submit written reports to the Department of each proposed mix for each class of

concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Department and approved by Engineer of Record.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete as indicated on Drawings. Maximum

w/c ratio shall be as specified in ACI 301.

D. Admixtures: Conform to the following requirements:

1. Use water reducing admixture of high range water reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use air entraining admixture in all normal weight concrete, unless otherwise

indicated. Add air-entraining admixture in manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 4 percent with a tolerance of + 1-1/2 percent.

3. Use admixtures for water reducing and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's written directions.

E. Slump Limits: Unless otherwise permitted or specified, the concrete shall be

proportioned and produced to have a slump of 4 inches or less if consolidation is to be by vibration, and 5 inches or less if consolidation is to be by methods other than vibration.

1. Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer):

Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to the concrete. F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Design-

Build firm when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Department and as accepted by the Department. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Department before using in work.

G. The maximum concrete temperature at the time of placement shall not exceed 90 deg F

unless hot weather provisions are provided.

H. Hot Weather Concreting: Hot weather concreting is defined as the production, placing, and curing of concrete when the concrete temperature at placing exceeds 90 deg F, but is less than 100 deg F. Concrete mix designs that will be used under hot weather concreting conditions shall be developed in accordance with this additional procedure.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. A trial mix shall be prepared with a minimum temperature of 94 deg F and shall be held in the mixer for 90 minutes after completion of initial mixing.

a. On completion of the extended mixing period, the trial mix concrete shall

have a slump within + 1 inch of the target slump (+ 1 inch for mixes utilizing HRWR) and an air content within + 1.0 percent of the target air.

b. The mix temperature at the end of the extended mixing period shall not be

less than 94 deg F.

c. During the extended mixing period, the drum shall be turned intermittently for 30 seconds every five minutes. The drum shall be covered with wet burlap or an impermeable cover material during the rest periods.

d. At the end of the 90 minute period the trial mix shall be remixed for a

minimum of one minute and a slump test made to verify that the concrete is within the specified range for slump. If below the target range, the slump may be adjusted by a water addition. After the water addition, the concrete shall be remixed for a minimum of two minutes.

e. The total water used in initial mixing and the final slump adjustment, if

applicable, constitutes the design mix water content. It shall not exceed the maximum water cement ratio of the respective mix design.

f. The production and testing of the trial mix concrete shall be demonstrated

in the presence of the Department or its designated representative.

2. The heat of hydration of the cement shall not exceed 80 cal/g at seven days measured as the average of three samples, and no individual measurement shall exceed 90 cal/g.

a. Where fly ash is 18 to 22 percent of the total cementitious material, the

heat of hydration of the cement shall not exceed 88 cal/g at seven days measured as the average of three samples and no individual measurement shall exceed 96 cal/g.

b. These requirements do not apply to Type III cement, nor do they apply to

cements used for steam cured concrete, unless specified in the Special Provisions.

c. The Design-Build firm shall supplement standard curing practices with

additional methods, supplies, and/or equipment for the full curing period. These methods may include but are not limited to:

(1) Water fogging.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

(2) Insulated blankets.

(3) Apply curing compound at a rate of 1-1/4 times the manufacturer=s recommended application rate.

d. Unless the specified hot weather concreting special measures (3.06 F Item

4) are in effect, concrete exceeding 90 deg F at the time of placement shall be rejected. Regardless of special measures taken, concrete exceeding 100 deg F will be rejected. It is the Design-Build firm=s responsibility to implement hot weather measures in a timely manner to avoid production shutdown.

2.06 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Conform to requirements of FDOT Specification Section 346-7,

Concrete Plant Requirements, and as specified. B. Provide batch ticket for each load of concrete delivered to the site. The information to

be included on the ticket shall be in accordance with Attachment AA@ to this Specification.

C. Transit Time: When nonagitator trucks are used, the elapsed time between the addition

of water to the mix and depositing the concrete in place shall not exceed 45 minutes, except that when a water reducing and retarding admixture is used, such elapsed time shall not exceed 75 minutes. When the hauling is done in agitator trucks, such elapsed time shall not exceed 60 minutes, except that when a water reducing and retarding admixture is used, a maximum elapsed time of 90 minutes will be permitted. Extended transit time may be authorized by the District Materials Engineer. All such time limits are subject to the ability of the Design-Build firm to properly place and consolidate the concrete.

2.07 CONCRETE PLANT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: All concrete produced for incorporation into the Work shall be produced by a concrete plant approved by the Department for such production. If plant approval is withdrawn by the Department during production for a construction project, it is the Design-Build firm=s sole responsibility to (a) obtain another approved concrete plant to produce the concrete, or (b) await re-approval of the concrete plant. Such actions shall occur prior to any further production and placement of concrete on the construction project. No changes in contract time or completion dates will be allowed. Delay costs or other costs associated with plant approval or disapproval shall be borne by the Design-Build firm.

1. Equipment used for handling elements of concrete, mixing concrete, handling the

mixed concrete, transporting and depositing the mixed concrete shall have no detrimental effect on the hardened concrete. Equipment surfaces which are in


FPID 416537-2-52-01

physical contact with the elements of concrete or the mixed product shall not be made of aluminum.

2. Concrete producers will be evaluated for compliance with the specifications. Plant

reinspection will be performed on a periodic basis when the producer is actively supplying concrete to the Department. When discrepancies are found, the plant may be removed from the fully approved plant status and placed on either a conditional status or a non-approved status depending on the nature of the discrepancy and the corrective action required. When a plant is placed on non-approved status, the producer shall notify the District Materials Engineer, in writing, of the proposed corrective action. The District Materials Engineer will schedule a plant reinspection within three working days of receipt of the written acceptable corrective action.

B. Measuring Materials: Water may be measured by volume or weight. Whichever method

is used, the equipment shall be constructed so that the accuracy of measurements will not be affected by variations in pressure in the water supply line. The meter or weighing device shall be capable of being set to deliver the required quantity and to automatically cut off the flow when the required quantity has been discharged. The measuring equipment shall have an accuracy, under all operating conditions, within one percent of the quantity of water required for the batch. The accuracy of measuring devices shall be verified at the request of the Department or at least quarterly as per the attached A Calibration of Water Measuring Devices@ requirements.

1. Adjustment to mix consistency, within the allowable limit for the addition of

water, is the Design-Build firm=s responsibility at the job site, and shall be made upon initial arrival and not thereafter.

C. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be measured by weight or volume. The measuring

equipment shall have an accuracy, under all operating conditions, within 3 percent of the quantity of admixture required for the batch. The accuracy of measuring devices shall be certified by the admixture supplier annually. Each admixture shall be measured separately and added to the mixing water in a separate sequence as the mixing water is introduced into the mix.

1. Exceptions to the above method of admixture addition may be permitted by the

District Materials Engineer provided accuracy of measurement is not sacrificed and the desired goals of each admixture are achieved.

D. Cement, Fly Ash, and Slag: Cement, fly ash, and slag shall be measured by weight within an accuracy of 1 percent of the required amount, except that for concrete batches of 3 cubic yards or less, a required accuracy of 2 percent will be permitted. Cement, fly ash, and slag shall be weighed separately from other materials. When cement, fly ash, and slag are weighed in a cumulative weight hopper, the cement shall be weighed first.

1. If bag cementitious material is permitted, the batch shall be so proportioned that

only whole bags are used.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

E. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Aggregates shall be measured by weight or volume within

an accuracy of 1 percent of the required amount. Proper aggregate surface moisture corrections shall be applied.

1. Within two hours prior to each day=s batching, free moisture shall be determined

for the coarse and fine aggregates. When concrete production is expected to exceed three hours, an additional moisture test shall be required at approximately halfway through the batching operations. The concrete producer shall use these values for adjustment of batch proportions.

2. Batch adjustments made necessary by aggregate free moisture may be made by

one or more of the following methods:

a. By using moisture probe readings, speedy moisture tester or Chapman flask for fine aggregate moisture. The accuracy of the moisture probe will be verified at least weekly by the manufacturer=s recommended method. The Chapman flask and speedy moisture tester will be verified at least weekly by the method outlined in Paragraph E.2.b.

b. By calculating both coarse and fine aggregate free moisture based upon

dry sample weights and adjusting for absorption.

c. By towel drying coarse aggregate to calculate free moisture on S.S.D. aggregate. The accuracy of towel drying shall be verified weekly by the method outlined in Paragraph E.2.b.

F. Batching Accuracy: Failure to maintain batching operations of the plastic concrete with

the tolerance for each component material requires immediate investigation and corrective action by the concrete producer and automatically places the plant on conditional status. Failure to implement corrective measures will be cause for placing the plant on a non-approved status.

G. Bins: All bins shall be of adequate capacity for the concrete production required. They shall be supported upon a rigid framework founded upon a stable foundation capable of holding them in a safe and secure position. Each compartment shall be designed to discharge efficiently and freely into the weigh hopper. Positive means of control shall be provided so that as the quantity desired in the weight hopper is approached, the material can be added slowly and shut off precisely. The discharging mechanism shall not permit loss of material when it is closed. Aggregate storage bins shall be constructed sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of material and they shall be divided into at least one compartment for the fine aggregate and one compartment for each size of coarse aggregate to be used. The compartment partitions shall be sufficiently tight and high enough to prevent the intermingling of the several materials. Cement bins shall be constructed leak-proof and moisture-proof, and shall be provided with vibrators or other means to aid the flow of cement from the bin.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

H. Weigh Hoppers: Weigh hoppers shall consist of suitable containers freely suspended from scales and protected from the elements so that accuracy is not adversely affected. The hoppers shall be equipped with a discharge mechanism which prevents leakage or loss of material when closed. Hoppers shall be vented to permit air to escape and be equipped with vibrators or other equipment that ensures complete and efficient discharge of materials.

I. Scales: Scales shall be either beam type, or springless dial type, or electronic devices

such as load cells, and the product of a recognized scale manufacturer. Where beam type scales are used, suitable means shall be provided to hold poises securely in position after they are set. Scales shall be kept clean and in good operating condition. Where necessary, the scale operator shall have an unobstructed view of all indicating devices and convenient access to all controls. The weigh beam, or dials, shall be graduated to permit reading to one-tenth of one percent of the capacity of the scales.

1. Prior to beginning any work, all scales and other weighing devices used in

batching shall be checked for accuracy by a qualified representative of a scale company registered with the Bureau of Weights and Measures of the Florida Department of Agriculture.

2. Scales shall be rechecked once every three months or more often if deemed

necessary. Scales shall be checked up to at least the maximum load normally handled on each respective scale.

3. Cement scales, fly ash scales, and coarse and fine aggregate scales shall be

maintained to an accuracy of one-half of one percent of the maximum load normally handled.

4. A certificate of inspection bearing the date of the certification and signed by the

scale company representative shall be affixed to each weighing device. A copy of the scale company=s report corresponding with the current certificate of inspection showing the date of inspection, signature of the scale company representative, the observed scale deviations for the loads checked, and a statement that the scale conforms to the requirements of Chapter 531 Florida Statutes pertaining to specifications, tolerances, and regulations, as administered by the Bureau of Weights and Measures of the Florida Department of Agriculture, shall be available at the plant.

J. Mixers, General Requirements:

1. All mixers shall be of an approved type and shall be capable of combining the

components of the concrete into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and shall be capable of discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Design: Mixers may be truck mixers of the inclined axis revolving drum type, or concrete plant central mixers of the non-tilting, vertical shaft or horizontal shaft types.

3. A copy of the manufacturer=s design, showing dimensions and arrangement of

blades, shall be available at the batching plant at all times. The use of mixers that have been altered from such design in respect to blade design and arrangement, or to drum volume, may be permitted when recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the District Materials Engineer.

4. Metal rating plates shall be attached to each mixer specifying its mixing speed,

agitating speed, rated capacity, and unit serial number.

K. Truck Mixers: The drums of truck mixers may be actuated by power sources independent of the truck engines or by suitable power take-offs. Either system used shall provide control of the rotation of the drum within the limits specified on the manufacturer=s rating plate, regardless of the speed of the truck. A truck mixer of the revolving drum type shall be equipped with a hatch in the periphery of the drum shell which permits access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning, and repair of the blades.

1. Truck mixers shall be equipped with revolution counters of approved type and

mounting, by which the number of revolutions of the drum may be readily verified.

2. The water supply system mounted on truck mixers shall be equipped with a

volumetric water gauge or approved water meter in operating condition. Each mixer shall display an identification card obtained from the District Materials Engineer prior to delivery of concrete to any Department project. Failure to display an identification in the mixer truck shall be cause for rejection of the delivered concrete. The identification card may be removed by the Engineer when a truck mixer is discovered to be in non-compliance.

3. As an exception to the above, when the deficiency involves only an inoperable

revolution counter, the truck mixer identification and approval card will not be removed. However, the deficiency will be noted on the card by the Departments=s representative. The producer will be allowed to deposit concrete present in the mixer and then the truck mixer will be removed from use until the revolution counter is repaired or replaced. On the initial delivery to any Department project, after repair or replacement, the truck mixer operator will be expected to have the Department=s representative note that the revolution counter is operable and initial the truck mixer approval card. Without such inspection and documentation of corrective action, the Department may reject the truck mixer at any time it is again found to have an inoperable revolution counter. The revolution counter will be set to zero prior to mixing.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. All truck mixers shall be inspected by the producer at least once each week for changes due to accumulation of hardened concrete or wear of blades. Any appreciable accumulation of hardened concrete shall be removed before any mixer may be used under these procedures.

5. Maintenance of Mixers: Blades of revolving drum type mixers shall be repaired or

replaced when the radial height is less than 90 percent of the design radial height. Mixers of other designs shall be repaired or adjusted per instructions of the manufacturer. Questions of performance shall be resolved through mixer uniformity tests as described in ASTM C 94.

L. Timers: Stationary type mixers shall be equipped with an approved timing device which

will automatically lock the discharge lever when the drum is charged and release it at the end of the mixing period. In the event of failure of the timing device, the Engineer may allow operations to continue as may be necessary to avoid critical or uneconomical conditions. Such operations, however, shall not extend beyond the end of that working day.

1. If necessary, and in order to produce a homogeneous mixture, the minimum

allowable mixing time specified may be increased or decreased if uniformity of mix is verified. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed stipulated on the manufacturer=s name plate on the mixer.

M. Trucks for Transporting Wet Batches: Wet batches of concrete may be transported in

either agitating or nonagitating trucks. Bodies of nonagitating trucks shall be smooth, mortar tight containers with round internal corners, and shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactorily controlled rate without segregation. Covers shall be provided for nonagitating trucks for protection from the elements.

N. Records: All records must be made available at each plant, upon request by Department

personnel. Records which shall be available at each plant are as follows:

1. Approved concrete design mixes.

2. Materials source/specification compliance (delivery tickets, certifications, certified mill test reports, miscellaneous test reports).

3. Plant and mixer design data as may be required by Specifications.

4. Federal Poster.

5. Department Specifications and approved drawings, if applicable.

6. A copy of the scale company or testing agency report showing the observed

deviations from quantities checked during calibration of scales and/or meters. Certification document for the admixture weighting/measuring device.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

7. Truck mixer inspection (a copy shall be located in the cab of the truck).

8. Moisture control records.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMS A. The Design-Build firm shall be solely responsible to design, erect, support, shore,

reshore, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct form-work so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances conforming to ACI 347.

B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-

place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate

alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, rustications, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for

cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar matrix. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.

F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, using wood,

metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate

work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details

and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce

or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by

formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.

D. Place reinforcement as called for on Drawings. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and

bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.03 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, as indicated, or, if not

indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Department.

B. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to

form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Waterstops shall be securely held in position using split form dimensional lumber

to hold waterstop rigidly within the casting to a true linear profile. Concrete shall be properly consolidated around the waterstop so that no voids or honeycombing occurs adjacent to the waterstop, thus maintaining sealing integrity. The Design-Build firm shall remove all concrete spillage from the waterstop upon completion of the day=s concrete pour.

C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-On-Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at

points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, concrete islands, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Construct isolation joints using joint filler material herein specified and sealant materials specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS. Maintain top of strips of filler material at 1/4 inch + (maximum) below top of finish slab.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required

for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate

screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return

forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before concrete is placed. C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and

under conditions pursuant to form-coating compound manufacturer's published instructions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions.

D. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect

against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork

installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other trades sufficiently in advance, to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. All aforementioned work must be completed and the Engineer and/or Department notified at least 24 hours prior to concrete placement to allow time for adequate inspection. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coating is not used.

1. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement

of forms and reinforcing steel. B. General: Conform to ACI 304 and as specified.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will

be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.

C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper

than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Cold joints will not be allowed except as approved by the Engineer. 2. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by

hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete pursuant to ACI recommended practices.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw

vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

D. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous

operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull

floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F.,

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at point of placement.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Do not use calcium chloride.

F. Hot Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality

and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 or as specified in Paragraph 2.05 H. AHot Weather Concreting.@ 1. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that

steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

2. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.

3. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Engineer. 3.07 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish

work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Formed Finish: All work shall conform to the following Paragraphs under

Article 400-15 AFinishing Concrete@ of Section 400 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES of the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2004 Edition as amended:

1. 400-15.1 AGeneral Surface Finish (Required for All Surfaces).@

2. 400-15.2 ASurface Finishes@ for Class 5 finish as specified under 400-15.2.6

AClass 5 Applied Finish Coating,@ for Class 5 finish as specified under 400-15.2.6.

a. Color: No color required, gray only, fascia and columns to be painted.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3.08 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and

other finishes as hereinafter specified. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface

until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/4 inch under a 10 foot straight edge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete flatwork,

steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming

with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Department before application.

3.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or

hot temperatures. 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface

after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

2. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before

concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days pursuant to ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by

moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Covering concrete, surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly

saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place


FPID 416537-2-52-01

absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,

placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of

beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and

other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor sealer/dustproofer/hardener or

finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 2. Provide curing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks,

and curbs; as follows: a. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final

finishing operations are complete (within 2-hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Re-coat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3-hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

b. Do not use membrane curing compounds or a sealer on surfaces which are

to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete such as liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic tile, glue-down carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Department.

3.10 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring. B. Extend shoring from ground to roof.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support work without excessive stress or deflection.

D. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after concrete placement, and longer if

required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed.

3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, wall, columns,

and similar parts of the work, may be removed provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joints, slabs and other

structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

3.12 RE-USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated or

otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to the Department.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by

other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and

foundations. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

1. Grout base plates and foundations, using specified non-shrink grout. Use non-

metallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Cementitious Waterproofing: Prepare concrete pit wall and floor substrates, and apply

waterproofing material pursuant to manufacturer's published instructions. Apply two (2) coats of material to prepared surfaces at the rate of 20 sq. ft. per gallon.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar

immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to the Department. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, down to

solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.

2. Patch holes left by tie rods and bolts with a mixture of sand and cement which,

after curing, closely matches the appearance of the surrounding wall surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if

defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Department. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect

the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for

smoothness and verify the surface plane to tolerance specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope.

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of

concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at

least 14 days.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Department.

D. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type of class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack

method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval by the Department for method and

procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the

Department. 3.15 ACCEPTANCE TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Design-Build firm shall perform acceptance concrete testing and submit

test reports.

B. Initial verification tests will be made on a sample from the initial delivery of each class of concrete to the jobsite each day for compliance with requirements for air content, temperature, and slump. The placement operation shall not proceed until the delivered concrete complies with specification tolerances for the plastic concrete.

C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the

following as directed by the Engineer:

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: FM1-T141 for acceptance sampling and FM 5-501 for initial verification (If the concrete is placed utilizing a pump, the concrete shall be sampled at the end of the hose).


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. Slump: FM1-T119; one test for each 50 cubic yards placed of each type of concrete for each day=s pour. Additional tests shall be made when the consistency changes.

b. Air Content: FM 1-T 196, volumetric method for lightweight or normal

weight concrete; FM 1-T 152, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each 50 cubic yards placed of each type of concrete for each day=s pour. Additional tests shall be made as deemed necessary.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below, when 90 degrees F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Making and Curing Test Specimens: FM 1-T 023 and as specified herein;

one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

e. Compressive Strength Tests: FM 1-T 022 and as specified herein; one set

for each day=s placement plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 95 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

3. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of

three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results will be reported to the Department. Reports of compressive strength tests

shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: A testing service employed by the Design-Build firm and acceptable to the Department will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicated specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Department. Testing service may conduct tests to


FPID 416537-2-52-01

determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with FM 1-T 024, or by other methods as directed.

PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item

Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2

END OF SECTION ATTACHMENT DELIVERY TICKET/CERTIFICATION 1. Serial number of delivery ticket. 2. Plant number assigned by the Department. 3. Date of batching. 4. Design-Build firms name. 5. Project number. 6. Truck number making the concrete delivery. 7. Class of concrete. 8. Design mix number. 9. Cubic yards in this load. 10. Time all materials are introduced to mixer. 11. Arrival time at job site.* 12. Time that concrete mix has been completely discharged.* 13. Total cubic yards batched for job on date of delivery (cumulative total). 14. Maximum allowable water addition at the job site. 15. Number of revolutions at mixing speed before leaving for job site. 16. Number of additional mixing revolutions upon arrival and prior to water additions.*


FPID 416537-2-52-01

17. Amount of mixing time for central mixer. 18. Total number of revolutions at mixing and agitating speed.* 19. Brand (name) of cement producer and cement type. 20. Actual weight of cement batched in pounds. 21. Producer and actual amount of air entraining agent. 22. Percent of free moisture in coarse aggregate. 23. Coarse aggregate source (assigned pit no.). 24. Actual amount of coarse aggregate in pounds. 25. Producer and actual amount of retardant used. 26. Percent free moisture in fine aggregate. 27. Fine aggregate source (assigned pit no.). 28. Actual amount of fine aggregate in pounds. 29. Brand name and class of fly ash. 30. Actual amount of fly ash in pounds. 31. Actual amount of water used in gallons or pounds. 32. Statement of compliance to Specifications and original signature of approved plant

operatory. 33. Total gallons of water added at the job site.* 34. Additional mixing revolutions when water is added.* 35. Signature of Design-Build firm’s representative who received the concrete and

requested or permitted water to be added at the job site. * This information to be verified and completed by Department Personnel or a Department Representative.

STRUCTURAL PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03410-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. For the Mainline Toll Plaza canopy structures, work of this Section includes the design,

casting, delivery and erection of precast prestressed concrete double tees as shown on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310. B. JOINT SEALANTS: Section 07900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. b. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.


a. Referenced Standards.

3. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. AWS D1.4 Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

a. Manual of Standard Practice.

5. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

a. Referenced Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2004 Edition, as amended.

6. Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. MNL 116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of

Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. 7. Florida Building Code. B. Fabricator's Qualifications: 1. Firms that have two (2) years successful experience in fabrication of precast

concrete units similar to units required for this Project will be acceptable. Fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

2. Fabricator shall produce precast concrete units at PCI certified fabricating plant

engaged primarily in manufacturing of similar units. C. Source Quality Control: Testing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI

MNL-116 and as defined herein. 1. Tensioning of Tendons:

a. In all methods of tensioning, the stress induced in the tendons shall be determined by measurement of strand elongation and, independently, by direct measurement of force using a pressure gauge and/or load cell. The two determinations shall check each other and the theoretical design values within a tolerance limit of 5 percent.

2. De-tensioning of Tendons:

a. Stress transfer from anchorage to the members shall not be performed until concrete strength, as indicated by test cylinders, is in accordance with the specified transfer strength.

3. Concrete Cylinders:

a. Concrete shall be sampled and cylinders made in strict accordance with the following standards:

(1) ASTM C 31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field. (2) ASTM C 172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concret

b. At least three (3) test cylinders per casting bed shall be made each day the bed is used.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

D. Qualifications for Welding Work:

1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS A

Standard Qualification Procedure.

2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous twelve (12) months.

a. If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Design-Build

firm’s responsibility. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's specifications and instructions for manufactured materials

and products. Include manufacturer's certifications and laboratory test reports as required. All reinforcing steel and prestressing strands shall have a mill certificate.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings and structural design calculations, signed and sealed by a

Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida, showing complete information for fabrication, installation, and connection of precast concrete units and bearing pads. Indicate member dimensions and cross-sections; location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection.

2. Indicate layout, dimensions and identification of each precast unit corresponding

to sequence and procedure of installation. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail and design inserts, connections and joints, including accessories and construction at openings in precast units.

3. Provide location and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other

construction. Furnish templates for accurate placement. 4. Include erection procedure for precast units and sequence of erection. 5. Provide complete design calculations prepared, signed and sealed by a

Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida for: a. The dead loads indicated on the Structural Drawings. b. All live loads listed.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

c. All anticipated construction loads. d. All handling and erection loads. e. Camber/deflection calculation: (1) At release of prestress force. (2) At erection.

(3) At end of service life.

f. Connections and bearing pads.

C. Welding Certifications:

1. Submit copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

2. Design-Build firm shall submit certificates to the Department’s Commercial Inspection Agency for review prior to submittal to the Engineer for review.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project Site in such quantities and at such times to

assure continuity of installation. Store units at Project Site to prevent cracking, distortion, staining or other physical damage and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units at designated lift points.

B. Deliver anchorage items that are to be embedded in other construction before start of

such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions as required for installation.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Materials and fabrication shall meet all requirements of the specified standards.

Tolerances shall be in accordance with the recommendations of PCI MNL 116. B. Precast prestressed units shall be of the size and configuration shown on the Drawings. C. Finish shall be standard finish such as is produced in plastic lined or metal forms. Units

with honeycomb, structural defects, "ghosting" of mesh or other reinforcing and imperfections will, at the discretion of the Engineer, be rejected.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

D. Units shall be of standard weight concrete having a minimum average cover of 3/4 inch over the prestressing strands.

E. Stresses in concrete immediately after prestress transfer (before time-dependent

prestress losses) shall not exceed the allowables established in ACI 318, Section 18.4. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Welded, ASTM A 706, Grade 60, low alloy steel, with mill certificates. 2. If No Welding Required: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Anchors:

1. Deformed bar anchors, ASTM A 496.

2. Welded headed studs, AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Smooth: ASTM A 185, minimum yield strength of 65,000 psi. 2. Deformed: ASTM A 497, minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi. D. Wire: 1. ASTM A 82; minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi. E. Prestressed Strand: 1. ASTM A 416, 270 ksi, low relaxation. F. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other

devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing, complying with CRSI recommendations.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with

forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2).

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. Use only one brand and type of cement

throughout the Project. B. Aggregates: 1. ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for

exposed concrete. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33, but which have shown by

special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability, may be used when acceptable to Engineer.

C. Water: 1. Drinkable and free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and

embedded steel. D. Air-Entrained Admixture: 1. ASTM C 260. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: 1. ASTM C 494, type A. F. Design: 1. Minimum compressive strength (f'c) of 5,000 psi at 28-days.

2. Minimum compressive strength (f'ci) of 3,500 psi at 28 days at transfer of prestress.

2.04 CONNECTION MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Steel Plates: 1. ASTM A 36. B. Steel Shapes: 1. ASTM A 36. C. Anchor Bolts:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. ASTM A 307, low-carbon steel bolts, regular hexagonal nuts and carbon steel washers.

D. Finish of Steel Units: 1. Exposed units shall be galvanized per ASTM A 123. Others shall be painted with

rust-inhibitive primer. E. Bearing Pads: 1. Bearing pads shall be resilient type meeting requirements of FDOT Section 932-

NONMETALLIC ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES, Subarticle 932-2.1, Resilient Pads.

F. Accessories: 1. Provide clips, hangers and other accessories required for installation of project

units and for support of subsequent construction of finishes. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All prestressed units shall be installed by the manufacturer, or under the direct

supervision of the manufacturer. B. Upon completion of erection, manufacturer shall issue a written certification stating that

all the tees have been installed in accordance with approved shop drawings and design calculations, and in accordance with the intent of the Drawings. Certification shall bear the seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

3.02 CLEAN-UP A. Remove from time to time as directed, all rubbish and debris resulting from the work

and upon completion of the work, remove all unused materials, equipment, scaffolding, and similar construction related items, and perform final cleaning services as may be necessary to leave job in a condition acceptable to the Department.



END OF SECTION 03410

UNIT MASONRY 04220-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 04220 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all concrete masonry units, precast lintels, and miscellaneous

masonry items necessary as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. SOIL TREATMENT: Section 02280.

B. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310.

C. ROUGH CARPENTRY: Section 06100. D. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Section 07600.

E. JOINT SEALANTS: Section 07900. F. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Section 08110.

G. PLASTER AND STUCCO: Section 09220. H. PAINTING: Section 09900.

I. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES: Section 10522.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. ACI 315 Details and Detailing Concrete Reinforcement. b. ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. c. ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures.




FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. Brick Institute of America (BIA):


4. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA):


B. Erector's Qualifications: Installation shall be performed only by a qualified mason with at least five (5) years documented experience in installations of a similar nature, and as approved by the Engineer.

C. Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown, scheduled, or otherwise required for

unit masonry construction, the Contractor shall provide concrete masonry units and mortar as tested and listed for the particular construction.

D. The concrete masonry units shall be obtained from one manufacturer, and cured by one

process. All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that could interfere with the proper laying of the unit or would impair the strength or permanence of construction. Minor cracks incidental to the usual method of manufacture, or minor chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery are acceptable.

1. Concrete masonry units for exposed to view conditions shall be free of surface

defects that are noticeable and objectionable from a distance of 10 feet.

2. Color and Texture: The units shall be of uniform color and texture for each continuous area and visually related area.

E. Neither the source nor the brands of mortar materials shall be changed during

construction of this Project.

F. The independent testing laboratory shall not be changed during the construction of the project, unless otherwise approved by the Department.

G. Comply with recommendations of the National Lime Association and Portland Cement

Association for mortar requirements. H. Cold Weather Requirements: Masonry shall be protected from freezing when the

temperature of the surrounding air is 40 degrees F. and falling, with materials heated and temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work provided. Comply with all applicable governing codes and the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the BIA Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

I. Hot Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.

1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity

greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

J. Techniques of laying, finishing and grouting of masonry shall conform to the

requirements of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation From Plumb: 1. Vertical Lines and Surfaces of Columns, Walls, and Arrises: Do not exceed the

following tolerances, except walls around elevator shall be within tolerances required by elevator manufacturer:

a. 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. 3/8 inch in a story height, maximum 20 feet. c. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. 2. External Corners, Expansion joints, Control Joints, and Other Conspicuous Lines:

Do not exceed the following tolerances: a. 1/4 inch in any story, maximum 20 feet. b. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. 3. Vertical Alignment of Head Joints: Do not exceed the following tolerances: a. 3/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Variations From Level: 1. Bed Joints and Lines of Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, Horizontal Grooves and

Other Conspicuous Lines: Do not exceed the following tolerances: a. 1/4 inch in any bay, maximum 20 feet. b. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. 2. Top Surface of Bearing Walls: Do not exceed the following tolerances:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. 1/8 inch between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16 inch within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: 1. Position Shown in Plan and Related Portion of Columns, Walls, and Partitions:

Do not exceed the following tolerances: a. 1/2 inch in any bay, maximum 20 feet. b. 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: 1. Columns and Thickness of Walls, from Dimensions Shown: Do not exceed the

following tolerances: a. Minus 1/4 inch nor plus 2 inch. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: 1. Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data for each different

masonry unit, accessory, and other manufacturer product specified. B. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: 1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and

placement of wall reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315. C. Samples: Submit the following samples: 1. Unit masonry samples for each type of exposed masonry unit required. 2. Precast Concrete Formed Units: One (1) sample approximately 6 inches by 6

inches by 2 inches thick to illustrate quality, color and texture of surface finish.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. Anchors, Ties, Joint Reinforcement: Two (2) of each type proposed for use. 4. Mortar: For mortar colorant, provide manufacturer’s box of standard colors. Also

provide two (2) cured mortar samples matching Engineer's color selection.

5. 12 inch long sample of control joint gasket. D. Certifications: 1. Mortar and Masonry Units: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's written

certification that the concrete masonry units and all components of the masonry mortar meet or exceed all the requirements set forth in this Section.

2. Reinforcing Steel: The Contractor shall provide mill certificates for all concrete reinforcing steel.

E. Design Mixes:

1. Type "S" Mortar: Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit

independent laboratory test results confirming the proposed mix design meets the requirements of ASTM C 270, Type "S" mortar. Average test results of a minimum of three samples shall have a compressive strength of 1,900 psi for a two-inch cube at 28 days.

2. Grout Design Mix: The Contractor shall submit the grout mix design. The grout

for reinforced masonry walls shall be a pumpable, pearock concrete mix with a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The concrete masonry units, precast concrete formed units, and mortar materials shall be

delivered to the site undamaged, on pallets, stacked to allow air circulation and shall be covered and protected from rain, ground water, soiling, staining, or intermixture with earth or other materials.

B. Mortar materials shall be stored off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, felt paper,

or polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location. Damaged materials shall be removed from the Site and replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. The concrete masonry units shall have nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long by 8

inches high by 8 inches wide (15-5/8 inches by 7-5/8 inches by 7-5/8 inches actual), unless otherwise indicated. The Contractor shall provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers and other special conditions.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Smooth Face Unscored Units: Provide smooth face unscored units in locations

indicated. 2. Minimum Thickness of Face Shells and Webs: Face shell thicknesses (FST) and

web thicknesses (WT) shall conform with the following requirements, and in accordance with ASTM C 140:

a. Nominal 8 Inch Wide Units:

(1) FST: 1-1/4 inches.

(2) WT: 1 inch.

(3) Equivalent WT: 2-1/4 inches.

B. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C 90, Type II,

pursuant to modifications in Architectural Concrete Masonry Units in Florida@ published by the Florida Concrete and Products Association.

1. Weight Classification: Normal weight.

C. Hollow non-load-bearing concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C 129. D. Concrete masonry units for exposed conditions shall have length and height tolerances

that do not exceed 1/16 inch +/- (a total not to exceed 1/8 inch). In locations where both sides are exposed, the width tolerances shall be 1/32 inch +/- in thickness (a total not to exceed 1/16 inch).

E. Performance Requirements: General: After 28 days from the time of manufacture,

concrete masonry units shall conform to the strength and absorption requirements specified herein. The 28 day time period shall include a minimum of 7 days prior to delivery to the project site.

1. Compressive Strength: Concrete masonry units shall have the following minimum

compressive strengths for the average net area:

a. Average of 3 Units: 2800 psi.

b. Individual Unit: 2500 psi.

2. Water Absorption: The maximum water absorption (average of 3 units) shall be 10 lb/cf for normal weight units with an oven dry weight of concrete of more than 128 lb/cf.

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Provide precast units of manufacturer’s standard type with standard fine and coarse concrete aggregates and mixes to provide engineered units having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,400 psi. Lintels shall be scored to match adjacent scored concrete masonry units.

2.03 ANCHOR DEVICES A. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Material: a. Exterior Block Reinforcement: 0.188 inch for side rods and 0.148 inch for

cross rods, unless otherwise recommended in the manufacturer's published technical data.

b. Interior Block Reinforcement: 9 gauge edge rods. 2. Size: 2 inches less than width of wall. 3. Finish: Hot dip galvanized (1.5 oz. coating) after fabrication. ASTM A 153,

Class B-2. 4. Products, Single Wythe Walls: Provide one of the following joint reinforcement

products: a. Dur-O-Wal Truss; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Lox All Truss-Mesh #120"; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Truss; National Wire Products Industries. 5. Products, Double Wythe Cavity Walls: Provide one of the following joint

reinforcement products: a. "Dur-O-Eye"; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. ALox All Adjustable Eye-Wire #170"; Hohmann & Barnard. c. "Adjustable Truss Assembly with Double Hook & Eye"; National Wire

Products Industries. 6. For Corners and Intersections: Use prefabricated corners and tees. B. Anchors for Concrete Backup: 1. Dovetail Slot Inserts:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. Material: 20 gauge zinc coated sheet steel. b. Size: 1inch back, 5/8 inch face, 1inch deep. c. Products: Provide one of the following dovetail slot insert products: (1) Dovetail Anchor Slot; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. (2) #305 Series Dovetail Anchor Slot; Hohmann & Barnard. (3) Dovetail Anchor Slot; National Wire Products Industries. 2. Dovetail Anchors: a. Material: 16 gauge zinc coated corrugated sheet steel. b. Size: 7/8 inch minimum width, 3-1/2 inches long. c. Products: Provide one of the following dovetail anchor products: (1) Dovetail Brick Anchors; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. (2) #303 Corrugated Dovetail Brick Tie; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. (3) 515 Series, Dovetail Partition Anchor Tie with Corrugation;

National Wire Products Industries. C. Channel-Slot Anchors:

1. Channel-Slots:

a. Material: 16 gauge zinc coated sheet steel.

b. Size: 1-3/8 inch wide by 2 inch deep channels. 1/2 inch by 7-3/8 inch

slots, with 3/4 inch between slots. Length to suit installation conditions.

c. Products: Provide one of the following channel-slot anchor products:

(1) Long Type 133"; Heckman.

(2) An equivalent product by Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or National Wire Products Industries.

2. Anchors:

a. Material: 16 gauge zinc coated corrugated sheet steel.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Size: 1-1/4 inches wide. Length to suit installation conditions. c. Products: Provide anchors by one of the following manufacturers:

(1) Heckman.

(2) Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

(3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

(4) National Wire Products Industries.

2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, non-staining, without air

entrainment and of natural color. B. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand shall conform to ASTM C 144, hard, free of clay, loam, dust or organic matter. D. Water shall conform to ASTM C 270 and be clean and free of deleterious materials that

would impair the strength or bond. Sea water or water containing salts shall not be used. Water for colored mortar shall be stored in new containers or obtained from city water supply.

E. Masonry Cement: Comply with ASTM C 91.

1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer=s standard formulations.

2.05 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, unless otherwise acceptable to the Department. Use one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise approved by the Department.

B. Aggregate: Aggregates for grout shall conform to ASTM C 404.

1. Size No. 89 aggregate for coarse grout.

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type "F".


FPID 416537-2-52-01

D. Air Entraining Admixtures: The use of air-entraining admixtures is not permitted for grout.

E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type "A", containing not more than 0.1%

chloride ions.

F. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM D 495, Type "D", containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions.

G. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. Provide admixtures manufacturer's written certification that the chloride ion complies with specified requirements.

H. Water: Potable.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets:

1. Styrene-butadiene rubber compound conforming to ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as recommended for wall as indicated.

2. Provide maximum horizontal spacing of vertical control joints as follows:

a. Exterior Walls: For walls with horizontal joint reinforcing 16 inches o.c.,

space vertical control joints not more than 26 feet o.c.

b. Interior Walls: For walls with horizontal joint reinforcing 16 inches o.c., space vertical control joints not more than 32 feet o.c.

C. Reglets for Concealed Flashings:

Description: Stainless steel flashing reglet designed for use with cast-in-place concrete construction and in mortar joints of masonry walls. Material thickness shall be .020 inch. Reglet shall have a 1 inch factory-formed end lap. Continuous slot shall be 1-1/8 inch deep by 7/16 inch wide. Products: Provide one of the following products:

1. Original Reglet; Fry Reglet Corporation.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Type B Reglet ; Cheney Flashing Company. D. Concealed Flashings: 1. Concealed flashings shall be 3 oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of

bituminous impregnated creped kraft paper or saturated felt. 2. Products: Provide one of the following concealed flashing products:

a. "Cop-A-Bond Duplex"; AFCO Products Inc. b. "Cop-R-Tex Duplex"; York Manufacturing, Inc. c. "Copper Armored Sisalkraft"; Fortifiber Corp. E. Cold-Applied Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing Material: Asphalt-based emulsions

recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to manufacturer’s instructions. Provide a heavy mastic grade emulsified asphalt for trowel application, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents, and containing nonasbestos fiber, complying with ASTM D 4586 (asbestos-free).

1. Products: Provide one of the following dampproofing products:

a. AHydrocide 700 Mastic@; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Chemrex Corp.

b. A920 Fibrator (Trowel Grade)@; Karnak Chemical Corp.

c. ALiquid Asphalt 484 Emulsion@; Koppers Industries, Inc.

d. AType 3 - Trowel-on Grade@; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

F. Weep Holes: Provide medium density polyethylene plastic tubing with cotton sash cord

wicking material inserted in tube. Size tube to properly accept wicking material, provide suitable drainage, and in lengths acceptable for depth of outer wythe of masonry construction.

1. Provide length of wicking material as required to produce 2 inch exposure on

exterior and 18 inch vertically in cavity between wythes. 2.07 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar shall meet requirements of ASTM C 270 Type S mortar. B. Mortar mixes with proportions, measured by volume, for unit masonry work shall be

one of the following, at the Contractor’s option:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. 1 part masonry cement, 4-1/2 parts sand (maximum), and 2 part portland cement.

2. 1 part portland cement, 1/4 to 2 part hydrated lime, and 4-1/2 parts sand (maximum).

C. The freezing point of the mortar shall not be lowered by use of admixtures or anti-freeze

agents. D. The mortar mix shall comply with ASTM C 270, except materials shall be limited to

those specified herein, and cement/lime ratio shall be not more than 2 part lime per part of portland cement.

E. Cement setting bed shall be 1 part portland cement with 2 parts damp setting bed sand,

with water to dampen sand, if required, but not added to the mix. F. Mixing shall be performed in a machine mixer for a minimum of 5 minutes with

sufficient water to produce a workable mix. Each batch shall have 1 or more full bags of cement. Colored mortar shall use complete contents of measured container.

G. Measure shall be by volume in buckets or boxes. Measure by shovel is not acceptable. H. Mortar shall be used within 2 hours after mixing. Re-tempering shall be permitted

within two hours, maximum. Re-tempering shall only be allowed once per batch. Re-tempering of colored mortar shall not be permitted. Contractor shall note that additional water may cause significant lightening of the mortar.

I. Mortar shall not be deposited on or permitted in contact with the ground. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the area and conditions under which the concrete masonry units are to be

installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Walls shall be laid out in advance to accurately and properly locate openings,

movement-type joints, returns and offsets. The use of less-than-half-size units at corners and jamb shall be avoided. The walls shall be laid-up plumb in a full bed of mortar with full head joints pushed, not slushed. Evidence of slushing shall require installer to rebuild the walls. Units shall be laid true with all courses level. Units shall be cut with a masonry saw, not broken. Abutting walls shall be bonded together at alternate courses.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Masonry unit pattern shall be common running bond unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

C. All joints shall be tooled concave except as follows:

1. Mortar joints in walls with scored block exposed to view shall be raked and tooled to match cast-in score in block unit. However, scored block walls in the corridor and vault shall have joints tooled concave and the block scores tuckpointed and tooled concave.

2. Joints to receive sealants shall have mortar raked out 2 inch deep. Jointing shall

measure 3/8 inch wide, normally, including those around interior door frames.

3. Provide "weathered" joint profile for joints at bottom of indented headers and rowlock courses.

D. Units disturbed after laying shall be removed, cleaned, and re-laid in fresh mortar. If

adjustments are required, masonry units shall be removed, cleaned of mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.

E. Masonry work shall be stopped only by raking (stepping) back 2 masonry unit

increments in each course. Grout pours shall be stopped 4 inches below tops of units. Prior to resuming work, loose units and unbonded mortar shall be removed.

F. Units shall be laid in alignment on face primarily exposed to view. If both faces are

exposed, the Engineer shall be consulted as to which face to favor. Favored or exposed walls shall be laid from that side only.

G. Trowel-apply dampproofing material to block cavity surface in strict accordance with

manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Trowel Grade: Trowel apply a coat of mastic asphalt emulsion dampproofing onto substrate at a minimum rate of 7 gal./100 sq. ft., to produce a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 60 mils.

H. Items specified under other Sections shall be built-in as the work progresses.

1. Concealed flashings shall be continuous with overlap of 6 inches, minimum.

2. In cavity wall, flashing shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. Flashing shall be cut flush with the exterior wythe of the wall after exterior wythe is installed. Flashing shall be set into reglet and locked in place with vinyl rope. Install weep holes a maximum 24 inches o.c. and as specified. Protect flashing until exterior wythe is installed.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. At heads and sills, flashing shall be carried 6 inches beyond ends of opening or steel lintel. Flashing shall be turned up at ends to form a pan. Corners shall be folded not cut.

I. Beginning at the lowest multiple of 16 inches, wall steel reinforcing shall be placed in

bed joints 16 inches on centers and where otherwise noted on drawings, with 8 inch laps at splices and bed corners. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes in cavity wall construction.

J. Hollow metal frames abutting masonry and concrete shall be grouted solid allowing for

joint for sealant between frame and masonry unit. K. Masonry units shall not be laid when the mean temperature is 40 degrees F or below.

Minimum temperature of units when laid shall be 35 degrees F. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Partially completed masonry shall be protected against the weather, when work is not in

progress, by covering the tops of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least 24 inches down both sides of walls and held securely in place. Unbraced walls shall be properly braced against lateral forces.

B. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be protected against staining. Misplaced mortar shall be

removed immediately. Work shall proceed on shady side of building where possible to protect mortar from too rapid drying.

3.04 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 2 feet for

block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 WEEP HOLES

A. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Form weep holes with specified weep assembly, spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after

mortar has set.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. Maintain space in cavity in wall in front of weep holes clear of mortar droppings.

3.06 LOW-LIFT GROUTING A. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove

dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures.

1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained

sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.

2. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Tie vertical reinforcement to

dowels at base of masonry and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Comply with ACI 530.1.

3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with

not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.

a. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. 4. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry,

extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2 inches of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required.

3.07 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Mixers, boxes and all tools shall be cleaned with a forceful spray of water and hand

scrubbing after each use and at the end of each day. B. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or

otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

C. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge all voids or holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar, striking surface flush with minimal smearing of mortar


FPID 416537-2-52-01

adjacent to patch. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of joint sealants.

D. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after

final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK Bulletin No. 8-2 - Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Walls.

3.08 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION OF GROUT

(CONCRETE CELL FILL) A. General: The Department will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to

submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the following, as directed by the Engineer.

1. Sampling and Testing Fresh Grout: ASTM C 1019, except modified for slump to

comply with ASTM C 94.

a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. Specified slump for grout shall be in accordance with ACI 530-4.2.2.2; Desired consistency of grout shall be considered achieved when slump falls between 8 and 11 inches.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal

weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air

temperature is 40 degrees F and below, when 90 degrees F and above, and one test for each sample of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimen: Three specimens shall constitute one

sample to be tested at each age of test; one set of 4 standard samples for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store specimens for laboratory-cured testing except when field-cure test specimens are required.

e. Compressive Strength Tests: One set of 4 standard samples for each day's

pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one sample tested at 7 days, two samples tested at 28 days, and one sample retained in reserve for later testing if required.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

f. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and

Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device

may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified.

3.09 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION OF BLOCK,

MORTAR OR BLOCK/MORTAR ASSEMBLAGE

A. The average moisture content of individual concrete masonry units shall be limited to 25% saturation during delivery, storage, and installation. A minimum of three representative, randomly chosen blocks for every 5,000 sq. ft. of wall shall be sampled, tested, and reported by methods complying with ASTM C 140.

B. The average compressive strength of individual concrete masonry units shall be in

accordance with Paragraph 2.01 E. Performance Requirements of this specification. A minimum of three representative, randomly chosen blocks for every 5,000 sq. ft. of wall shall be sampled, tested, and reported by methods complying with ASTM C 140. Individual blocks used in moisture content tests shall not be used for compressive strength testing. Sampled units destined for compressive strength testing shall be maintained in their "as-received" condition until testing.

C. The average compressive strength of concrete masonry unit prisms (one or more

masonry units mortared on top of another) shall be 1,500 psi at 28 days. A minimum of three prisms for every 5,000 sq. ft. of wall shall be constructed, tested and reported by methods complying with ASTM E 447, Method "B". The method of constructing, curing, and testing of prisms shall not vary throughout the Project.

D. Perform quality control tests on mortar complying with ASTM C 780 for every 500 sq.

ft. of wall placed.


FPID 416537-2-52-01




STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and

details to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required.

B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" and as otherwise shown on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING: Section 05400. B. METAL FABRICATIONS: Section 05500. C. PAINTING: Section 09900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. b. AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of

Structural Steel for Buildings, including "Commentary" and Supplements.

c. AISC Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490

Bolts; approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC).





FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS

"Standard Qualification Procedure." 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily

passed AWS qualification tests within previous twelve (12) months. a. If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Design-Build

firm's responsibility.

C. All structural steel work and material is subject to inspection and testing. The expense of removing and replacing any structural steel for testing purposes shall be borne by the Design-Build firm if it is found to be unsatisfactory. Remove and replace work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work at no additional expense to the Department.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication

and assembly of structural steel members procedures and diagrams. a. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent

data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

b. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of

anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. B. Product Data: 1. Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for

following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).

a. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports

covering chemical and physical properties. b. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. c. Structural steel primer paint.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

d. Shrinkage-resistant grout. Welding Certifications: 1. Submit copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 2. Design-Build firm shall submit certificates to the Department’s Commercial Inspection

Agency for review prior to submittal to the Engineer for review. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. C. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed, at no additional cost to the Department. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: 1. For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S. Finish to be galvanized. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 36, galvanized. E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: 1. Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: a. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code E70XX. The use of AJetrod@ is not permitted. G. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. H. Non-Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: 1. Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Type A. 2. Products: Provide one of the following grout products: a. "Euco NS"; Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Crystex"; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. B. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. C. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. D. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. E. Welded Connections: 1. All shop connections shall be seal welded for exposed structural steel. F. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections. G. Bolted Connection: 1. Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" (RCSC). H. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. I. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. J. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop drawings. K. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. L. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces that are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: 1. After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning." or b. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Painting: 1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2. Primer shall be compatible with finish coat paint products specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING for structural steel indicated or scheduled to be finish painted. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Surveys: Employ a registered professional land surveyor in the State of Florida for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Engineer. Do not proceed with erection until the surveyor's report has been submitted, corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Engineer. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. D. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

G. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. H. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. 1. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. I. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. J. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. K. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. L. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. M. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. N. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts only after notification and acceptance by the Engineer. O. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Engineer. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. P. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Department will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to visually inspect all of the high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Perform a magnetic particle test on 25 percent of all fillet welds. If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested at Design-Build firm's expense. 2. Provide a minimum ten (10) day notice to the testing agency prior to commencement of erection work. B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Engineer reserves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirements. E. At Design-Build firm's expense, correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory tests reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Design-Build firm's expense, as may be necessary to re-confirm any non-compliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. Remove from time to time as directed, all rubbish and debris resulting from the work and upon completion of the work, remove all unused materials, equipment, scaffolding, and similar construction related items, and perform final cleaning services as may be necessary to leave job in a condition acceptable to the Department. PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item



METAL DECKING 05300-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 05300 – METAL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Extent of metal decking is indicated on the Drawings, including basic for the following type of deck required.

1. Metal Roof Deck

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310.

B. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Section 05120.

C. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING: Section 05400.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. AISI Specification of the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. Referenced Standards.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel. b. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.

4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. SDI Pub. No 28 Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof

Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Decks with Electrical Distribution.

B. Qualification of Field Welding:

1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure.”

C. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. The expense of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes will be done by the Department if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installations instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer’s certification as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details (including the type, size, spacing, location of all welds/screws), and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories.

C. Insurance Certification:

1. Assist the Department in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Provide metal decking by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp.

2. Wheeling Corrugating Co. Div. Of Wheeling Pittsburgh Steel Corp.

3. Epic Metals Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, Grade A.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.

C. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Cold zinc galvanizing compound from FDOT Qualified Product List..

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Roof Deck Units:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI “Roof Deck Specifications,” of metal thickness, depth and width indicated.

B. General:

1. Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with flush, telescoped or bested 2” laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal Cover Plates:

1. Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting deck units of not less than same thickness as decking. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6” wide.

D. Metal Closure Strips:

1. Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings between decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045” minimum (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of decking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and current recommendations and approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

2. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

3. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units.

4. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive defection.

5. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members.

6. Don not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry.

7. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.

B. Fastening Roof Deck Units:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Fasten roof deck to steel supporting members as shown on roof plans. In addition, secure deck to each supporting member in ribs where side laps occur.

3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding for appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer.

C. Touch-Up Painting:

1. After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. Touch up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces.

D. Cutting and Fitting:

1. Cut neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.

E. Reinforcement at openings:

1. Proved additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, as shown.

F. Joint Covers:

1. Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of deck units, except where taped joints are allowed.

G. Closure Strips:

1. Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation.

3.2 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove from time to time as directed, all rubbish and debris resulting from work and upon completion of the work, remove all unused materials, equipment, scaffolding, and similar construction related items, and perform such final cleaning services as may be necessary to leave job in a condition acceptable to the Department.



FPID 416537-2-52-01


COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install cold formed metal framing systems as indicated on the Drawings and

specified herein. B. Types of metal framing systems include: 1. Structural C type shaped steel studs. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Section 05120.

B. METAL FABRICATIONS: Section 05500. C. PLASTER AND STUCCO: Section 09220. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: The Engineer has shown design conditions and effects required,

however; arrangement, bracing, hanging, and support method for metal framing systems shall be the responsibility of the Design-Build firm and the Design-Build firm’s Installer.

B. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with

AISC "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".

C. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the Florida Building Code. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 Structural Welding

Code -- Steel and AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel.

E. Reference Standards: Comply with referenced standards of the following, unless otherwise indicated or specified:

1. American Galvanizers Association (AGA).

2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).


FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. American Welding Society (AWS). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for each

material. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings, including design calculations, signed and sealed by a

Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida, for exterior stud assemblies including sizes, gages, spacing, fasteners, and supports.

2. Include special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in

manufacturer's product data and placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, splices, accessories, and details as required for proper installation.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Upon delivery to the site, store materials in their original unopened packages in an

enclosed shelter providing protection from damage from exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site and replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products: For each of the metal framing types listed herein, provide products by one of

the following manufacturers: 1. Screw-Type Drywall Metal Studs and Ceiling Support Members: a. Dale Industries, Inc. b. National Gypsum Company. c. Unimast, Inc. 2. Structural C Type Shaped Steel Studs: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Dale/Incor Industries of Florida.

c. Marino Ware Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.

d. Unimast, Inc.

2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners

(tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoe reinforcements, fasteners and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, and/or as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

2.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Screw-Type Drywall Metal Studs, Ceiling Support Members, and Accessories: 1. Metal Studs: ASTM C 645, 25 gauge minimum thickness of hot-dipped

galvanized base metal, complying with ASTM A 653, G40 for zinc coating. Use 20 gauge where limited heights and loading (i.e. ceramic tile, cabinets) as recommended by stud manufacturer are exceeded.

a. Depth of Section: As indicated. b. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor

and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work.

2. Furring Members: Comply with the following: a. ASTM C 645; 25 gauge minimum thickness of base metal, hat shaped. b. Fasteners for Furring Members: Type and size recommended by furring

manufacturer for the substrate and application required. 3. Screw-Type Ceiling Support Members: Comply with the following: a. Furring Channels: ASTM C 645; 25 gauge minimum thickness of hot-dip

galvanized base metal, hat shaped, complying with ASTM A 653, G40 for zinc coating.

b. Runner Channels: 16 gauge minimum thickness of hot-dip galvanized

base metal, 1-1/2 inches channel depth.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

c. Hanger and Tie Wire: 9 gauge minimum for hanger and 18 gage minimum for tie.

4. Screws shall be corrosion-resistant steel, self-drilling and tapping type, with

cross-recessed heads, 3/8 inch low-profile head. B. Structural C Type Shaped Steel Studs: 1. For 16 gauge and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural

quality hot-dip galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, Grade 40, G60 zinc coating.

2. For 18 gauge and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of

commercial quality hot-dip galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, Grade 33, G60 zinc coating.

3. "C"-Shape Studs: Manufacturer's standard load-bearing steel studs of size, shape

and gauge indicated, with 1.625 inches minimum flange and flange return lip. C. Framing Accessories: Fabricate steel framing accessories of the same material, finish,

and yield stress used for framing members. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 2.04 PREFABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STUDS A. General: Structural framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to

erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, and true to line.

B. Fasten framing components by welding only, unless noted otherwise. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and

erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which cold formed metal framing shall be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. All partitions and framing shall be aligned accurately as shown on Drawings. All runners shall be securely attached to concrete slabs, metal joists or beams with power driven anchors or other suitable fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and current recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Floor runner-tracks shall be set in full bed of sealant. Ceiling and floor tracks shall be

anchored at 24 inch centers and positioned to insure vertical alignment of partitions. Studs of proper length shall be placed in tracks and rotated into place for a friction fit and secured on both tracks with screws. Double studs shall be provided at all openings.

C. A minimum of 3 studs shall be installed at all partition intersections. Studs located at

partition intersections shall be secured with screws through both flanges of studs and tracks. Headers for openings shall be a cut-to-length section of track with the flanges slit and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent studs.

D. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever

walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings and similar work.

E. Wood blocking or plates shall be securely installed as required for equipment or other

material support.

E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections to provide a complete and stable wall framing system.

F. For field-installed (non-prefabricated) structural studs, attach similar components by

welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator, and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.

1. Comply with AWS recommendations and procedures for welding, appearance,

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2. Locate and install mechanical fasteners according to cold-formed metal framing manufacturer’s published instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.

G. Wire tying of framing components shall not be permitted, except where indicated for

suspended drywall ceilings. 3.03 REPAIRS

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint


FPID 416537-2-52-01

according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer’s written instructions. PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all metal fabrications as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified

herein. B. Miscellaneous metal work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Pipe Bollards. 2. Miscellaneous Steel Framing and Supports. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310.

B. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Section 05120.

C. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING: Section 05400. D. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Section 07600. E. FINISH HARDWARE: Section 08710.

F. PAINTING: Section 09900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise indicated or specified:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

b. AISC Specification for Structural Buildings Allowable Stress

Design and Plastic Design with Commentary.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):




FPID 416537-2-52-01



a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.

5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):


B. Qualifications for Welding Work:

1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure.”

2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily

passed AWS qualification tests within previous twelve (12) months.

a. If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Design-Build firm’s responsibility.

3. Special care shall be taken to keep welding electrodes free of moisture.

C. Field measurements shall be taken prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,

where possible. Trimming and fitting shall be allowed for wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the work.

D. Items shall be preassembled in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Units shall be disassembled only as necessary for handling and shipping limitations. Disassembled units shall be clearly marked for reassembly.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for stair nosings, paint products, safety chain, and steel gate.

a. Shop Drawings:

2. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Include

plans, elevations, details of sections and connections, anchorages and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installations.

3. Welding Certifications: Submit certificates for welding procedures and personnel.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. Design-Build firm shall submit certificates to the Department’s Commercial

Inspection Agency for review prior to submittal to the Engineer for review. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be delivered to the site undamaged and shall be stored and protected

from the elements by covering in plastic. All material damaged prior to Final Acceptance shall be removed from the Site and replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications work which will be exposed to view,

only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness shall be used.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Conform to ASTM A 36. C. Steel Pipe: Conform to ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 40, black finish unless

galvanizing is required. 2.02 FASTENERS A. General: 1. Zinc-coated fasteners shall be used for exterior locations or where built into

exterior walls wherever possible. 2. Fasteners and connections shall be welded wherever possible. B. Nuts and bolts shall be regular hexagon type conforming to ASTM A307, Grade A. C. Lag bolts shall be square head type conforming to ANSI B18.2.1. D. Machine screws shall be cadmium plated steel conforming to ANSI B18.6.3. E. Wood screws shall be flat head carbon steel conforming to ANSI B18.6.1. F. Washers shall be round, carbon steel conforming to ANSI B18.22.1. G. Masonry anchorage devices shall be expansion shields conforming to ASTM E 488.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

H. Toggle bolts shall be tumble-wing type conforming to Federal Specification (FS) FF-B-588, type, class and style as required.

I. Lock washers shall be helical spring-type carbon steel conforming to ANSI B18.21.1. 2.03 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metals: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing,

lead-and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in

galvanized steel, with dry firm containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A (SH) or SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Dissimilar Metals Coating:

1. Product: “Scotch-Clad Brand Protective Coating No. 1706"; 3M Corp. 2.04 FINISHES

A. General:

1. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designation of finishes.

2. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-

dip process in compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with

minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exterior: SSPC-SP 6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.”

2. Interior: SSPC-SP 3 “Power Tool Cleaning.”


FPID 416537-2-52-01

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.

2.05 FABRICATION A. Pipe Bollards: 1. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized, in sizes indicated

on Drawings. Fill with concrete and round-off top. B. Miscellaneous Steel Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural

steel framework, as required to complete the Work. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size, shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction, using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

2. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete. Furnish

cast-in-place inserts if units are required to be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches on center.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the metal fabrications are to be installed.

Do not proceed until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Materials of type, size and thickness shown shall be used, or if not shown, of required

size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished product. Metal shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles.

B. Exposed work shall be formed true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces

and straight sharp edges. Exposed edges shall be eased to a radius of 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Bent metal corners shall be formed to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation, or otherwise impairing work.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. All corners and seams shall be welded continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

D. Shearing and punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. Curved work shall be

evenly sprung. E. Exposed connections shall be formed with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using

concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners shall be of the type shown or, if not shown, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts shall be used.

F. Anchoring devices shall be fabricated and spaced to provide adequate support for the

intended use. G. Metal fabrications shall be cut, reinforced, drilled and tapped, as required, to receive

finish hardware and similar items. H. All steel fabrications to be installed in exterior locations (outside the building) shall be

galvanized as specified. I. All metal fabrications shall be installed as shown on the Drawings, and adjusted to

satisfactorily fulfill the use for which such is intended. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. All exposed surfaces shall be left clean and free from all blemishes or discolorations after erection.




ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Types of work in this Section include, but are not limited to, rough carpentry for: 1. Wood grounds, nailers, plates and blocking. 2. Wood furring. 3. Plywood sheathing and backing.

4. Decay and termite resistant wood treatment. 5. Fire resistant wood treatment.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. UNIT MASONRY: Section 04220. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified: 1. American Forest & Paper Association (AFPA): a. Manual for Wood Frame Construction. 2. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC): a. Board of Review. 3. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA): a. APA Standard Grading Rules. b. Form No. E30K - APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential &

Commercial. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. Reference Standards. 5. American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA):


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. Reference Standards. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): a. Reference Standards. 7. U.S. Department of Commerce (DOC), National Institute of Standards and

Technology: a. Referenced Product Standards (PS). 8. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): a. SPIB Standard Grading Rules. 9. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): a. WCLIB Standard Grading Rules. 10. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): a. WWPA Standard Grading Rules. b. Recommended Nailing Schedule. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for Treated Lumber: 1. Submit treatment plant's data showing the lumber type, certification by the

treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of treatment retained, and conformance with applicable standards. Include a statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 19 percent prior to shipment to the Site.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Maintain materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and

contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

B. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, provide space

between each course to provide air circulation.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate

fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, plates, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber Standards, General: 1. Manufacture lumber to comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber

Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC Board of Review.

2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency

evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

3. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide

actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.

4. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of

dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounds, Blocking, Plates, Nailers, Blocking, Furring, and Similar Members: 1. Grounds, blocking, plates, nailers, furring, and similar members shall be standard

grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 2 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules, or No. 2 boards per SPIB rules.

C. Plywood Panels: 1. Comply with DOC PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA Form No. E30K.

2. Factory mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing

compliance with grade requirements. 3. Where construction panels are used for the following concealed types of

applications, provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with


FPID 416537-2-52-01

requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, and thickness:

a. Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing. (1) Thickness: as indicated. (2) Exposure Durability Classification: Exterior. (3) Span Rating: 16/0, 20/0, 24/0, as required to suit stud spacing

indicated. b. Backing Panels: (1) For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-

retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in 15/32 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated.

c. Canopy Structure Parapet Walls: Provide pressure-treated plywood

sheathing as specified above and as follows: (1) Thickness: 3/4 inch. (2) Venting Provisions: Sawcut continuous 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 inch

deep vertical kerfs at 4 inches on center on back side of sheathing. Hold bottom of sheathing 1 inch clear from roof deck surface.

D. Fasteners and Anchorages: 1. Provide size, type, material, and finish as indicated and as recommended by

applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers, and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.

2. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of

high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating pursuant to ASTM A 153.

E. Decay and Termite Resistant Wood Treatment: 1. All lumber and plywood specified for decay and termite resistant treatment shall

be pressure treated according to AWPA Standard P-5 and FS TT-W-550. 2. Products: Provide one of the following treatments:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

a. “CCA”; Hoover Treated Wood Products. b. “Osmose K-33"; Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Inc. F. Fire Resistant Wood Treatment: 1. All lumber and plywood specified for fire resistant treatment shall be pressure

impregnated with fire retardant products. Such products shall not subject the wood to deterioration when exposed to heat and humidity.

2. Products: provide one of the following treatments: a. “Pyro-Guard”; Hoover Treated Wood Products. b. “Osmose Flame Proof”; Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Inc. 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT A. Decay and Termite Resistant Wood Treatment: Chemicals shall be applied in a closed

cylinder by vacuum-pressure process in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with the approved standards and recommended treating practices as listed in AWPA Standards C2 and C9 or the appropriate AWPA standard covering the commodity treated and as listed in FS TT-W-571.

1. After treatment and before shipment, lumber 2" nominal or less shall be dried to a

15-19 percent moisture content. 2. Plywood shall be dried after treatment and before shipment to moisture content of

18 percent or less. B. Fire Resistant Wood Treatment: 1. Chemicals shall be applied in a closed cylinder by vacuum-pressure in strict

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to comply with the requirement for a flame spread of 25 or less with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested for 30 minutes duration under the standard test method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials; ASTM E 84; UL 723 and; AWPA C20 and AWPA C27.

2. Each piece of wood shall bear the mark of Underwriters’ Laboratories FR-S label,

indicating compliance with the fire hazard classification. 3. After treatment and before shipment, all fire treated wood shall be dried to an

average moisture content of 19 percent or less.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. Surfaces of wood that are to be exposed or painted shall be free from sludge or deposits of salts that would affect its paintability.

C. Provide decay (termite) and fire treatment of the following lumber: Location Treatment (General) Wood members in contact with concrete, Decay (Termite) used in connection with roofing, or exposed to moisture Sheathing Decay (Termite) Plywood backing panels for mounting Fire electrical and telephone equipment PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which rough carpentry work is to be installed.

Do not proceed with rough carpentry work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Material with defects, which might impair the quality of the work, and units that

are too small to fabricate with a minimum of joints or the optimum joint arrangement, shall be discarded.

2. All rough carpentry work shall be set accurately to required levels and lines, with

members plumb and true, and accurately cut and fitted. 3. All rough carpentry work shall be securely attached to substrates by anchoring

and fastening as shown, and as required for structural adequacy. On exposed rough carpentry work, nail heads shall be countersunk and holes filled.

4. Fasteners shall be of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will

be exposed to view or will received finish materials. Tight connections shall be made. Fasteners shall be installed without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

5. Use washers where required for fasteners to avoid movement of material through

loading and/or vibration.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

6. Seal cut ends where exposed to moisture or where moisture could migrate via gravity, capillary action, expansion or pressure gradients.

B. Wood Grounds, Plates, Nailers, and Blocking: 1. Wood grounds, plates, nailers, and blocking shall be installed where indicated on

the Drawings, and wherever required for screeding or attachment of other work. Shapes shall be formed as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

a. Provide wood blocking behind all toilet stall handrails, wall guards, and

chair rails where installation substrates are gypsum wallboard. b. Provide wood blocking behind wall cabinets and shelving supports.

2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork prior to concrete placement.

C. Wood Furring: 1. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with

wood as required for tolerance of finished work. 2. Provide size and spacing shown and/or as required for design function and

durability, including attachment. Select furring for freedom from knots capable of producing bent-over nails and resulting damage to finish work.

D. Plywood Panels: 1. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E 30K for

types of plywood panels and applications indicated. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as follows, in strict accordance with the

Florida Building Code: a. Sheathing: Screw to metal stud supports. b. Backing Panels: Nail and/or screw to supports, as applicable. c. Canopy Structure Parapet Walls: Fasten to supporting substrates with

approved fasteners for particular installation conditions.


FPID 416537-2-52-01



UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07111-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 07111 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install, complete in all respects, the under-slab vapor barrier located under

all concrete floor slabs, including open corridors and walks within building line. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's published descriptive literature, including typical details

and installation instructions, for vapor barrier and mastic.

B. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) 12 inch by 12 inch samples of membrane. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver materials in bundles, rolls, and sealed containers bearing the

manufacturer's original labels. Store materials in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather, and maintain at not less than 50 degrees F for at least 24 hours before use. If material is dated for use or "shelf life" is indicated on the labels, all outdated material shall be removed from the Site.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane:

1. Material: Flexible plastic or plastic laminate membrane, minimum 8.0 mils in thickness.

2. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Nervastral; Nervastral, Inc.

UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07111-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Fiberweb 210 Underslab Vapor Barrier; Fiberweb Division of Hammerbeam, Inc.

c. Moistop Underslab; Fortiber Building Products.

d. Griffolyn Type 65G; Reef Industries.

B. Mastic: 1. Provide mastic compound as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the under-slab vapor barrier is to be

installed. Do not proceed with vapor barrier work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply directly to compacted earth base, under concrete slabs, one layer of the vapor

barrier membrane. Maintain 6 inch side laps and 9 inch end laps; turn down membrane 12 inches at slab/wall intersections.

B. Laps shall be fully sealed with mastic in strict accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions for application procedures and limitations for temperature and setting time.

C. Additional strips shall be used at penetrations of membrane to close openings in membrane. Set in mastic.

D. Extreme care and precaution shall be exercised after membrane has been applied to

prevent punctures, tears, and other abuses. Should such vapor barrier damage occur, repair the membrane by application of a membrane patch, sized to lap 9 inches on all sides of the damaged area, and set in a full bed of mastic.



END OF SECTION - 07111

BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed and exposed building insulation except insulation specified in other Sections for roof decks and sound attenuation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Product Data: For each type of insulation, identified as to its location, use, and means of attachment.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products.


A. Applicator: Approved, certified, or recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Amoco Foam Products Company. b. DiversiFoam Products. c. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co.

2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. d. Schuller International, Inc.

3. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex Inc. b. Partek Insulations, Inc. c. USG Interiors, Inc.

2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

2. Preformed Units: Sized for full wall thickness, unless specifically noted otherwise.

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process, complying with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below:

1. Type X, 1.30-lb/cu. Ft. (21-kg/cu. m) minimum density.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively.

3. Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene resins.

4. Minimum total thickness: 1 1/2 inches.


C. Foil-Faced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders and faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; and with other requirements indicated below:

1. Nominal Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m.)

2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.6 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

D. Unfaced, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining fibers of glass, slag wool, or rock wool with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). Minimum R11.

E. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of glass, slag wool, or rock wool with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. Minimum R11.

1. Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5-inch- (127-mm-) wide flanges along edges for attachment to framing members.

F. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Two component system, that when properly ratioed and propelled by compressed air, produces an expanding foam insulation which fills irregular cavities, sets cold in less than 60 seconds, and achieves final cure in less than 72 hours. ASTM D 1622. Density of 0.7 to 0.9 pcf dry.

2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS AND FASTENERS

A. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Board Type Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates and as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations, including removing projections capable of puncturing or interfering with insulation attachment.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.


C. Install plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Erect board insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. unless indicated or required otherwise.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced maximum 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

D. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to exterior side of construction. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping and smoke sealing.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction toensure airtight installation.

E. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

4. Set faced units with facing to exterior side of construction. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping and smoke sealing. Tape joints and ruptures in facing, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction.

F. Install board insulation in curtain wall construction as indicated on Drawings and according to curtain wall manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width between insulation and glass of dimension indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where


insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



METAL ROOF PANELS 07411-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels.

B. Thermal roof insulation.

C. Fastening system.

D. Factory finishing.

E. Accessories and miscellaneous components.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins.

B. Section 06 100 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.

C. Section 07 900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by

the Hot-Dip Process; 2006.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

2. Installation methods.

3. Specimen warranty.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration

conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special

conditions.

1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

C. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing

manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Florida Turnpike Enterprise's name and are registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing

systems similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of


FPID 416537-2-52-01

documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system

manufacturer.


A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize

damage to panels prior to installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-

applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that

show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or

peeling within specified warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of

roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out

water within specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PANELS

A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with

specified requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding

anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.

B. Metal Roofing: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.

1. Steel Panels:

a. Aluminum-coated steel conforming to ASTM A 463/A 463M; minimum Type

2 T2-65 coating.

b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.023 inch.

2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.5 inch seam height; concealed fastener

system for field seaming with special tool.

3. Texture: Smooth.

4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints.

5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches.

2.02 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated

aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered

to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.

2.03 PANEL FINISH

A. Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard multi-coat thermocured

coating system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with

minimum total dry film thickness of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as selected by Engineer

from manufacturer’s full range of colors (including metallic).

2.04 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, moldings, and closure strips,

of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items

completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel.

B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with

corrosion resistant finish, closed-cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC, or

combination steel and closed-cell foam.

C. Sealants

1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.

2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.

3. Seam sealant must be factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying type.

D. Underlayment: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D

1970; minimum thickness of 40 mils; with strippable release paper and slip-resistant

embossed polyethylene top surface.

E. Thermal Insulation for Field-Assembled Metal Roof Panels: Faced, Polyisocyanurate

Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type V (oriented-strand-board facing), with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively,

based on tests performed on unfaced core. The insulation board shall have a thermal

value of R19.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard

processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.

B. Joints: Factory-install captive gaskets, sealants, or separator strips at panel joints to


FPID 416537-2-52-01

provide weathertight seals, eliminate metal-to-metal contact, and minimize noise from

panel movements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been

properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations,

and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.

B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized

asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.

C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to

wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied

bituminous paint.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project

conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing

for thermal and structural movement.

1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise

recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.

2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use

methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is

absolutely prohibited.

B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including

flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, rib closures, and similar roof accessory items.

C. Composite Insulation: Install specified insulation using approved fasteners and

adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s latest written instructions and as required

by governing codes and Owner’s insurance carrier. Install with end joints staggered to


FPID 416537-2-52-01

avoid having insulation joints coinciding with joints in deck. In multi-layer

installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers.

D. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,

minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil

films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work

clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to

the finish.

B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide

temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work.

Protect roofing until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of

Substantial Completion.


Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001

Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza,

Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2


FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of this work includes the furnishing and installation of all sheet metal flashings,

counterflashings, coping, scuppers, downspouts, reglets, and all miscellaneous sheet metal work required for roofing and related work, complete as indicated on Drawings and by provision of this Section.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS: Section 01740.

B. UNIT MASONRY: Section 04220.

C. METAL FABRICATIONS: Section 05500. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Flashing and sheet metal work shall be fabricated by a qualified sheet metal

fabricator with at least five (5) years documented experience in installations of a similar nature.

B. Performance Criteria: Comply with the following:

1. Installation and fastening of all sheet metal work shall comply with Factory

Mutual Global (FMG) 1-90 wind uplift requirements in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, “Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement.”


1. Submit complete product data for each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, finishes, and installation instructions.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit complete shop drawings for all flashing and sheet metal work,

indicating fabrication, assembly, and attachment details, size of all


FPID 416537-2-52-01

members, fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances, and all necessary connections to work of other trades.

C. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Submit documented evidence of installer’s qualifications.

D. Warranty:

1. Submit specimen copy of specified warranty.

1.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Sheet metal materials shall be carefully handled to prevent damage to surfaces, edges, and ends; and shall be stored at the site above the ground in a covered, dry location. Damaged items that cannot be restored to original condition will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper

sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of work and protection of materials and finishes.

1.07 WARRANTY A. For other flashing and sheet metal work, provide the following warranty:

1. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year finish performance warranty.

B. Refer to Section 01740 - GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS for additional

requirements. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized (Hot-Dipped) Sheet Metal Material: 1. Galvanized (hot-dipped) sheet metal flashings, cleats, counter flashings, scuppers,

downspouts, and all miscellaneous sheet metal items indicated on Drawings shall be fabricated to shapes detailed on Drawings.

2. Galvanized steel sheet shall comply with ASTM A 653, G 90, commercial

quality, for hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, mill phosphatized where indicated for


FPID 416537-2-52-01

painting. Provide minimum 24 gauge material thickness, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Finish: a. Provide manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer 2-coat thermocured

coating system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

(1) Color shall match existing red trim color of existing

Administration Building.

b. Products, Resin Manufacturers: Provide fluoropolymer coating systems containing one of the following resins:

(1) "Hylar 5000"; Ausimont USA, Inc.

(2) "Kynar 500"; Atofina Chemicals, Inc.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for

type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below:

1. Factory Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum

thickness of 0.050 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finish: a. Provide manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer 2-coat thermocured

coating system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

b. Products, Resin Manufacturers: Provide fluoropolymer coating systems

containing one of the following resins:

(1) "Hylar 5000"; Ausimont USA, Inc.

(2) "Kynar 500"; Atofina Chemicals, Inc. C. Rolled Lead Flashing Material: 1. Rolled lead shall conform to Federal Specification (FS) QQ-L-201, Grade B, 4

lbs. per sq. ft., except as otherwise indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2.02 MANUFACTURED FASCIA

A. Description: Manufactured fascia and fascia extender, shall be prefinished 0.040 inch thick aluminum with FMG approved 20 gauge galvanized steel anchor plates. Complete with concealed splice plates, prefabricated mitered and welded corner sections, and other accessories. Finish shall be specified fluoropolymer coating; color shall match the metal roof panels.

B. Basis of Design: Vari-Coping with Series extender; MM Systems Corporation. Subject

to compliance with requirements, equivalent copings by one of the following manufacturers are also acceptable:

1. W.P. Hickman Company

2. SBC Industries 2.03 FABRICATION A. Sheet Metal Fabrication: 1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible, with applicable requirements of

SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work.

2. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instruction and

recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surfaces that are to receive sheet metal work shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly

clean and dry, and free from defects that might affect their application. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all sheet metal flashings, counter flashings, coping, scuppers, downspouts, reglets

and all miscellaneous sheet metal work required for roofing and related work. B. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal work

required to accommodate roofing work shall be performed by sheet metal mechanics. Accessories and other components essential to complete the sheet metal installation, though not specifically indicated or specified, shall be provided. Where sheet metal


FPID 416537-2-52-01

abuts or extends into adjacent materials, the juncture shall be executed in a manner to assure weathertight construction.

C. Manufactured items shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. D. Use longest pieces practical. End joints shall be lapped minimum 6 inches with laps set

in plastic cement and edges finished with sealant. Exposed edges of counter flashings shall be hemmed 2 inch.

E. All surfaces exposed to view shall be fastened using cleats to provide no visible

fasteners. Nailing of sheet metal shall be confined generally to sheet metal having a width of less than 18 inches. Nailing of flashings shall be confined to one edge only. Nails shall be evenly spaced not over 3 inches on centers and approximately 2 inch from edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surface, pressure treated wood sleepers and nailing strips required to properly secure the work shall be installed.

3.03 CLEAN UP A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal

or deterioration of finishes.

A. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds. PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item



JOINT SEALANTS 07900-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of joint sealants as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. STRUCTURAL PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: Section 03410.

C. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Section 08110. D. GYPSUM WALLBOARD: Section 09250. E. PAINTING: Section 09900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years continuous documented experience

in the application of the types of materials required. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All products shall be delivered to the Site undamaged, and in the manufacturer's original

packing. Products shall be stored within the manufacturer's published temperature tolerances.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit the following manufacturer's data for each manufactured item: 1. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing,

and protection of each type of sealant. Include Material Safety Data Sheets for joint cleaners.

B. Samples: Submit the following samples: 1. One tube, in original sealed container, of sealant specified. 2. One foot of each joint filler specified.

3. Color chart.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Installers Qualification:

1. Submit documented evidence of installer’s qualifications. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when the temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless the

manufacturer specifically recommends application of his materials at lower temperatures. If job progress or any other condition requires installations when temperatures are below 40 degrees F (or below the minimum installation temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer's representative and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure satisfactory work. Record in writing to the manufacturer, with a copy to the Engineer, the conditions under which such installation must proceed, and the provisions made to ensure satisfactory work.

B. Do not proceed with installation of bulk compounds during inclement weather unless all

requirements and manufacturer's instructions can be complied with. Do not proceed with the installation of elastomeric sealants under extreme temperature conditions which would cause joint openings to be at either maximum or minimum width, or when such extreme temperatures or heavy wind loads are forecast during the period required for initial or nominal cure of elastomeric sealants. Whenever possible, schedule the installation and cure of elastomeric sealants during periods of mean temperatures (nominal joint width shown) so that subsequent stresses upon the cured sealants will be minimized.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Hardnesses shown and specified are intended to indicate the general range necessary for

overall performance. The manufacturer's technical representative shall determine the actual hardness recommended for the conditions of installation and use. Except as otherwise indicated or recommended, compounds shall be provided within the range of hardness (Shore A, Fully cured, at 75 degrees F) of 25 to 40.

B. The Design-Build firm shall confirm its compatibility with the joint surfaces, joint

fillers, and other materials in the joint system. Only materials that are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation conditions, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification, shall be provided.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Exterior Sealants: 1. Sealants for exterior locations and all interior and exterior expansion joints shall

be cold-applied elastomeric joint sealant, two-part polyurethane sealant meeting Federal Specification (FS) TT-S-00227E and ASTM C 920.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Products, Horizontal Joints: Provide one of the following Type M, Grade P

sealants:

a. “Urexpan NR-200"; Pecora Corp.

b. “Vulkem 227"; Tremco Inc.

c. “Sonolastic SL 2"; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. Of Chemrex, Inc. 3. Products, Vertical Joints: Provide one of the following Type M, Grade NS

sealants: a. “Dynatrol II”; Pecora Corp.

b. “Vulkem 227"; Tremco Inc.

c. “Sonolastic NP 2"; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. of Chemrex, Inc. B. Interior Sealants: 1. Sealants for interior locations shall be acrylic latex sealant compound, non-

staining, non-bleeding, paintable, complying with ASTM C 834.

a. Products: Provide one of the following sealants:

(1) “Pecora AC-20"; Pecora Corp.

(2) “Sonolac”; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. Of Chemrex, Inc.

(3) “Tremflex 831"; Tremco Inc.

2. Acoustical Joint Sealants: Sealants for interior acoustical applications shall

be nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. a. Products, Exposed Joints: Provide one of the following sealants:

(1) "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant"; Pecora

Corp.

(2) “Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant”; USG Corp.

b. Products, Concealed Joints: Provide one of the following sealants:

(1) "BA-98"; Pecora Corp.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

(2) “Tremco Acoustical Sealant”; Tremco Inc.

C. Fire Stop Sealant:

1. Fire stop sealant used to seal penetrations in fire rated partitions shall be a silicone- based sealant.

2. Products: Provide one of the following sealants:

a. “Firestop Sealant 2000 Plus"; 3M Corp. b. “Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant”; Specified Technologies, Inc.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Joint cleaner shall be Xylene (Xylol), or any other type of compound

recommended by the sealant compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned.

2. Bond breaker tape shall be polyethylene tape, or other plastic tape, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for the proper performance of sealant. Self-adhesive tape shall be used wherever applicable.

3. Backer rods shall be closed-cell, expanded polyethylene. The size and shape of

the rod shall be that which will control the joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on the back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when the joint is compressed.

2.03 COLORS A. For concealed joints, provide manufacturer's standard color which has the best overall

performance qualities for the application shown. For exposed joints, the Engineer will select colors from the manufacturer's standard or non-standard colors.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The sealant installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the sealants are

to be installed, and notify the Design-Build firm in writing (with a copy to the Engineer) of any conditions detrimental to this phase of the work, and shall not proceed until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement will be construed as acceptance of the conditions.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Sealant material shall be applied before any adjacent coating or painting is applied;

otherwise, the laboratory test for durability specified in the following paragraph (B.) shall be required.

B. Installation of sealant over joint surfaces which have been painted, lacquered,

waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating, shall not proceed unless a laboratory test for durability (adhesion), in compliance with Paragraph 4.3.9 of FS TT-S-00227, has successfully demonstrated that sealant bond is not impaired by the particular coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed, or if test results indicate bond interference, the coating or treatment shall be removed from joint surfaces before installing sealant.

C. Concrete and masonry joint surfaces shall be etched to remove excess alkalinity with

dilute muriatic acid solution, and then sprayed with water and allowed to dry before installation, unless the sealant manufacturer's published instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond.

D. Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions and Material Safety Data Sheets for

the handling, use, and disposal of Xylene or similar solvent-based flammable joint cleaners. Disposal of containers shall comply with governing authorities having jurisdiction.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the sealant manufacturer's published instructions, except where more

stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where the manufacturer's technical representative recommends otherwise. 1. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193

for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. The joint surfaces shall be primed or sealed wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Primer/sealer shall not be spilled or allowed to migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Sealant backer rod shall be installed for elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be

omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown.

D. Bond breaker tape shall be installed wherever required by manufacturer's

recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly, or as detailed on the Drawings.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

E. Only proven installation techniques shall be employed which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, sealant joints shall be filled to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, joints shall be filled to form a slight cove, so that the joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Sealants shall be installed to depths as shown, or if not shown, as recommended by the

sealant manufacturer, but within the following general limitations measured at the center (thin) section of the bead.

1. For sidewalks, pavements, and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and

subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposure, joints shall be filled to a depth equal to 75 percent of the joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.

2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants, but not subject to

traffic, joints shall be filled to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/8 inch nor less than 1/4 inch.

3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealant compounds, joints shall be filled to

a depth in the range of 75 percent to 115 percent of the joint width. G. Sealant compounds shall not be overflowed or spilled onto adjoining surfaces, or

allowed to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces including rough textures. Masking tape or other precautionary devices shall be used to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces by either the primer, sealer and/or the sealant compound.

H. Any excess or spillage of compounds shall be removed promptly as the work progresses.

Adjoining surfaces shall be cleaned by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to the adjoining surfaces or finishes.

I. Do not plug weep holes (if occurring) built into aluminum framing. 3.04 CURE AND PROTECTION A. Sealant compounds shall be cured in compliance with the manufacturer's published

instructions and current recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability.

B. The installer shall advise the Design-Build firm of procedures required for the curing

and protection of sealants compounds during the construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering), at the time of Final Acceptance.


FPID 416537-2-52-01



STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This work shall include furnishing and installing all steel doors and frames including

glazed openings complete as located and detailed on Drawings. B. Types of steel doors used on this Project shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Flush Steel Doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. JOINT SEALANTS: Section 07900. B. FINISH HARDWARE: Section 08710. C. PAINTING: Section 09900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator: Steel doors and frames shall be manufactured by a single firm

specializing in the production of this type of work. B. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. Referenced Standards. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. Referenced Standards. 3. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. Referenced Standards. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. Referenced Standards.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

5. Steel Door Institute (SDI): a. SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames. b. SDI 105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. C. Fire-Resistance Classifications: Where fire-resistance classifications are shown or

scheduled for steel doors and frame assemblies, the doors and frames shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 80, and shall have been tested and rated with the appropriate hardware by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). A UL label shall be provided on each door and frame so classified.

D. Design Criteria: Transmission Characteristics of Fixed Glazed Framing: Comply with

requirements indicated below for transmission characteristics and test methods. 1. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration of not more than 0.06 CFM per square foot of

fixed area per ASTM E 283. 2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration per ASTM E 331 at

pressure differential of 6.24 psf (excluding operable door edges). 3. Wind Resistance: Exterior door assemblies shall comply with Florida Building

Code Test Protocol TAS 201- Impact and Test Procedures and Test Protocol TAS 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions

for each type of door and frame. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for steel doors and frames as follows, and as a

package with submittals for other doors and finish hardware to enable a coordinated review of all door openings for the Project.

1. Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of the steel doors and

frames. Drawings shall include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, glazed openings including sidelites and transoms, louvers, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware, and reinforcements and details of joints and connections, showing anchorage and accessory items.

2. Shop drawings shall indicate accurate dimensions of work shown. Frame returns

shall allow for conditions (i.e. 5/8 inch gypsum board or exposed masonry as


FPID 416537-2-52-01

scheduled). Except where otherwise shown, 1/4 inch sealant space shall be provided for each jamb and head abutting wall materials.

3. Shop drawings shall list and locate all items of finish hardware furnished under

other Sections of the Specifications, but prepared for by the manufacturer of hollow metal doors and frames, from templates provided by the hardware supplier.

C. Schedule: 1. A schedule of doors and frames shall be provided using the same opening

numbers referenced on the Drawings and the same schedule format. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Doors and frames shall be protected during transit, storage, and handling to prevent

damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Each door shall be packaged at the factory in a separate heavy paper carton. Each carton

shall be marked for location to correspond with the Shop Drawings. C. Ship welded frames in bundles securely strapped or in packages. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Frames shall be stored in an

upright position. Place the units on at least 4 inch wood sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. Avoid the use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch air space between the doors to promote air circulation.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Obtain and verify all measurements at the buildings as required to

properly fabricate and install all special door and frame requirements if and when they occur. Verify all conditions that may affect door installation.

PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide one of the following:

1. "Lock Seam Design"; American Steel Products. 2. "Series HT"; Pioneer Industries, Inc.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. "Series LW"; Steelcraft/Ingersoll Rand. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Pressed Steel Frames: 1. Frames shall be double rabbeted design, depth and profile as detailed and

furnished with minimum 5/8 inch stop. Frames shall be fabricated from 14 gauge (exterior openings, including Basement/Tunnel doors) and 16 gauge (interior openings) commercial quality, level, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 1008 or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A 1011. Frames shall have zinc coating applied by hot-dip process conforming to ASTM A 653 (G60) with coating weight not less than 0.60 oz. per square foot (0.30 oz. per square foot per side). Frames shall be designed with integral stop and trim.

2. Frame corners shall be mitered and continuously arc welded (both inside of

mitered corners and butt edges) with all exposed welds ground and sanded smooth. Mitered corners shall be reinforced with 18-gauge channel-shaped reinforcements.

3. Head members shall be 2 inches high unless otherwise indicated. 4. Strike jambs shall be provided with three (3) holes for rubber bumpers (silencers);

refer to Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE for furnishing and installation of silencers.

B. Steel Doors: 1. Hollow metal steel doors shall be fabricated from 18 gauge commercial quality,

level, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 1008 or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A 1011. Face sheets for doors shall have zinc coating applied by hot-dip process conforming to ASTM A 653 (G60) with coating weight not less than 0.60 oz. per square foot (0.30 oz. per square foot per side).

2. Door face sheets shall be 1-3/4 inches thick heavy-duty, full flush hollow steel

formed from one sheet of metal with no seams permitted on the door face. Lock seam shall occur on hinge edge with seam continuously welded and welds ground smooth. Tops shall be flush and closed with no holes. Top and bottom of door shall be closed with a minimum 16 gauge flush or inverted closure channel.

3. A full-width dense rigid polyurethane core conforming to ASTM C 591 shall be

installed in all doors to provide dimensional stability and high resistance to facial impact.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

4. The clearances for doors shall be 3/32- to 1/8-inch at jambs and heads. The lock edges of stiles shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches for steel doors.

5. The top and bottom edges of all exterior steel doors shall be closed to provide a

weather seal. This seal shall be provided as part of the door construction or by the addition of inverted steel channels or other suitable shapes welded, caulked and sealed to the face sheets.

6. All exterior double doors shall have a steel astragal attached to the active leaf. 7. Louvers shall be manufacturer's standard sightproof stationary louvers

constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 18 gauge cold-rolled galvanized steel set into 18-gauge galvanized steel frame. Use type louver for exterior doors as recommended by door manufacturer.

a. Provide manufacturer's standard insect and bird screen backup for all

louvers and louvered doors. Screens shall be removable for maintenance and cleaning.

C. Metal Finishes: 1. Shop Applied Primer Finish: a. Apply a primed finish to all galvanized and non-galvanized metal surfaces

furnished under this Section. Clean and chemically treat metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence; follow with a dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer on all exposed surfaces.

b. Finished surfaces shall be smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. Paint shall be baked or oven dried. the time and temperature for drying shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for developing maximum hardness and resistance to abrasion.

2. Field Paint Finish: Finish painting of steel doors and frames is specified under

Section 09900 - PAINTING. D. Hardware Provisions and Reinforcing: 1. Hardware Provisions for Pressed Steel Frames: a. Unless a different strike is noted on Hardware Schedule, frames shall have

steel hinge plate reinforcement projection welded with provisions for 4-1/2 inch x 4-1/2 inch full mortise type hinges and steel strike tap plate reinforcement projection welded with provisions for Universal ANSI A115.1 or A115.2 strike.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Frames shall be provided for 1-1/2 pair of hinges, unless noted otherwise. Mortar guards shall be formed from 26-gauge galvanized steel and shall be welded in place.

c. Closer reinforcement shall be sleeve type installed in frame header for all

doors that are indicated to receive door closers. d. Provide metal reinforcements for all other hardware items indicated. e. Minimum gauges of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: (1) Hinge Reinforcements: 8 gauge, 1-1/4 x 10-inch min. size. (2) Lock Reinforcements: 12 gauge. (3) Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge. (4) Surface-Mounted Hardware: 12 gauge. 2. Hardware Provisions for Steel Doors: a. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at the factory to receive all mortised

type hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface applied hardware shall be performed in field. Provide concealed metal reinforcement for surface applied hardware indicated in the Hardware Schedule.

b. Doors shall have steel integral hinge reinforcement with provisions for 4-

1/2 inch x 4-1/2 inch full mortise template type hinges for 1-1/2 pair of hinges per door, unless noted otherwise.

a. Doors shall have steel integral lock reinforcement with provisions for

locksets as indicated.

d. Doors shall have steel closer reinforcement concealed in the door for all doors that are indicated to receive closers.

e. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: (1) Hinge Reinforcements: 8 gauge. (2) Lock Reinforcements : 12 gauge. (3) Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge. (4) Surface Mounted Hardware: 16 gauge. F. Location of Hardware: The location of hardware in connection with hinged and other

swing type hollow metal doors and frames shall be as follows, unless indicated or specified otherwise:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Top Hinge: To manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 5 inches from head

rabbet to top of hinge. 2. Bottom Hinge: To manufacturer's standard but not greater than 10 inches from

finish floor to bottom of hinge. 3. Intermediate Hinge: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. 4. Locks (cylindrical, mortise, unit or integral): 38 inches from finish floor to center

of strike. 5. Refer to Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE for additional locations. G. Frame Anchors: 1. All frames shall have an integral or welded on sill anchor. 2. Furnish six (6) per frame, 10 inch long corrugated or other deformed type

adjustable anchors as condition applies. 2.03 FABRICATION A. All work shall be shop fabricated to required profiles by forming and welding with

corners, angles and edges straight and sharp. B. Fit and fabricate accurately with corners, joints, seams and surfaces free from warp,

buckles or other defects. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed.

Do not proceed with steel door and frame installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames and accessories in accordance with

approved shop drawings, manufacturer's data and as herein specified. B. Steel Frames: 1. Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Except for frames located at in-place drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

3. In masonry and cast-in-place concrete construction, wall anchors shall be located

at the hinge and strike levels, and frames shall be grouted solid (Jambs and Heads).

4. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 5. In concrete construction, locate three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike

levels. C. Steel Doors: 1. Fit steel doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI 100. 2. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after installation, sand smooth all rusted or damaged

areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel

doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. C. Cleaning: Immediately prior to final inspection and before Final Acceptance, remove all

protective materials and clean all exposed members. Thoroughly clean all glass, including removal of manufacturer's labels or any other material or substance on the glass, in the event this has not been performed at a prior time. Cleaning shall be performed by the use of cleaning materials and methods that will not damage the glass or surroundings in any way.

1. Do not use abrasives or harmful cleaning agents. PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION 08110

FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work covered by this Section consists of furnishing and installing all finish hardware as

shown on the Drawings, indicated on schedules, and as specified herein. 1. Hardware for labeled openings shall meet UL requirements whether specified

herein or not. 2. All hardware on accessible doors shall meet or exceed the requirements of the

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) whether or not full compliance is indicated in the Hardware Schedule located at the end of this Section.

B. Doors with magnetic swipe readers shall be supplied with magnetic locks. These doors

shall also be supplied with a door contact shunt switch that shall disable the door contact when exiting. It will automatically operate when the door is opened from the non-card reader side. Refer to Section 16727 – INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM.

1. This includes Manager's safe and depository head. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES/REPAIRS: Section 01740. B. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Section 08110. C. INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM. Section 16727. 1.03 SECURITY AND CARD ACCESS SYSTEM/DOOR HARDWARE INTERFACE

REQUIREMENTS A. Security and Card Access System is specified under Section 16727 - SECURITY AND

CARD ACCESS SYSTEM. Doors to be controlled by use of magnetic sweep cards shall be connected to a magnetic lock furnished as part of the Work in Section 16727. When the card is used, the magnetic lock is released for a specified period of time allowing access through the door. The Exit Bar Release specified under this Section shall be furnished without a latchbolt or latchbolt operation and shall contain a SPDT switch which drops power to the magnetic lock allowing exit through the door. A Power Transfer Device specified under this Section shall be required to allow the wiring for the Exit Bar Release to be routed to the door frame.



FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest adopted editions of the

following: 1. Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 13D-1. 2. Florida Building Code. 3. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): a. Referenced Standards. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows. b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed finish hardware

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.05 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS A. Finish Hardware shall be furnished by one supplier, approved by the Engineer, with

appropriate technical knowledge and experience to correctly interpret Drawings and Specifications. Supplier shall be prepared at all times during progress of installation to promptly provide a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to approve its complete installation, in order that all items shall be installed in the best manner and function properly. This will necessitate a project site visit prior to final inspection. Supplier shall be bona-fide direct distributor of all materials furnished.

B. It shall be the supplier's responsibility to furnish hardware in accordance with the intent

of this specification. Where, by virtue of architectural design or by function, a change is necessary, hardware of equal design and quality shall be furnished upon written approval of Engineer.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete product data for each item of finish hardware listed in

the Finish Hardware Schedule. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Finish Hardware Schedule: Submit complete typewritten sets of the Finish Hardware

Schedule. Organize the Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door. Organize door hardware sets in the


FPID 416537-2-52-01

same order as in Article 3.03 - FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE. No factory order shall be placed for finish hardware items until approval has been given by the Engineer.

1. Each item in the Finish Hardware Schedule shall be identified on the first page of

the Schedule by the manufacturer’s name. C. Keying Schedule: Submit a keying schedule prepared by the supplier, detailing the

Department’s keying instructions for locks. Include a schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. Refer to keying schedule at the end of this Section for additional information.

D. Supplier Qualifications: 1. Submit documented evidence of supplier’s qualifications. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All items of finish hardware shall be delivered to the Project site, or as otherwise

specified or required, and shall be checked in for completeness and familiarization with the Design-Build firm.

B. All items of finish hardware shall be packaged, numbered, and labeled to identify each

opening for which it is intended, and to correspond with item numbers on the approved Finish Hardware Schedule.

1.08 COORDINATION A. Templates: All finish hardware to be installed on, or in metal doors and/or frames, shall

be manufactured to template. Template machine screws shall be furnished for all such materials. Supplier shall furnish an approved Finish Hardware Schedule and all necessary template transmittals to metal frame fabricators, or other suppliers requiring same, for their coordination and use.

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door

hardware with connections to building systems, including power supplies. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. An asterisk (*) after a manufacturer's name denotes whose product designation is used

in the Finish Hardware Schedule for purposes of establishing minimum requirements. B. Other than those doors that are restricted to less than 180 degree opening by building or

by overhead holders or stops, all butts and closer arms shall be of sufficient size to allow full 180-degree opening of doors.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2.02 FINISHES

A. Butts - Exterior: US32D B. Butts - Interior: US26D C. Locks: US32D D. Exit Devices: US32D E. Push, Pull, and Kick Plates: US32D F. Closers: SBL G. Door Stops and Miscellaneous: US26D 2.03 LOCATIONS A. Hardware locations dimension shall be as follows: 1. Distance from finish floor to center line of:

a. Door Knob or Lever: 38 inches.

b. Door Pull: 42 inches. c. Deadlock: 60 inches. d. Exit Bolt Cross Bar: 38 inches.

e. Push Plate: 50 inches.

2. Butt Hinges: a. Bottom Hinge: Finish floor to bottom of hinge 10 inches.

b. Top Hinge: Head rabbet to top of hinge 5 inches.

c. Center Hinge: Equidistant between top and bottom hinges. 2.04 BUTT HINGES A. Doors (1-3/4 Inch Thick): Minimum 4-1/2 inches high. B. Each door shall not have less than three hinges.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. All butts used with door closers shall be ball bearing. All exterior doors shall have ball bearing butts, except as otherwise specified.

D. All exterior out-swinging doors shall have butts with non-removable pins (NRP). E. Products: Provide butt hinges by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies. 2. Stanley Commercial Hardware Div. of The Stanley Works. 3. McKinney Products Co. Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. 4. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. 2.05 LOCKSETS A. Locksets shall be furnished in the functions as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Levers, escutcheons, locksets and cylinders shall be the products of one manufacturer. C. Minimum wall thickness of levers and roses shall be .101 inch and .099 inch,

respectively. D. All latch bolts shall have 3/4 inch throw. All deadbolts shall have hardened steel inserts

and 1 inch throw. E. Products: Provide one of the following locksets: 1. “Series 8200" lockset and “LNJ” handle design; Sargent Manufacturing Company

Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc.* 2. “Series ML2000" lockset and “LWA” handle design; Corbin Russwin

Architectural Hardware Div. of Yale Security Inc. 3. “Series L9000" lockset and “03" handle design; Schlage Lock Company, An

Ingersoll-Rand Company.

F. Multi-Point Locks to be as scheduled by Secrutitech. Coordinate all door preparation requirements with manufacturer.

2.06 KEYING/KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Keying: All locks shall be keyed as required to coordinate with existing toll plaza

keying system at this location.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Key Control System: Provide additional key control system components including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, and receipt forms as required to supplement existing key control system.

C. Construction Keying (Construction Master Keys): Provide cylinders with feature that

permits voiding of construction keys by use of the Owner’s master key without cylinder removal and without the need for special tools. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.07 CLOSERS A. Closers shall be provided in the manufacturer's recommended printed size for specified

installation condition, unless otherwise noted in the Finish Hardware Schedule. B. Closers shall be full rack and pinion complete with back check. Springs shall be motor

clock type. Furnish flush mount transom brackets where no transom bar exists. Furnish parallel arm where required.

C. All closers shall be provided with limited opening resistance to meet handicap

requirements. D. Furnish drop plate brackets where required. E. Closer at exterior doors shall be installed on the inside of the building. F. Products: Provide one of the following: 1. “Series 1430" exterior and “Series 1431" interior closers; Sargent Manufacturing

Company Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc.* 2. “Series 8501"; Norton Door Controls Div. of Yale Security Inc. 3. An equivalent product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware Div. of Yale Security Inc. b. LCN Closers, An Ingersoll-Rand Company. 2.10 DOOR TRIM A. Products: Provide the following door trim items by one of the manufacturers specified

herein: 1. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch thick; beveled top and

sides. a. H.B. Ives.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. c. Hager Companies. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2.11 DOOR STOPS A. Products: Provide door stop types as follows: 1. Products by H.B. Ives:* a. Wall: “No. 407-1/2.” b. Floor: “No. 436.” 2. Products by Rockwood Manufacturing Company: a. Wall: “No. 409.” b. Floor: “No. 441.” B. Other Products: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are also

acceptable: 1. Glynn-Johnson, An Ingersoll-Rand Company. 2. Russwin Corbin Architectural Hardware Div. of Yale Security Inc. 2.12 SILENCERS A. All interior metal door frames shall have door silencers, three (3) per single door, six (6)

per pair of doors. B. Products: Provide one of the following silencer types: 1. “Type 20"; H.B. Ives.* 2. “Type 64"; Glynn-Johnson, An Ingersoll-Rand Company. 3. “No. 608"; Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2.13 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. General: Continuous weatherstripping shall be installed at each edge of every exterior

door leaf. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for


FPID 416537-2-52-01

application indicated. Include door top protection (drip caps) for exterior doors where scheduled or as required.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is

easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer

strips, surface-applied. Extruded aluminum retainer, natural anodized finish; closed cell EPDM sponge neoprene insert, except vinyl insert for door shoes.

D. Products: Provide one the following products: 1. “319CR”; Pemko Manufacturing Co.* 2. Other Products: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are

also acceptable: a. Zero International, Inc. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.14 THRESHOLDS AND DOOR BOTTOMS A. General: Extruded aluminum units, vinyl insert, of type, size and profile as shown or

scheduled. Provide thresholds at labeled doors where required by Code, whether specified or not. Product to be of one of the following manufacturers or approved equal.

B. Products, Thresholds: Provide one of the following: 1. Products as indicated in the hardware schedule by Pemko Manufacturing Co.,

Inc.* 2. Other Products: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are

also acceptable: a. Zero International, Inc. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. C. Products, Door Bottoms: Provide one of the following:

1. “315CN”; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.* 2. Other Products: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are

also acceptable: a. Zero International, Inc.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.15 DRIP CAPS A. Install on all exterior doors not under cover as scheduled. B. Products: Provide one of the following: 1. “346 AL”; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.* 2. Other Products: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are

also acceptable: a. Zero International, Inc. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.16 SWIPE READERS A. See Section 16727 - INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS

SYSTEM.. 2.17 FASTENERS A. Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring

connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Comply with the following:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) A115 Series, “Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware (ANSI).”

B. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications,

except as specifically listed herein under Article 2.03 LOCATIONS, and/or otherwise directed by the Engineer and required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for

Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's published instructions

and current recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and re-installation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the

attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.

Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. D. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic

sealant. E. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

F. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean operating items as

necessary to restore proper function and finish. 3.03 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following Hardware Sets apply to the Equipment Building and Gantry, and are

based on door location types as indicated. Refer to Drawings for specific door numbers, sizes, types, and swings.

Equipment Building Product Type Quantity Manufacturer & Product Number Hinges 1 1/2 pr Hager BB1191 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP US32D Lockset 1 Sargent 21-8204 LNH US32D Deadlock 1 Sargent 485 US32D


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Multi-Point Lock 1 Securitech 4820 –OSRB-BG Closer 1 Sargent 1231 EN With Integral Stop Threshold 1 Pemko 274A AL Door Bottom 1 Pemko 216 APK Weatherstripping 1 Pemko 319CR AL Drip Cap 1 Pemko 346 AL

Signature Gantry Product Type Quantity Manufacturer & Product Number Hinges 1 1/2 pr Hager BB1191 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP US32D Lockset 1 Sargent 21-8204 LNH US32D Deadlock 1 Sargent 485 US32D Multi-Point Lock 1 Securitech 4820-OSRB-BG Cylinder 1 High security cylinder manuf. By Sargent

compatible with Department keying system Closer 1 Sargent 1231 EN With Integral Stop Kickplate 1 inside Ives 36” x 2” LDW US32D Threshold 1 Pemko 272A AL Door Bottom 1 Pemko 216 BPPK Weatherstripping 1 Pemko 319CR AL Drip Cap 1 Pemko 346 AL

3.4 DELIVERABLES

A. All final cylinders, cores, and keys are to be forwarded to Floyd Holland, Florida’s Turnpike Loss Prevention & Security manager from the contractor’s locksmith under separate cover via certified overnight mail. At no time during this contract is the contractor to be in possession of final keys. Upon receipt of keys by the departments Loss Prevention and Security Manager a time will be scheduled when the contractors locksmith, Florida’s Turnpike Loss Prevention & Security manager and the State Toll Facility Engineer will go to all sites and remove the construction contractors lock / core or other locking device belonging to the contractor and install the lock / core that were received under separate cover from the contractor’s locksmith.

B. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: To be determined at a later date by Toll Facilities and Tolls Security Please forward to Mr. Floyd Holland’s attention, under separate cover, via certified mail: Floyd Holland, Loss Prevention & Security Manager Florida's Turnpike Enterprise


FPID 416537-2-52-01

P.O. Box 613069 MP 263, Building No. 5315 Ocoee, Florida 34761 Direct: 407-264-3315

C. In addition the contractor must keep a log of all small miscellaneous keys, including but not limited to generator covers, power panels and AC lock out boxes. These keys and the log must be turned over to STFE (State Toll Facility Engineer) prior to project closeout.

PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION 08710

PLASTER AND STUCCO 09220-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09220 - PLASTER AND STUCCO PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work of this Section shall include furnishing and installing all portland cement

plastering (stucco) and gypsum plaster complete as indicated on Drawings and herein specified.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. UNIT MASONRY: Section 04220. B. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING: Section 05400. C. GYPSUM WALLBOARD: Section 09250. D. PAINTING: Section 09900. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/4-inch in 8-feet for bow or warp of surface, and

for plumb and/or level. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, unless otherwise

indicated or specified: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. Referenced Standards. 2. Portland Cement Association (PCA): a. PCA "Plasterer's Manual." 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with specification requirements.

B. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) 12" x 12" samples indicative of proposed finish. 2. Approved samples shall become the basis of comparison for all plaster work. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All manufactured materials shall be delivered in the original packages, containers, or

cartons, bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification, and stored in a dry space, protected from the elements and from damage to containers.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Surfaces: 1. Use all means necessary to protect the work and materials of this Section before,

during and after installation; and to protect the work and materials of other trades from moisture deterioration and soiling which may occur from plastering operations.

2. Provide temporary covering or other provisions as may be necessary to minimize

harmful spattering of plaster on other work. 3. Do not apply plaster immediately before or during a rainstorm. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. Warm Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive

evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. 2. Cold Weather Requirements: Enclosures shall be provided in cold weather to

allow uniform temperature range of 50 degrees F to 70 degrees F to be maintained.

3. Ventilation shall be provided to properly dry the plaster during and subsequent to

its application. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS


FPID 416537-2-52-01

2.01 CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard products recommended by the

manufacturer for the application indicated, complying with ASTM C 926. B. Cement: 1. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, and be of same source to

insure uniformity throughout entire project. Approved types of plasticity agents may be added to portland cement in the manufacturing process or when mixing; but in no case shall the amount of plasticity agent exceed 10 percent of the volume of cement in the plaster mix.

C. Lime: 1. Lime shall be dry hydrated lime, ASTM C 206, Type S. D. Aggregates: 1. Inorganic aggregates used for plaster shall conform to ASTM C 897. E. Water: 1. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, salts,

organic materials, or substances that may be deleterious to the plaster or to any metal in the plaster.

F. Integral Waterproofer: 1. Product: "Integral Waterpeller”; Euclid Chemical Company. G. Bonding Agents (if indicated or required): 1. Bonding agents, integral or surface-applied, shall be used in accordance with the

manufacturer's directions. 2.02 MIXING AND PROPORTIONING PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) A. All plaster mix ingredients shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer with the minimum

amount of water needed to produce a plaster of workable consistency. Plaster shall be mixed for a minimum of 2 minutes or until all ingredients are uniform in color after all ingredients are in the mixer.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Plaster ingredients shall be mixed in the following proportions: 1. Three (3) Coat Application (Metal Lath): Portland Lime Aggregates Integral Coat Cement by volume by volume Waterproofer

1st (base) 1 - - - 3-1/2 - - -

2nd (brown) 1 15% max. 2 1 qt. per bag of cement

3rd (finish) 1 15% max. 2 1 qt. per bag of cement C. Plaster ingredients shall be mixed in the following proportions: 1. Two (2) Coat Application (CMU): Portland Lime Aggregates Integral Coat Cement by volume by volume Waterproofer

1st (base) 1 - - - 3-1/2 - - - 2nd (brown) 1 15% max. 2 1 qt. per bag of cement 2.03 VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. One Component Regular Veneer Plaster: Veneer plaster complying with ASTM C 587

and formulated for application directly over gypsum base. B. Products: Provide one of the following products: 1. "Cameo Veneer Plaster"; G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. "Uni-Kal Plaster"; National Gypsum Co.

1. "Diamond Interior Finish Plaster"; United States Gypsum Company.

2.04 LATH.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below.

A. Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming to the following:

1 Galvanized Steel: Structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated.

A. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Configuration: Self-furring.

a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which this Work is to be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to application, ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to receive

cement plaster have been tested and approved. B. Ensure metal lath has been properly installed and rigidly secured. C. Place metal accessories true to lines and levels.

3.03 LATHING

A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards.

1. Vertical metal framing and furring using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, diamond-mesh lath and cold-rolled channel stud framing.

3.04 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General:


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1. Refer to Drawings for extent and locations of suspended ceilings and soffits, and vertical surfaces to be plastered.

2. Portland cement plaster (stucco) application shall be performed by skilled

mechanics experienced in this type of work. All work shall be properly rodded true and straight, flush with grounds applied in strict accordance with ASTM C 926 and with the recommendations of the PCA "Plasterer's Manual," unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not use materials which are caked or lumpy, or which are dirty or

contaminated by foreign materials. Use only clean water, free from impurities which might impair the plaster work; do not use water which has been used to clean tools. Do not use excessive water in the mixing and application of plaster materials.

4. Sequence plastering applications with other work in accordance with recognized

industry standards. Delay application of finish coat until adjoining work has been completed, wherever possible.

5. Screed plaster work at all angles, arises, corners, and every 8 feet on surfaces.

Place screeds to true grounds; scrape screeds and grounds clean. All finished surfaces shall be straight, true, and plumb. Form corners, angles, and intersections accurately, in perfect line, every angle true and full.

B. Thickness: 1. Portland cement plaster (stucco) shall be applied in thicknesses as follows: First Second Third Plaster (Base) (Brown) (Finish) Total Base Coat Coat Coat Thickness Metal Lath 3/8" 1/4" 1/8" 3/4" CMU 3/8” 1/4” 5/8”

C. Methods:

1. First (Base) Coat: Apply first (base) coat to metal lath with sufficient pressure to form a good key. Bring to plumb, true, even surface, rough in texture. When sufficiently set, float scratch with dry float. Cross scratch evenly to form bond for second (brown) coat.

2. Second (Brown) Coat: Apply second (brown) coat as soon as first (base) coat has

set sufficiently to carry the weight (approximately 3 hours). Float or rod to true, even surface and keep moist until application of third (finish) coat.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

3. Third (Finish) Coat: Apply third (finish) coat as soon as possible after brown coat

hardens; usually the next morning. Use float for preliminary finishing then steel trowel for final compacting. Finish shall be "light sand texture" as approved by the Engineer. Finish coat to be painted as specified under Section 09900 - PAINTING.

D. Curing: Damp cure portland cement plaster (stucco) as follows:

1. Surfaces shall be protected from the sun, hot-dry winds, or excessive ventilation using canvas, cloth, or plywood barriers; then kept moist with a fog spray of water until proper hydration takes place; usually 48-hours for temperatures ranging 50-degrees F and above.

2. Do not damage finished surface by water erosion during damp curing operation. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, repair and point-up portland cement plaster (stucco) as required and as

necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items which are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace plaster work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar imperfections. Repair or replace the work as necessary to comply with specified tolerances and required visual effects.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize splattering of

plaster on other work. Repair surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work.


GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09250-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of gypsum wallboard as indicated

on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, Comply with the applicable provisions of the referenced standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the Gypsum Association (GA).

B. The requirements of GA Standard 216 shall apply where applicable, except where more

detailed or more stringent requirements are indicated, including the recommendations of the manufacturer.

C. A maximum of 1/8 inch offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4 inch in 8 feet for

plumb, level, warp, and bow shall be allowed. D. The materials shall be from one (1) manufacturer, and the source of brands of materials

shall not be changed during construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for each

manufactured product. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with the

manufacturer's name brand, type and grade. Materials shall be stored in a dry, well-ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover, and off the ground.

B. Gypsum wallboard shall not be stored for more than one month. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS A. The requirements of GA-203 shall apply where applicable, except where more detailed

or stringent requirements are indicated, including the recommendation of the manufacturer.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Materials: 1. Furring members: ASTM C 645, 24-gauge, corrosion resistant steel Z-furring

channel, as shown on drawings. 2. Fasteners shall be of type and size recommended by the manufacturer for the

substrate and application as indicated. 3. Screws attaching gypsum board to metal studs shall be corrosion resistant No. 6

Phillips, bugle head drywall screws designed for fastening to metal, of 1 inch size for single ply and longer for greater thickness of gypsum board.

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum board shall be 5/8 inch thick except as otherwise shown on Drawings,

conforming to ASTM C 36, of maximum available lengths to minimize end joints.

B. Water Resistant Type where indicated shall conform to ASTM C 630. C. Products: Provide products by one of the following 1. GP Gypsum Corporation. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Company. 3. United States Gypsum Company.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Casing beads shall be solid zinc of type for securing through face of tapered edge, and

embedding and taping to conceal surface flange. U-moldings and channel-shaped plaster/stucco type casing beads are NOT acceptable. Products shall be manufactured by one of the following:

1. D-200 Series L-Bead; Dale Industries.

2. No. 200 Wallboard Casing; Gold Bond Bldg. Products, Div. National Gypsum Co.

3. Sheetrock 200 Series; United States Gypsum Co. B. Corner beads shall be of standard type of solid zinc with perforated surface flanges to be

attached through each gypsum face and concealed by embedding, of sizes for pertinent application. Products shall be manufactured by one of the following:

1. Drywall Corner Bead; Dale Industries, Inc.

a. Gold Bond Wallboard Cornerbead; Gold Bond Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

3. Dur-a-Bead Corner Bead; United States Gypsum Co.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

C. Control joints shall be one-piece, formed with vee-shaped slot per Figure 1 in ASTM C

1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Joint tapes shall be plain or perforated complying with ASTM C 475. B. Joint compound shall be adhesive, with or without fillers complying with ASTM C 475.

Provide in dry powder form or pre-mixed ready for application as follows: 1. Single-Compound: Provide manufacturer's single-component compound for both

bedding and finishing joints. 2. Two-Compound Treatment: Provide compatible joint compounds: one

compound for bedding and other compound for finishing joints. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the gypsum board is to be installed. Do

not proceed with gypsum wallboard work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Comply with GA-216, unless the manufacturer's published instructions or requirements

for fire-resistance ratings are more stringent. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Where feasible, trim accessory flanges shall be anchored using same fasteners as

required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, flanges shall be fastened by nailing or stapling.

B. Continuous casing beads shall be installed wherever gypsum board terminates in visible

locations (and is not concealed by extending behind other materials), abutting to other materials such as masonry, windows, etc.

3.04 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING A. Exposed drywall surfaces shall be finished with joints, corners, and exposed edges

reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim accessory flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for smooth flush surfaces. True, level, or plumb lines


FPID 416537-2-52-01

shall be formed, without joints, fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories, or defects visible after application for field-applied paint finish.

B. Joint tape shall be used to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units,

and at interior corners and angles, with tape set in joint compound and skim coat applied over tape on application. Where open spaces of more than 1/16 inch width occur between abutting drywall units, joints shall be filled with joint compound and allowed to dry before application of joint tape.

C. After mixing, joint compounds shall not be used if recommended pot-life time has

expired. Drying time between applications of joint compound shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for relative humidity and temperature levels at time of application, in no case allowing less than 24 hours drying time between applications of joint compound. Not less than three (3) separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over joints, fasteners heads and metal flanges.

D. Dimpled heads and other depressions in wallboard surfaces, shall be finished with two

(2) coats topping compound. E. All openings around pipes, fixtures, ducts, etc. shall be sealed flush with water-proof,

non-hardening, sealant compound. F. All joints, corners, dimples, etc., shall be finished with joint compound and topping

compound as directed by the compound manufacturer, leaving all wallboard surfaces smooth and ready for paint finish.

PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION

RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install resilient flooring and accessories complete as located and detailed on

Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Installation shall be performed only by a qualified installer with at least five (5)

years documented experience in installations of a similar nature. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and

accessory. B. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) each of the following samples of each type, color and pattern of

resilient flooring required, showing full range of color and pattern variations. a. 2-1/2 inch long samples of resilient base and flooring accessories. b. Other materials as requested. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Submit manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of

resilient flooring and accessory required. D. Installer Qualifications: 1. Submit documented evidence of installer’s qualifications. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with

manufacturer's brand name and color clearly marked thereon, and store in conformity with manufacturer's recommendations.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F in spaces to receive resilient flooring

for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Stored resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.

B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including

painting, have been completed. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Resilient Base: 1. 4 inch high vinyl base x 1/8 inch gage, ASTM F 1861, Type TV, with matching

end stops and preformed or molded corner units. 2. Products: Provide one of the following products: a. Johnsonite Inc.: Windsor Blue 58. b. Roppe Corp.: Group I, Colonial Blue 165. c. VPI Floor Products Division: Aurora 709. 3. Use set-on cove-type. 4. Supply in 96 foot rolls.

C. Adhesives (Cements): 1. Waterproof stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit

material and substrate conditions. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not start work until painting (where applicable) has been substantially completed. 3.02 PREPARATION


FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Accessories: 1. Apply wall base to walls, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where

base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

a. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along

top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient base

installation: 1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner

recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 3.05 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Department. Furnish maintenance materials

from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.

1. Vinyl Base: 4 feet per building of each type installed. PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 735-74-1: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 735-88-1 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 735-74-1: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 735-74-2: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION 09650

PAINTING 09900-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes the surface preparation and application of painting and related

work in locations indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. CONCRETE WORK: Section 03310. B. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Section 05120. C. METAL FABRICATIONS: Section 05500. D. JOINT SEALANTS: Section 07900. E. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: Section 08110. F. PLASTER AND STUCCO: Section 09220. G. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS: Section 09960. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All surfaces of fabricated items that are left unfinished by the requirements of other

Sections shall be painted under this Section. All work specified in this Section shall be in addition to shop and mill coats, priming and field coats which are specified in other Sections.

B. Perform all touching up of shop coats and field coats of paint on structural steel and

miscellaneous steel or iron as required and/or specified. C. Aluminum, steel, stainless steel, copper, bronze, chromium plating, nickel, monel metal,

lead, lead coated copper and other surfaces with factory finishes shall not be painted or finished, except as otherwise specified.

D. Remove and re-finish or otherwise correct in a manner approved by Engineer all work

under this Section which peels, crazes, blisters, fails to adhere or otherwise fails to properly serve its intended purpose at no additional cost to the Department.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

PAINTING 09900-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

A. All materials shall be delivered to the Site in manufacturers' sealed packages, with labels intact.


1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product used. 2. Provide detailed specification from paint manufacturer describing required

preparation of each surface to be painted for review and approval. B. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) sets of full color chip line for each type of paint specified, for

color selection(s) by the Engineer. C. Draw Downs: 1. Provide three (3) stepped draw downs, defining each separate coat, including

block fillers and primers, for each color and material to be applied. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ready-mixed paints, both exterior and interior, varnish, stains, coatings, and waxes shall

be first-line (best quality grade) retail products. B. Thinners and additives shall be of types recommended by the paint manufacturer. C. The use of lead-containing paint is not permitted. D. Products: Provide paint products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. ICI Dulux. 3. Porter Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Pratt & Lambert. 6. Sherwin-Williams.

PAINTING 09900-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which painting is to be applied. Do not proceed

with painting work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 COLORS A. The Engineer will select all colors and provide a schedule of colors and finishes as

approved by the Department. Colors shall closely match those indicated on Drawings. B. Each coat of paint shall be applied in varying shades, with the final coat matching the

approved color selected. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING A. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean, smooth, free from scratches and dust and

thoroughly dry. B. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned, grouted, rubbed and pointed, water flushed clean

and free of all dust, oily grease and laitance, and allowed to dry prior to painting. C. Steel and Iron shall be free from grease, rust, scale and dust. Touch up any chipped or

abraded places on items that have been shop coated. Where steel and iron have heavy coating of scale, it shall be removed by wire brush or sand blasting necessary to produce a satisfactory surface for painting.

3.04 PROTECTION A. Adjacent fixtures and hardware shall be removed during the painting application. B. Particular care shall be taken by the use of clean drop cloths, masking and other suitable

means, to protect adjoining surfaces, fixtures, and materials of all kinds. Painting applicator shall be held responsible for, and shall repair, all damages resulting from the painting operation.

C. All ceiling and soffit overhead painting shall be applied only while the floor is completely and continuously covered with drop cloths.

3.05 APPLICATION A. Paints shall be applied in the colors and minimum number of coats scheduled herein and

at the square foot coverage as stated in the paint manufacturer's printed specifications. It is intended that paint so applied shall cover to the satisfaction of the Engineer or additional coats shall be applied until approval is obtained.

PAINTING 09900-4 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

B. Paints shall not be applied to surfaces which show a moisture content greater than 15 percent as determined by an electronic moisture meter.

C. Paints shall not be applied when the temperature falls below 45 degrees F., in damp,

rainy weather, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. D. Paint shall be evenly spread and well distributed. The finish coats shall be free from any

noticeable laps, brush marks, streaks, runs, sags, wrinkles, and shiners. E. All wood surfaces shall be thoroughly sanded between coats as required for a flaw-free

finish. 3.06 BACK PRIMING A. All wood backs to be placed against concrete or masonry (except pressure treated wood)

shall be painted with a sealer coat of paint or clear varnish before installation 3.07 DESTROYING WASTE A. At the end of each day, all cloths and waste materials which have been used in

preparation and application of inflammable paint materials shall be destroyed or placed in closed metal containers. Under no circumstances shall any waste be emptied into plumbing fixtures, drains, or clean-outs of the plumbing systems of the building. Waste shall not be allowed to accumulate on the Site.

3.08 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING A. Upon completion, all touching-up as required shall be applied and any paint shall be

removed from all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint. 3.09 PAINTING OF PIPING FOR IDENTIFICATION A. Exposed piping, piping concealed in accessible pipe spaces and piping behind access

panels shall be identified to designate service. B. Legend shall be stencil applied (painted on) at 40 feet spacing on straight runs where

pipes pass through walls or floors and regulators, strainers, and clean-outs (except valves and fittings on plumbing fixtures and equipment).

C. Legend shall give name in full or abbreviations. Size of stenciled identity lettering shall

vary with the diameter of pipe covering as follows:

1. Up to 1" 1/2" high letters. 2. Above 1" 3/4" high letters.

PAINTING 09900-5 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. The following surfaces shall be finished with the designated number of coats (in

addition to shop or manufacturer's coats) with the respective designated products of Sherwin Williams (SW), or equivalent products by one of the other listed manufacturers, with a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of not less than indicated:

B. Trade Names used are only to set a standard of quality desired. C. Omit primer on items with shop coat primer. All shop coats shall be touched up with

the same kind of paint as the shop coat and allowed to dry before application of finish coats.

EXTERIOR 1. Metal, Galvanized: Gloss Finish. a. 1-coat SW Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Primer: 3.0 - 5.0 DFT b. 2-coats SW Corothane II: 2.0 - 4.0 DFT each coat. c. Total 7.0 - 13.0 DFT. 2. Metal, Ferrous: Gloss Finish. a. 1-coat SW Tile-Clad High Solids: 2.5 - 4.0 DFT b. 2-coats SW Corothane II: 2.0 - 4.0 DFT each coat. c. Total 6.5 - 12.0 DFT. 3. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): Satin Finish. a. 1-coat SW Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer: 3.1 DFT. b. 2-coats SW A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim: 1.3 DFT each coat. c. Total 5.7 DFT.

INTERIOR 1. Metal, Galvanized: Eggshell Finish. a. 1-coat SW Hi-Solids Alkyd Metal Primer: 3.0 - 5.0 DFT. b. 2-coats SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Egg-Shell Enamel: 1.8 DFT each coat.

PAINTING 09900-6 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

c. Total 6.6 - 8.6 DFT. 2. Metal, Ferrous: Eggshell Finish. a. 1-coat SW Hi-Solids Alkyd Metal Primer: 3.0 - 5.0 DFT. b. 2-coats SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Egg-Shell Enamel: 1.8 DFT. c. Total 6.6 - 8.6 DFT. 3. Piping and Conduit, Exposed Surfaces: Semi-Gloss Finish. a. Ferrous Metal: 1) 1-coat SW Hi-Solids Alkyd Metal Primer: 3.0 - 5.0 DFT. 2) 2-coats SW ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: 1.5

DFT each coat. 3) Total 6.0 - 8.0 DFT. b. Aluminum and Galvanized Metal: 1) 1-coat SW Hi-Solids Alkyd Metal Primer: 3.0 - 5.0 DFT. 2) 2-coats SW ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: 1.5

DFT each coat. 3) Total 6.0 - 8.0 DFT. 4. Masonry and Concrete: Eggshell Finish. a. 1-coat SW PrepRite Block Filler: 8.0 DFT. b. 2-coats SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel: 1.8 DFT each coat. d. Total 11.6 DFT PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2 END OF SECTION 09900

HIGH-PERFORMANCE 09960-1 FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM FPID 416537-1-52-01 FOR STEEL SUBSTRATES FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM

FOR STEEL SUBSTRATES

PART 1 - - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of a high-performance fluoropolymer coating system to steel substrates for the gantry structure.

B. All coating work, including surface preparation, shall be performed in the shop.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS – The latest issue, revision, or amendment of the referenced standards in effect on the date of invitation to bid shall govern unless otherwise specified.

A. ASTM D 16 Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications

B. ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants;

C. ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

D. ASTM C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants;

E. ASTM D 2244 Calculation of Color Differences From Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

F. ASTM D 3276 Standard Guide for Painting Inspectors (Metal Substrates);

G. ASTM D 4417 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel;

H. ASTM D 4285 Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air;

I. ASTM D 7091 Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Non-magnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals;

J. SSPC-QP 1 Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors (Field Application to Complex Industrial Structure);

K. SSPC-QP 3 Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators;

L. SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel;

M. SSPC-VIS 1 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel;


N. SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning;

O. SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning;

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all products and materials to be used including abrasive media.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit samples on rigid backing (e.g. sheetrock, cement board or metal etc.), 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each sample.

4. Label each sample for location and application area.

C. Sealant material matching the specified topcoat color applied to the coating samples outlined in 1.03, B.

D. Applicator qualification data: Provide experience history as outlined in 1.04, A.

E. Sample warranty – The sample warranty shall be on manufacturer’s company letterhead and include contact information for individuals with knowledge of the warranty provisions.

F. Sample Daily Inspection Report (DIR).

G. Coating Repair Procedures for each of the following scenarios:

1. Post Primer Coat Application: a. Mechanical damage to zinc-rich primer exposing underlying steel with no

visible rusting; b. Mechanical damage exposing underlying steel with visible rust.

2. Post Intermediate Coat Application Note: It is anticipated that cosmetic repairs to the steel surfaces may be performed at this stage (e.g. pinholes in welds etc.) see “Steel Surface Defect Repair” below. a. Mechanical damage exposing primer (no steel exposed); b. Mechanical damage exposing steel (no rusting); c. Mechanical damage exposing steel with rusting;

3. Post Topcoat Application a. Mechanical damage exposing intermediate coat; b. Mechanical damage exposing primer (no rusting); c. Mechanical damage exposing steel (no rusting); d. Mechanical damage exposing steel with rusting;


4. Steel Surface Defect Repair a. Pinholes in welds that exceed 1/64-inch in diameter or pinholes not visibly

filled with coating after intermediate coat application; b. Highly visible weld seams (e.g. use of polymer fillers).

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed at least two high-performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project. Indicated specific projects currently in-service with contact names.

B. Personnel performing coating inspection shall be a NACE Coating Inspector Level 1 Certified.

C. Inspection, testing and monitoring shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 3276.

D. Daily Inspection Reports (DIR) shall be prepared and available for Engineer’s review upon request.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Ship, store and handle materials in accordance with SSPC-PA 1. Maintain ambient temperature in storage spaces between 40 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit and greater than five (5) degrees Fahrenheit above the dew-point temperature.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes “fail” within specified warranty period. Note: Failure is defined as follows:

Color retention, ∆E≤3, in accordance with ASTM D 2244; Less than 10-percent gloss loss in accordance with ASTM D 523; No rusting on flat surfaces and less than 0.1-percent edge rusting (based on total

linear feet of edges); No cracking or loss of adhesion (peeling);

Note: Color samples (1.03, B) will be maintained by the Department and used for relative comparison regarding color and gloss retention verification testing.

1. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Basis of Design: Unless otherwise specified, provide coating products manufactured by the manufacturer’s listed below. Equivalent coating products by other manufacturers are acceptable but shall be approved by the Department prior to use:

1. Tnemec Company Incorporated (Tnemec); and,

2. PPG Architectural Finishes Incorporated (PPG).

2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Single source responsibility: Obtain primers, intermediate coat materials and thinners for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the topcoat.

B. Colors:

1. Topcoat: Unless otherwise noted, all steel members shall be painted with a color equal to Tnemec Company Incorporated 03 MT Silver Gray (Color Number A7800) with satin finish. Interior of column shall be coated with only the primer coat (zinc primer color may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer).

2. Sealant: Provide sealant in matching shade to topcoat.

2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM

A. Primer: Zinc-rich epoxy primer (minimum 3.0 mils DFT).

1. Tnemec: Tneme-Zinc 90-97

2. PPG: Coraflon ADS Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer

B. Intermediate Coat: Polyamide epoxy coating (minimum 5.0 mils DFT).

1. Tnemec: Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series N69.

2. PPG: Coraflon ADS High Build Epoxy Primer

C. Topcoat: Fluoropolymer (minimum 2.5 mils DFT).

1. Tnemec: Fluoronar Series 1072.

2. PPG: Coraflon ADS

2.4 SEALANT MATERIAL

A. One-component, neutral-cure silicone rubber sealant that meets ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A, and O.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine substrates and conditions to identify defects that will negatively affect the cosmetic appearance (as judged by the Department) and corrosion protection. Begin work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Topcoat application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

1. Prior to surface preparation inspect the steel substrates for organic surface contamination (e.g. grease, oil etc.). If contamination is found, the surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning prior to blasting.

2. After abrasive blasting, primer or intermediate coat inspect the steel substrates for areas requiring remedial action including rough and/or porous welds, fabrication defects and mechanical damage requiring repair. Defects shall be repaired.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION Abrasive Blasting: Prepare steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. Blast profile shall be 2.0 – 3.0 mils. Measure surface profile in accordance with ASTM D 4417 at a rate of three tests per for the first 1000 square feet plus one test for each additional 1000 square feet or part thereof. If Method C of ASTM D 4417 is used to measure profile, attach test tapes to Daily Inspection Reports. Following abrasive blasting, remove dust and debris by brushing, blowing with oil-free and moisture-free compressed air, or vacuum cleaning. Time interval between abrasive blasting and application of primer shall not exceed eight hours.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Application Substrates: Structural steel elements in accordance with General Notes drawing. Interior surfaces of columns shall receive one coat of zinc rich epoxy primer.

B. Handle, mix and apply high performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Dry film thickness (DFT): The total minimum DFT shall be 10.5 mils. The maximum DFT average per individual coat shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written requirements and not exceed 120% in any “spot” DFT test (e.g. average of three gauge readings).

D. Each coat of the coating system shall have a discernable color contrast to distinguish each separate coat.

E. Apply coatings to produce surface films without holidays, visible laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, fish eyes or other surface imperfections.

3.4 APPLICATION OF ZINC-RICH EPOXY PRIMER Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Ensure mixed material is constantly agitated during application.

3.5 APPLICATION OF STRIPE COAT


Apply a Stripe Coat of Intermediate Coat Epoxy within the coating manufacturer’s written recoat window of the zinc primer. Apply by brush or roller, working material into corners, crevices, angles, and welds, and onto outside corners and angles.

3.6 APPLICATION OF INTERMEDIATE COAT EPOXY Apply Intermediate Coat Epoxy within the coating manufacturer’s written recoat window of the Stripe Coat and zinc primer.

3.7 APPLICATION OF TOPCOAT Make all required repairs to primer and intermediate coats as specified prior to applying topcoat. Apply topcoat within recoat window of Intermediate Coat Epoxy.

3.8 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALANT Apply joint sealant after topcoat application to steel joints that are not seal welded. Apply sealant to top and bottom, or each side, of narrow joints.

3.9 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect work against damage from handling or other shop activities. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved and accepted by the Department.

B. Final coated assembly shall not be handled and/or placed on weight bearing points of contact prior to the minimum time outlined in the manufacturer's product data (e.g. “Dry to Handle”).

C. Protective pads (e.g. soft, exterior grade carpeting) shall be used at all contact points (e.g. weight bearing and chain fastening) to prevent abrasion damage to the coating system during shipping.



HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, 09980-1 FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM FPID 416537-1-52-01 FOR ALUMINUM SUBSTRATES FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 09980 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM

FOR ALUMINUM SUBSTRATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of a high-performance fluoropolymer coating system to aluminum substrates for the gantry structure.

B. All coating work, including surface preparation, shall be performed in the shop.

C. Steel substrates shall be coated in accordance with Section 09960 – HIGH-PERFORMANCE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL SUBSTRATES.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS – The latest issue, revision, or amendment of the referenced standards in effect on the date of Invitation to Bid shall govern unless otherwise specified.

A. ASTM D 16 Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications

B. ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

C. ASTM D 2244 Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

D. ASTM D 3276 Standard Guide for Painting Inspectors (Metal Substrates);

E. ASTM D 4285 Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air;

F. SSPC-QP 1 Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors (Field Application to Complex Industrial Structure);

G. SSPC-QP 3 Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators;

H. SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning;

I. SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning

J. AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all products and materials to be used including abrasive media.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit samples on rigid backing (e.g. sheetrock, cement board or metal etc.), 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each sample.

4. Label each sample for location and application area.

C. Applicator qualification data: Provide experience history as outlined in 1.04, A.

D. Sample warranty – The sample warranty shall be on manufacturer’s company letterhead and include contact information for individuals with knowledge of the warranty provisions.

E. Sample Daily Inspection Report (DIR).

F. Coating Repair Procedures for each of the following scenarios:

1. Post Primer Coat Application: a. Mechanical damage to wash primer exposing aluminum.

2. Post Intermediate Coat Application Note: It is anticipated that cosmetic repairs to the aluminum surfaces may be performed at this stage (e.g. pinholes in welds etc.) see “Aluminum Surface Defect Repair” below. a. Mechanical damage exposing primer (no aluminum exposed); b. Mechanical damage exposing aluminum.

3. Post Topcoat Application a. Mechanical damage exposing intermediate coat; b. Mechanical damage exposing primer; c. Mechanical damage exposing aluminum.

4. Aluminum Surface Defect Repair a. Highly visible weld seams (e.g. use of polymer fillers).

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed at least two high-performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project. Indicated specific projects currently in-service with contact names.


B. Personnel performing coating inspection shall be a NACE Coating Inspector Level 1 Certified.

C. Inspection, testing and monitoring shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 3276.

D. Daily Inspection Reports (DIR) shall be prepared and available for Engineer’s review upon request.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Ship, store and handle materials in accordance with SSPC-PA 1. Maintain ambient temperature in storage spaces between 40 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit and greater than five (5) degrees Fahrenheit above the dew-point temperature.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes “fail” within specified warranty period. Note: Failure is defined as follows:

1. Color retention, ∆E≤3, in accordance with ASTM D 2244;

2. Less than 10-percent gloss loss in accordance with ASTM D 523;

3. No cracking or loss of adhesion (peeling); Note: Color samples (1.03, B) will be maintained by the Department and used for relative comparison regarding color and gloss retention verification testing.

B. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Unless otherwise specified, provide coating products manufactured by the manufacturer’s listed below. Equivalent coating products by other manufacturers are acceptable but shall be approved by the Department prior to use:

1. Tnemec Company Incorporated (Tnemec); and,

2. PPG Architectural Finishes Incorporated (PPG).

2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Single source responsibility: Obtain primers, intermediate coat materials and thinners for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the topcoat.


B. Colors:

1. All aluminum members, except the Equipment Support Arms, shall be shop painted with a color equal to PPG Architectural Finishes Incorporated UMC 50093 with 30% gloss, or approved equal (light green). Both sides of the aluminum panels shall be coated. Aluminum Equipment Support Arms shall be painted with a color to match steel substrates specified in Section 09960.

2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING SYSTEM

A. Primer: Wash primer; minimum 0.5 Mils dry film thickness (DFT).

1. Tnemec: Wash Primer

2. PPG: Coraflon™ ADS Wash Primer

B. Intermediate Coat: Polyamide epoxy coating (minimum 3.0 mils DFT).

1. Tnemec: Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series N69.

2. PPG: Coraflon™ ADS High Build Epoxy Primer

C. Topcoat: Fluoropolymer (minimum 2.5 mils DFT).

1. Tnemec: Fluoronar Series 1072.

2. PPG: Coraflon™ ADS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions to identify defects that will negatively affect the cosmetic appearance (as judged by the Department). Begin work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Topcoat application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Solvent clean per SSPC SP-1 to remove all contamination.

B. Abrade substrate to obtain a surface profile. Depending on the alloy and substrate softness; use hand sanding, Scotch-Brite® Brand pads, and/or hand tool cleaning per SSPC SP-2 as required.

C. Remove dust and debris by brushing, blowing with oil-free and moisture-free compressed air, or vacuum cleaning.

D. Time interval between preparation and application of primer shall not exceed eight (8) hours.


3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Prepare, pre-treat, handle, mix and apply high performance coatings according to AAMA 2605 and with coating manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Dry film thickness (DFT): The total minimum DFT shall be 6.0 mils. The maximum DFT average per individual coat shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written requirements and not exceed 120% in any “spot” DFT test (e.g. average of three gauge readings).

C. Each coat of the coating system shall have a discernable color contrast to distinguish each separate coat.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without holidays, visible laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, fish eyes or other surface imperfections.

3.4 APPLICATION OF WASH PRIMER

A. Apply wash primer in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Allow the primer to cure a minimum of two (2) hours prior to top coating.

3.5 APPLICATION OF INTERMEDIATE COAT EPOXY

A. Apply Intermediate Coat Epoxy within the coating manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.6 APPLICATION OF TOPCOAT

A. Make all required repairs to primer and intermediate coats as specified prior to applying topcoat. Apply topcoat within recoat window of Intermediate Coat Epoxy.

3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect work against damage from handling or other shop activities. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved and accepted by the Department.

B. Final coated assembly shall not be handled and/or placed on weight bearing points of contact prior to the minimum time outlined in the manufacturer's product data (e.g. “Dry to Handle”).

C. Protective pads (e.g. soft carpeting) shall be used at all contact points (e.g. weight bearing and chain fastening) to prevent abrasion damage to the coating system during shipping.

GANTRY SIGNS 10431-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 10431 – GANTRY SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


1. Panel Signs.

2. Dimensional characters (letters and numbers and logos for exterior use.

3. Illuminated characters (letters and numbers) and panels.

4. Signage accessories.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. DIVISION 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated characters and for access to remote transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For signs with illuminated characters.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following samples to verify color selected:

1. Panel Signs: Full-size samples of each type of sign required.

2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size samples of each type of dimensional character (letter and number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.

3. Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of attachment.

4. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.


F. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by signage manufacturer and/or an authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with Code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where sizes and installation/mounting details are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions with General Contractor before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices.

B. Coordinate location of remote transformers with building constructions. Ensure that transformers are accessible after completion of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:


1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each sign is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.

1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain three-dimensional as manufactured, under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch measured diagonally.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: “Custom Formed Faces” by Quality Manufacturing Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Adtech.

C. Vacuum Formed Acrylic (Exterior): Manufacturer’s standard and as follows:

1. Internally lighted (backlit).

2. Color: Three color (semi-opaque) vacuum formed as indicated on Drawings and as selected by Engineer.

3. Provide ultraviolet and other protection as necessary to provide 10 year durability in unprotected exterior location.

4. Provide sign panel backing and/or otherwise reinforce and mount sign to resist 150 mph wind loads pursuant to the Florida Building Code, latest adopted edition.

D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.

E. Internal Lighting: Provide internal lighting system that complies with the following performance criteria:

1. Provides uniform lighting of characters so as to be visible from 2000 feet and legible from 1000 feet.

2. Free of “hot spots” in lighted surfaces.

3. Lights shall be LED providing longest operational life possible meeting all other listed criteria.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surfaces, and durable (non-corroding) in exterior unprotected location.


B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Coordinate with Structural Drawings and Engineer regarding mounting details.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finishes Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Satin, Directional Polish: No. 6 finish.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described or appropriate and in compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, parallel to mounting surface, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:

1. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

C. Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide manufacturer’s standard brackets, fittings, and hardware as appropriate for mounting signs that project at right angles from mounting surface. Attach brackets and fittings securely to mounting surface with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Illuminated Characters:

1. Run wires into wall construction through conduit. Use insulators as necessary for lighting wiring.

2. Exposed-to-view wiring or conduit on wall face is not permitted.

3. Engage a licensed electrician to connect wiring to power source.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Protect signs from damage until Final Acceptance.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work of this Section shall include providing fire extinguishers and accessories for each

new building. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide fire extinguishers, brackets, and accessories by

single manufacturer. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All fire extinguishers shall be Underwriters'

Laboratories (UL) approved and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for fire extinguishers

and accessories to the Engineer for review. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide fire extinguishers, brackets, and accessories by one of the following

manufacturers:

1. J.L. Industries, Inc.

2. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.

3. Potter-Roemer.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire extinguishers shall be multi-purpose, dry chemical type.

B. Products: Provide one of the following fire extinguishers:

1. MP-10; Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

2. Cosmic 10E; J.L. Industries, Inc.

C. Brackets shall be used for all fire extinguishers.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify servicing, charging, and tagging of all fire extinguishers. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the items of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings,

NFPA 10, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction, anchoring all components firmly in position.


FURNISHINGS 12570-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01

FPID 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 12570 - FURNISHINGS PART 1.00 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Folding wall desks

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring folding wall desks.

2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for reinforcements in metal-framed gypsum board partitions for anchoring folding wall desks.

1.03 SUBMITTALS folding wall desks

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain products through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of folding wall desks by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' folding wall desks of similar sizes configurations, and complying with the Specifications may be considered.

C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s one(1) year warranty.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.


FPID 416537-2-52-01

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of folding wall desk.

PART 2.0 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products equal to the products indicated on the drawings are acceptable.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Provide wall-mounted folding desk B. Minimum work surface: 20” wide x x15” deep C. Operation: adjustable stays and magnetic door catch. D. Finish: Plastic laminate exterior.

PART 3.0 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of metal medical casework.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FOLDING WALL DESK

A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where metal medical casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

PART 4.00 - BASIS OF PAYMENT All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. For FPID 416537-1-52-01: 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1; 0735-088-001 Plaza


FPID 416537-2-52-01

Modify Existing. For FPID 416537-2-52-01 : 0735-074-001: Toll Plaza, Location 1 ; 0735-074-002: Toll Plaza, Location 2


15000-1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15000 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General Provisions specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The work shall include the provisions of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the drawings, to include supervision, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, start-up and tests for a complete mechanical installation.

B. Drawings for the Work are diagrammatic in nature and intended to convey the scope of the installation and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of the Work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown. This contractor shall be responsible for selecting the equipment to fit the space provided. The location and sizes for pipe fittings, sleeves, inserts, fire and/or smoke dampers, and other basic items required by code and other sections shall be coordinated and included for the proper installation of the work.

C. Equipment Specifications may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically indicated in the contract documents with no additional cost incurred.

D. Where noted on the Drawings or indicated in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this Division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make


all final connections. Contractor shall install equipment and systems in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Coordinate with all trades in submittal of shop drawings. Space conditions shall be detailed to the satisfaction of all trades, subject to the review and final acceptance of the architect/engineer. In the event that the Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause any interference with the work of the other trades this Contractor shall make all required changes to correct the condition.

F. Contractor shall verify all equipment connection sizes prior to installation of any systems. This Contractor shall adjust piping system sizes as required to match equipment connections. Utilize reducers where equipment connections are smaller than pipe sizes indicated on plans, no piping shall be decreased in size.

G. Examination of Bidding Documents:

1. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully and not later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an Addendum by the Engineer. Only a written interpretation or correction to bid documents by Addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.

H. Substitutions

1. Except as provided below, each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in the bidding documents.

2. No substitutions for other materials and equipment will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the Owner for approval at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include a complete description of the proposed substitute, the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, drawings, cuts, performance and test data or information necessary for a complete evaluation.


3. If the Owner approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be issued as an Addendum forwarded to all participating bidders.

4. If any bidder is unable to procure written approval of any substitution from the Owner prior to the opening of bids, then he shall base his bid on the items specified.

5. Substitutions requested on the Bid Proposal Form which are prior approved by the Owner will be incorporated into the contract with the successful bidder.

6. Requests for any substitutions not submitted and approved in accordance with the above instructions will be denied by the Owner.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All installations and equipment shall be in strict accordance with all applicable Statutes, Codes and Regulations of the Governmental Bodies having jurisdiction.

B. Conform to the Florida Building Code.

C. Conform to the Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Equipment and installations shall be in strict accordance, but not limited to, the following Codes and Standards:

1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council

2. ADC Air Diffusion Council

3. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

4. ANSI American National Standards Institute


5. API American Petroleum Institute

6. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

7. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

8. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

9. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

10. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

11. AWS American Welding Society

12. AWWA American Water Works Association

13. CDA Copper Development Association

14. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

15. FM Factory Mutual System

16. FS Federal Specification, General Services Administration

17. MIL Military Specification

18. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry

19. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

20. NEMA National Electric Manufacturers' Association

21. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

22. NSF National Sanitation Foundation

23. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

24. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

25. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide- Furnish and install

B. Appurtenances- All required items and equipment for a complete working system.

C. Indicated- As indicated on Contract Documents.

D. Concealed- Hidden from sight; includes items in shafts and above ceilings.


E. Exposed- Not concealed; work within equipment rooms shall be considered exposed.

F. Piping- Includes pipes; fittings, valves, hangers, and appurtenances comprising a system.

G. Ductwork- Includes ducts, fittings, housings, dampers, hangers and appurtenances comprising a system.

H. Furnish- Procure and deliver to the site equipment, devices and items indicated and required for a complete installation.

I. Install- Labor, miscellaneous materials, services and tools to receive, store, locate, secure in place, connect, and place into operation equipment for a complete installation.

1.6 FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Secure all permits and pay all fees incurred thereto in connection with the Work.

B. Coordinate and provide inspections as required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

C. Where applications are required for procuring services to the building, prepare and file such applications with the Utility Company. Furnish all information required in connection with the application required by the Utility Company.

1.7 ACTIVE SERVICES

A. Existing active services: water, gas, sewer, electric, etc. when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, notify Architect/Engineer and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in compliance with the requirements of the Utility Company or the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.8 SITE INSPECTION


A. Contractor shall inspect the site to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which affect his work. Contractor shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of below grade piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other existing obstacles.

B. Extra payment will not be provided for changes in the Work required because of Contractors failure to perform this inspection.

1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.

B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affect:

1. Structural integrity of element.

2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.

4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to:

1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.

2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.

3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.

D. Execute work by methods that will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.


F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, and other penetration through surfaces.

H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely conceal voids.

I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersections; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

J. Identify any hazardous substances or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy.

1.10 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Under Division 15 MECHANICAL, provide and install the following items of electrical Work which shall conform with the applicable requirements of the Electrical Division:

1. Temperature control wiring.

2. Interlock wiring for mechanical equipment.

3. Alarm wiring for mechanical equipment.

B. Under Division 16 ELECTRICAL, provide:

1. Power wiring, complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through motor starters.

2. Disconnect switches and final connections thereof.

3. Motor control centers or motor starter panelboards.

4. All miscellaneous individual motor starters, unless noted otherwise.


C. Any proposed changes made by Division 15 in motor sizes must be submitted for review and include all revisions to affected trades. Division 15 shall pay all costs incurred thereto.

D. Coordinate with Division 16 all motors and other mechanical equipment which require electrical services and equipment.

1.11 HOISTS, CRANES, RIGGING, TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING

A. Contractor shall provide cranes, scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle, hoists and rigging in accordance with OSHA regulations and requirements, necessary for placing materials and equipment in their proper locations on the project. Remove temporary work from site when no longer required.

1.12 PROTECTION

A. Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished. Equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is completed. Damage such as rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original integrity.

B. Where installation or connection of equipment requires work in areas previously finished by other contractors, the area shall be protected and not altered or otherwise damaged during the course of the said work. Contractor shall procure the services of the original contractors for the repairing and refinishing the damaged areas thereof.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover products subject to deterioration or damage with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.


E. Contractor to provide, as a minimum, one (1) five (5) pound

extinguisher shall be provided with each work crew, at all times when working within the building.

F. Provide guards for belt-driven equipment and at chains, gears, couplings, keys, projecting set screws and other rotating or moving parts. Belt guards to enclose both pulleys and belts on exposed sides. Provide coupling guards on direct connected equipment. Design and Manufacture guards for easy removal for service and to comply with UL and OSHA requirements. Provide guards supplied by the same manufacturer of the said equipment whenever available.

1.13 COOPERATION

A. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing, with copies to Architect/Engineer, any information necessary to permit the Work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference and delay. Exact location of all mechanical and electrical equipment, devices, etc., in all spaces shall be coordinated with the Architectural ceiling plans, elevations and details.

1.14 PRODUCT DATA AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. See Division 1-General Requirements.

B.Product Data Submittals

1. Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the architect, for approval, a list of manufacturers' names of material and equipment he proposes to provide. In the event any items of material or equipment contained therein fail to comply with the Contract Documents, such items will not be approved.

2. All submittals shall be submitted electronically. Submittals shall be marked indicating specification section numbers. All product data shall be clearly marked with the corresponding equipment identification numbers as indicated in the contract documents.

3. Mark-out items on product data sheets which constitute information not pertaining to the equipment specified.


4. Prepare and submit shop drawings for all specially fabricated items, modifications to standard items, specially designed systems where detailed design is not shown on the Contract Documents, or where the proposed installation differs from that shown on the Contract Documents.

5. Provide design data indicating pipe and equipment sizing and manufacturer=s installation instructions.

6. Submit data as listed below, in addition to provisions of the paragraphs above and other sections of this specification.

Air Handling Units

Condensing Units

Drains: Condensate, Floor, Roof

Valves: Globe, Check, Plug, Butterfly, Ball

Pressure Relief Valves

Thermostats

Pipe Guides and Anchors

Louvers

Duct Thermal Insulation Materials

Ductwork Materials

Vibration Isolation

Identification System

Hangers: Hanger, Rod, Saddles, Clamps and anchors

Pipe Systems: Pipe, Fittings, Solder, Flux, Gaskets

Pipe Insulation: Insulation, Fittings, Vapor Barrier, Jackets and Sealants

Refrigerant Piping

C. Coordination Drawings

1. Mechanical Contractor shall prepare and submit coordination drawings to assure proper coordination and installation of work. Plans shall be drawn by Mechanical Contractor by utilizing Contract Documents for reference. Reproduction of Contract Documents for the purpose of utilizing them as Coordination Drawings


is prohibited. Plans shall be drawn on 11 x 17 sheets and shall be drawn to scale. The Mechanical Contractors name, address and phone number shall be placed in a standard title block format. Drawings shall be sent in pdf format for electric review. Contractor may obtain room layout and ceiling plans from Architect to produce coordination plans.

2. Include plans, sections, and elevations of proposed work, showing all equipment (including Owner furnished equipment), piping and ductwork. Fully dimension all work horizontally and vertically. Show coordination with other Work including lighting fixtures, conduits, pullboxes, panelboards, and other electrical work, walls, doors, columns, beams, joists, equipment service clearances, and other architectural and structural features.

3. Ductwork shall include the following: Duct sizes, gauges and classifications, Shop standards for fabrication of seams, joints, reinforcement, sealants, hanging method.

4. Drawings shall include, but not limited to, the following areas:

a. All ductwork within project

5. Drawings shall include the following items:

a. Room layouts with all partitions b. Structure c. Equipment d. Light fixtures e. Access panels f. Sheet metal and air devices g. Major electrical conduit routing, panelboards, switchgear, disconnect

switches, control equipment, pull boxes and cable trays

6. No fabrication or installation of equipment and systems shall be made prior to Contractor receiving Coordination Drawings reviewed by Architect and Engineer.

7. Coordination Drawings shall indicate all walls, floors and roofs accordingly.

8. Contractor shall coordinate for each trade to indicate its Work on the coordination drawings. Drawings shall include horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference. Refer to following typical areas requiring input from other trades:


a. Equipment Building.

9. Where conflicts with other trades occur, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for provisions to accommodate any interference.

10. A Subcontractor who fails to promptly review and incorporate His work on the Coordination Drawings shall assume full responsibility of any installation conflicts with said Work and project schedule.

11. Contractor shall distribute the final reviewed coordination drawings as follows:

a. Full size bonds to General Contractor b. Full size bonds to affected Subcontractors

D. Product Data and Shop Drawing Resubmittal

1. First time review of submittal data and reports by the Architect/Engineer shall be a conformance review to the Contract Documents as stipulated on the shop drawing review stamp and will include all comments and/or notations deemed necessary by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Second time review shall be review of the submittal data and reports noted to be "Resubmit" and/or "Not Approved" under the first review and shall be resubmitted to the Architect/Engineer within Thirty (30) days of the posted date of the shop drawing review of the first submittal. Original data resubmitted for the second time by the Contractor shall be corrected and have all comments and notations incorporated thereof whether indicated or implied. Items not conforming to initial comments shall be rejected.

3. Third time review shall be final review

of the submittal data and reports. The resubmittal shall be sent to the Architect/Engineer within Fifteen (15) days of the posted date of the shop drawing review of the second submittal. Any product data or reports that are not corrected in all respects and conform to all comments and notations whether written or implied shall be rejected and Contractor shall provide and install the said equipment and materials in complete compliance with Contract Documents.


E. General

1. If materials or equipment are installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of the corresponding product data cuts or shop drawings marked "Approved" or "Approved as Noted", the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and replacement of such items at no additional charge to the Owner.

1.15 FINISHING

A. General

1. Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of Contract, the Contractor shall perform work as outlined herein.

B. Closeout Submittals

1. Make applicable closeout submittals in compliance with Division 1; General Conditions, and supplements to General Conditions.

C. Cleaning

1. At the conclusion of construction, the site and structure shall be cleaned thoroughly of all debris and unused materials remaining from the mechanical construction. All tunnels and closed-off spaces shall be cleaned of all packing boxes, wood frame members and other waste materials utilized in the mechanical construction.

2. The entire system of piping shall be cleaned internally. The Contractor shall open all dirt pockets and strainers, completely blowing down as required and clean strainer screens of all accumulated debris.

3. All tanks, fixtures and pumps shall be drained and proven free of sludge and accumulated matter.


4. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. (Do not remove permanent name plates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.).

5. Heating and air conditioning equipment, tanks, pumps, traps, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned and new filters or filter medias installed. Provide and install new filter media for all air handling units serving areas within the scope of this project.

D. Equipment Startup

1. No equipment shall be operated or tested before full compliance with the equipment manufacturers' specifications and recommendations for the lubrication, alignment, direction of rotation, balance and other applicable considerations.

2. Contractor shall take particular care to ensure that all equipment is complete assembled, properly lubricated, and all grease and oil reservoirs have been filled to correct level with the manufacturers' recommended lubricants.

3. It is the Contractors responsibility to place each item of equipment, install by him, in full operating condition. This responsibility shall include, but not be limited to, auxiliaries, piping, wiring, unit start up, check of unit performance, etc.

E. Record Drawings

1. Refer to Division 1: General Conditions

2. Contractor shall keep accurate records of all deviations in Work, as actually installed, from Work indicated on Contract Documents.

3. When Work is complete, Division 15 Contractor shall minimally provide two (2) complete "Record" sets of blackline bonds. Contractor may at his option obtain reproducible bonds through the Architect of the original Contract Documents for alteration by Him. Contractor shall pay all fees for the drawing reproduction thereto. Contractor shall certify the accuracy of each drawing by endorsement and signature thereon. Upon completion of the Record Drawings the Contractor shall deliver them to the Architect/Engineer for review, prior to forwarding to Owner.


4. All underground Work shall be accurately located on the Record Drawings by plan dimension, grade elevation and service elevation. Such work shall include condensate piping, drywells, etc.

F. Operating and Maintenance Instructions

1. Format:

a. Prepare two (2) complete sets of data in the form of instructional manuals. b. Binders: Commercial quality, 8½ x 11 inch three-ring binders with

hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; two inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

c. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project and separate building; identify subject matter of contents.

d. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table

of Contents of this Project Manual. e. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed

description of product and major component parts of equipment to include equipment tag number (i.e., AHU-5A).

f. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound

minimum paper. g. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text;

fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

2. Contents, Each Volume

a. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

b. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone

numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

c. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and

component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable


information. Do not highlight. Use strikethrough to indicate nonapplicable information. Submission of manufacturer’s standard documentation without editing for applicability of model numbers and information will not be accepted.

d. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component

parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. e. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical

sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

f. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each and as specified in Section

01700.

3. Manual for Equipment and Systems

a. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

b. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. c. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal

operating instructions. Include sequence of operation of the mechanical systems. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

d. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for

trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting balancing, and checking instructions. Contractor shall provide a master maintenance schedule with listing of names, addresses and phone numbers of service organizations of each item of equipment. This schedule shall be typewritten and subdivided by specification section numbers and indicate equipment tag numbers.

e. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. f. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

Submission of manufacturer’s standard documentation without editing for applicability of model numbers and information will not be accepted.

g. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.


h. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings,

and diagrams required for maintenance. i. Provide control diagrams.

j. Include final test and balancing reports.

4. Upon completion of all work and all tests, Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor for operating the systems and equipment for a minimum period of two (2) eight (4) hour days or as otherwise specified. During this period, instruct the Owner's maintenance representatives fully in the operating, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished and review of contents of maintenance manuals with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Contractor shall give at least seventy-two (72) hours advance written notice to the Owner.

5. The instructor shall be fully trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary, as determined by the Architect/Engineer.

1.16 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Section 15190; Mechanical Identification

1. Provide touch-up paint where damage on equipment furnished with factory finish, to match original finish.

1.17 CONCRETE WORK

A. Provide concrete bases and housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment unless indicated otherwise. Vibration pads and equipment bases shall be provided by this Contractor.

B. Provide all equipment anchor bolts and coordinate their proper installation and accurate location. Secure all exterior mounted equipment in an approved manner to withstand 140 mile per hour winds.


C. All equipment located on floor slab, that is not mounted on wheels and is capable of being moved shall be secured to the floor with anchor bolts. All equipment bolt holes shall be utilized in equipment mounting and a minimum of two bolts shall be used per item. Bolts shall be of sufficient size to prevent equipment from overturning.

1.18 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeve or penetration into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around pipe or pipe insulation where installed. Outside diameter of escutcheon shall completely conceal sleeves and openings in elements. Where sleeves extend above finished floor, provide deep escutcheons to conceal sleeve extensions. Secure escutcheons or directly to sleeve or element with set screws or other approved devices. Escutcheon screws shall not be secured to insulation.

1.19 INSULATION PROTECTION

A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation, as specified in Section 15260; Piping Insulation

1.20 SYSTEM GUARANTEE

A. Work required under this Division shall include one-year guarantee for all installations and systems. Guarantee by Contractor to Owner to replace for Owner any defective workmanship and/or material which has been furnished under contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of systems by the Architect/Engineer. Guarantee shall also include all reasonable adjustment of systems required for proper operation during the guarantee period. Guarantee shall not include normal preventative maintenance services or filters.

B. At "Demonstration", one-year guarantee provision by Contractor shall be explained to Owner.

C. All sealed refrigeration systems shall be provided with a five (5) year factory warrantee.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza.


15140-1 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15140 – SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports

B. Equipment bases and supports

C. Sleeves and seals

D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Equipment bases.

B. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Joint seals for piping and duct penetration of fire rated assemblies.

C. Section 09900 - Painting

D. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

E. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

F. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping

B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

C. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers


D. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer

E. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

F. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refrigerant and Condensate Piping:

1. Conform to MSS SP58 and MSS SP69.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.


7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Galvanized for all exterior applications.

2.3 INSERTS

A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gauge galvanized steel.

C. Lead Flashing:

1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead

2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gauge galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

D. Sealant: Acrylic


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Contractor shall install supports and anchors in accordance with manufacturers’ recommended applications. Contractor shall ensure that supports and anchors are suitable for the application in which they are intended.

3.2 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

B. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

C. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

F. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

G. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

H. Provide galvanized coating for all exposed steel hangers and supports.

3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS


A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, size and thickness as indicated on the drawings. Refer to Section 03300 for concrete.

B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. Anchor all exterior equipment to meet 140 mile per hour winds.

C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.5 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one-inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash, and seal.

C. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.6 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.


C. Extend sleeves through floors two inches above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. Escutcheons shall be painted to match wall color when so directed by the Architect.

3.7 SCHEDULES

Hanger Rod Pipe Size Inches

Maximum Hanger Spacing

Feet

Diameter Inches

1/2 to 1-1/4 6. 3/8

1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8

2-1/2 to 3 10 ½

4 to 6 10 5/8

8 to 12 14 7/8

14 and Over 20 1

PVC (All Sizes) 6 3/8

C.I. Bell and Spigot (or No-Hub and at Joints)

5 3/8



15170-1 MOTORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15170 - MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Single phase electric motors


A. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

C. IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions.

15170-2 MOTORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.

C. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.


A. Conform to NFPA 70 and applicable local codes.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 15000.

15170-3 MOTORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

B. Warranty: Include coverage for motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.

1.10 COMPLIANCE

A. Motor efficiency shall comply with Florida Building Code, Chapter 13.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.

B. Type:

1. Open drip-proof except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40ºC environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for

insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

D. Wiring Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.

2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame.

2.2 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.

15170-4 MOTORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.

D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50ºC temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.

E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50ºC temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50ºC temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.

D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.

E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.

F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50ºC temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50ºC temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

15170-5 MOTORS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans: Split phase type.

B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type.

C. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start type.

D. Motors located in exterior locations air cooled condensers: Totally enclosed type.

E. Motors located outdoors: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-treated type.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.

C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

3.3 NEMA OPEN MOTOR SERVICE FACTOR SCHEDULE

HP 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM

1/6 - 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35

1/2 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15

3/5 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15

1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15

1-5 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15



15190-1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15190 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Nameplates

B. Tags

C. Pipe Markers


A. Section 09900 - Painting: Identification painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady.

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Lem Products. b. Florida Marketing Products.

B. Description: Laminated three-layer engraved plastic black with white letters. Minimum size shall be 3” x 5”, letter size shall be ½” tall.

2.2 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch square.

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

C. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady.

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Lem Products.

B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.


D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

F. Identify air handling units and heat transfer equipment devices with plastic nameplates.

G. Identify thermostats with nameplates.

H. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays.

I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.



15222-1 MECHANICAL TRENCHING FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15222 – MECHANICAL TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND EXCAVATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Excavating for piping systems and air distribution systems.

B. Backfilling for piping systems and air distribution systems.

C. Consolidation and compaction as scheduled.

D. Fill for over-excavation.


A. Document: Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials.

B. Contract Considerations: Requirements applicable to unit prices for the work of this Section.

1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO T180 - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL MATERIALS


A. Bedding material: Bedding rock shall be 3/16 inch to 3/4" washed and graded stone (FDOT #67). This stone shall be graded so that 90 to 100 percent shall pass a 3/4" screen and 95 to 100 percent will be retained on a No. 8 screen. No stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension will not be acceptable.

B. Fill Type: Select Common Fill shall consist of mineral soil, substantially free of clay, organic material, loam, wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible or which cannot be properly compacted. Select common fill shall be no more than 5 percent by weight finer than No. 200 mesh sieve. The material shall contain no stones larger than 1- ½" in largest dimension.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION PREPARATION

A. Refer to pipe and duct details on drawings for additional requirements.

B. Contractor shall locate all existing utilities in the areas of Work. If the utilities are to remain in service the Contractor shall provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Contractor shall be responsible for repairs and/or replacement of utilities damaged with no costs incurred to Owner.

C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

F. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

G. If required to support the sides of excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction and to protect adjacent structures, existing piping and/or foundation material from disturbance, undermining or other damage, the Contractor shall construct, brace and maintain cofferdams consisting of sheeting and bracing. Care shall be taken


to prevent voids outside of sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and rammed.

H. Contractor shall at all times during construction, provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering excavations and keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition until the fill or pipes to be installed thereon have been completed.

3.2 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work.

B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate piping system and air distribution systems.

C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundation.

D. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

E. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

F. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. Larger material will be removed under another Division 1 Section.

G. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.

H. Correct areas over-excavated.

I. Trench work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of OSHA standards for safety.

3.3 EXCAVATION PROTECTION

A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.

3.4 BACKFILLING PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.


B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction. Backfill with Type A fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3.5 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 12 inches compacted depth.

D. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

G. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

H. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.6 BACKFILLING TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 15000 and Division 1 requirements.

B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.

C. Install all preinsulated piping in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 15000.


B. Reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

3.9 HAND DIGGING

A. Provide hand digging of those areas identified on the drawings. Hand digging is required in all areas where utilities are congested.



Equ

ipm

ent L

ocat

ion

(Not

e 1)

Slab

on

Gra

de

U

p to

20

ft

Fl

oor

Span

20- t

o 30

-ft

Fl

oor

Span

30- t

o 40

-ft

Fl

oor

Span

Equ

ipm

ent T

ype

H

orse

pow

er

an

d O

ther

R

pm

Bas

e T

ype

Iso-

la

tor

Typ

e

Min

. D

efl.,

in

.

Bas

e T

ype

Iso

- la

tor

Typ

e

Min

. D

efl.,

in.

Bas

e T

ype

Iso

- la

tor

Typ

e

Min

. D

efl.,

in.

Bas

e T

ype

Iso

- la

tor

Typ

e

Min

. D

efl.,

in.

R

efer

ence

Not

es

Con

dens

ing

Uni

ts

A

ll

All

A

1 0.

25

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Pack

aged

AH

, AC

, H, a

nd V

Uni

ts (S

plit

Syst

em A

HU

s)

All

U

p to

10

15

and

ove

r,

A

ll

All

A

A

1 1

0.75

0.

75

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

B

ase

Typ

es:

Isol

ator

Typ

es:

A.

No

base

, iso

lato

rs a

ttach

ed d

irect

ly to

equ

ipm

ent (

Not

e 27

)

1.

Pad,

rubb

er, o

r gla

ss fi

ber

B.

Stru

ctur

al st

eel r

ails

or b

ase

(not

es 2

8 an

d 29

)

2.

R

ubbe

r flo

or is

olat

or o

r han

ger

C.

Con

cret

e in

ertia

bas

e (N

ote

30)

3.

Sp

ring

floor

isol

ator

or h

ange

r D

. C

urb-

mou

nted

bas

e (N

ote

31)

4.

R

estra

ined

sprin

g is

olat

or

5.

Thru

st re

stra

int

15245-1 VIBRATION ISOLATION FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15245 – VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Vibration isolation

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Placement of isolators in floating floor slabs.

1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Supply of concrete for placement by this Section.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP (0.35 kW), plus connected piping and ductwork.

B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated.

1. Critical

a. 600 - 800 rpm: 3.5 inch


b. 800 - 900 rpm: 2 inch c. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 1 inch d. Over 1500 rpm: 0.5 inch

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each.

C. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting dimensions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators are properly installed and adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Record actual locations of hangers including attachment points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Restrained Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.

b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.


3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware.

4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators.

5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.

B. Spring Hanger:

1. Spring Isolators:

a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs.

b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

3. Housings: Incorporate rubber hanger with threaded insert.

4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment.

C. Neoprene Pad Isolators:

1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.

a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi d. Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width.

2. Configuration: 5/16 inch thick waffle pads bonded each side of 1/4 inch thick steel plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



B. Install isolation for motor driven equipment.

C. Install spring hangers without binding.

D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

F. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.

3.2 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE PIPE ISOLATION SCHEDULE

Pipe Size Inch (mm)

Isolated Distance from Equipment

1 (25)

120 Diameters (3.0 m)

2 (50)

90 diameters (4.5 m)

3 (80)


4 (100)


EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE



15260-1 PIPING INSULATION FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15260 – PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping insulation

B. Jackets and accessories

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 15535 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties: Placement of inserts.


A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation jacket.

B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

B. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus

C. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement

D. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation

E. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement

F. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus


G. ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

H. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

I. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation

J. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

K. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Block Type Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

L. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)

M. ASTM C591 - Rigid Preformed Cellular Urethane Thermal Insulation

N. ASTM C610 - Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

O. ASTM C640 - Corkboard and Cork Pipe Thermal Insulation

P. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

Q. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

R. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell Foam)

S. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics

T. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

U. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

V. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

W. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.



A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CELLULAR FOAM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armaflex


2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Rubatek

B. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.

1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.27 at 75ºF

2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40ºF

3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220ºF

4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM D1056; 1.0 percent (pipe) by volume, 1.0 percent (sheet) by volume

5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.20 perm inches

6. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25

7. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50

8. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive

1. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

2.2 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C. Insulated cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.

4. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.

5. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

6. Wrap in aluminum jacket outdoors.

D. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

E. For exterior applications, provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.4 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION SCHEDULE


PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch Inch

A. Cooling Systems

1. Condensate Piping All 1"

2. Refrigerant Suction Line All 1"

3. Refrigerant Reheat Line All 1"



15290-1 DUCTWORK INSULATION FPID 416537-1-52-01

SECTION 15290 – DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Ductwork insulation

B. Insulation jackets 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation jackets.

B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

C. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation

D. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

E. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

F. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

G. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.


C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.



B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's

density and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturers:

1. Owens Corning 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Knauf b. Johns Manville

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75ºF


2. Maximum service temperature: 450ºF 3. Water Vapor Absorption: ASTM C1104, less than 5% by weight when

tested for 96 hours 120ºF and 95% relative humidity. 4. Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized

film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized

film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been leak tested before applying insulation materials. See Section 15890 for duct leak testing requirement.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape, mastic, and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct

penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers,

flexible connections, and expansion joints.


3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.4 OUTDOOR INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. For ductwork above grade from the tunnel unit to the tunnel underground ductwork, crown and slope duct aluminum jacket to prevent water accumulation on top of ductwork or at ductwork to unit connection.

3.5 RIGID GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE Min Installed Ductwork Thickness Finish R Value

Supply Ductwork Outdoors 3" Aluminum Jacket 8.0 PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-88-001 Mainline Toll Plaza, No. 735-74-002 Mainline Gantry, No. 735-74-003 Ramp Gantry. END OF SECTION 15290

15484-1 FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEMS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15484 - FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and pipe fittings

B. Valves

C. Fuel oil storage tanks

D. Accessories


A. Section 15000 - General Provisions

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors

C. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping

B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping

C. API 2000 - Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks

D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding Qualifications

E. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings

F. ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe

G. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless


H. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses

I. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

J. ASTM D2310 - Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe

K. ASTM D2996 - Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe

L. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

M. NFPA 31 - Installation of Oil Burning Equipment

N. UL 80 - Steel Inside Tanks Oil-Burner Fuel

O. UL 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tanks, system layout, pipe sizes, location, and elevations. For fuel oil tanks, indicate dimensions and accessories including manholes and hold down straps.

C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.



B. Record actual location of piping system, storage tanks, and system components.




B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.


A. Conform to applicable standards for installation of fuel oil system.



B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VENT PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, or ASME B36.10, Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.


2. Joints: NFPA 30, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1.

B. FRP: ASTM D2310 and ASTM D2996, UL listed filament wound fiberglass reinforced epoxy pipe with integral epoxy liner and exterior coating.

1. Fittings: Compression molded, filament wound fiberglass reinforced epoxy.

2. Joints: Tapered bell and spigot adhesive bonded.

2.2 FUEL OIL PIPING

A. Carrier Pipe: Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, or ASME B36.10, Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.

2. Joints: NFPA 30, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1.

2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) malleable iron threaded unions.

2. Copper tube: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) bronze unions with brazed joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

2. Copper tube: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.


2.4 GATE VALVES

A. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, threaded ends.

2.5 GLOBE VALVES

A. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, threaded ends, with backseating capacity.

2.6 BALL VALVES

A. Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle threaded ends with union.

2.7 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze body, bronze swing disc, threaded ends.

2.8 STRAINERS

A. Threaded brass or iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

2.9 ABOVEGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS

A. Qualifications: UL Subject 2085 Listing

B. Tank: Above ground concrete, double wall type, designed for storage of fuel complete with attachments, fittings and accessories.

C. Tank Features:

1. Steel (primary) tank shall be listed by UL as an aboveground tank for flammable and combustible liquids and manufactured in accordance with U.L. 142.

2. Steel tank shall have "emergency vent" as required by NFPA 30 with no size reduction allowed for concrete encasement (insulation).

3. Steel tank shall have a normal vent independent of the emergency vent as required by NFPA 30.


4. Steel tank shall have a lug for connecting a ground conductor for lighting protection in accordance with NFPA 78.

5. Steel tank shall be pressure tested at 5 psi per U.L. 142.

6. Secondary containment shall consist of a 30 mil. geothermal liner, or equally acceptable material, enclosing the polystyrene spacer panels and the steel tank.

7. No steel or insulating spacer panels in unit shall come in direct contact with concrete or any other corrosive material with the exception of tank top openings.

8. Steel tank and secondary containment shall be encased in homogenous layer of minimum 3,000 psi reinforced concrete 6 inches thick to create a protected (vaulted) tank with no penetrating elements except at the top.

9. Steel tank shall be pressurized to 5 psi at the casting facility and shall remain pressurized until concrete sets, to provide expansion space between concrete and steel tank during use. This is in addition to the test required for U.L. 142 (#7 above).

10. Protected (vaulted) tank shall have capability of physical monitoring between primary and secondary containment.

11. Protected (vaulted) tank shall have a two-hour fire rating in accordance with Appendix II-F of the 1991 Uniform Fire Code.

12. Concrete encasement (insulation) shall be of a monolithic (seamless) pour and contain no cold joints or direct (heat-transfer) connections between the steel and the outside face of the concrete encasement on bottom or sides.

13. Protected (vaulted) tank shall have appropriate warning signs as required by the local jurisdiction.

14. Steel tank shall have a minimum five to seven gallons spill containment system, U.L. Listed and normally closed U.L. Listed drain port.

15. Protected (vaulted) tank shall have an exterior light reflecting and weather resistant Acrylic or Epoxy Coating.

16. Vault shall be ballistic impact resistant.

17. Vaulted tank design shall have been in manufacturing production and commercial use for a minimum of five years.

D. Main Tank Controls:

1. Simplex control panel with audible alarms and alarm indicator lamps.

2. Features to include:

a. Control Power On/Off b. Level gauge


c. Level indicator/sensor d. Loss of Fuel flow (to Day Tank) alarm e. Overfill Alarm (90%) f. Auto-Fill Shut-Off (95%) g. Weatherproof enclosure (NEMA 3R) h. Disconnect switched with hinged door

3. Simplex TC-9 controller is basis of design.

4. Provide unistrut stand for exterior location near end of main tank.

5. Provide permanently mounted identification labels for panel, switch, and each alarm indicating lamp.

E. Accessories:

1. 2" x 8' Vent riser

2. 2" Vent cap, Universal 45

3. 6" Emergency vent

4. 1-1/2" Suction tube and double tap

5. 1-1/2" Day Tank return tube

6. 4" Gauge stick

7. Foot valve at bottom of suctions tube

8. Decals (Diesel, No Smoking, Combustible)

F. Main Tank Fill Station:

1. Provide fill station for each main tank.

2. Fill station shall consist of the following:

a. 3" supply (fill) pipe b. 3" check valve c. 3" camlock fill fitting d. 3" lockable cap, Universal 0612VC

3. Fill station shall be contained in an aluminum enclosure with the following features:

a. Gasketed, lockable lid


b. Drain cock with cap at bottom of enclosure for manual draining of spills occurring during fill.

c. Minimum 5 gallon spill containment capacity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AP1 1615.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Install to NACE RP-01-69.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

F. Identify piping systems. Refer to Section 15190.

G. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

H. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

3.3 FUEL TANK INSTALLATION

A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and API 1615.


B. Clean and flush aboveground tanks after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made.

C. Install tanks on concrete pad and secure with hold down straps and turnbuckles.

D. Provide piping connections to tanks with unions and swing joints. Provide venting to API 2000.

E. Minimum clearance from tank to property line and buildings shall exceed the requirements of NFPA 30.



15510-1 CONDENSATE PIPING FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15510 – CONDENSATE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe and pipe fittings

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors

B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification

C. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

D. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications

B. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

C. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

D. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

E. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal

F. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal

G. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube



A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT DRAINS

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or SDR 26.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466 or D2467, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent welded..

2.2 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.

F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

H. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install unions downstream at equipment or apparatus connections.

B. All underground condensate piping shall be two inches in diameter. Insulate per Specification Section 15260.

PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 15510

15535-1 REFRIGERATION PIPING FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15535 – REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping

B. Refrigerant

C. Moisture and liquid indicators

D. Valves

E. Strainers

F. Check valves

G. Pressure relief valves

H. Filter-driers

I. Solenoid valves

J. Expansion valves

K. Receivers

L. Flexible connections 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08305 - Access Doors

B. Section 09900 - Painting

C. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation

D. Section 15671 - Air Cooled Condensing Units

E. Section 15785 - Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

F. Section 16660 - Wiring for Equipment Furnished by Others


1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers

B. ANSI/ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers

C. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

D. ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants

E. ANSI/ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

F. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Welding and Brazing

Qualifications

G. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

H. ANSI/ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes

I. ANSI/ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping

J. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

K. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal

L. ANSI/ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube

M. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal

N. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel

O. ANSI/UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves

P. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves

Q. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants

R. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless

S. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses


T. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

U. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration

Field Service

V. MIL-I-631C - Construction at Solenoid Valve Coils

W. MIL-V-23450C - Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic, Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000.

C. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties, including manufacturer’s catalogue information.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15000.

E. Submit design data as a submittal under provisions of Section 15000.

F. Submit data indicating pipe sizing.

G. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 15000.


A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Accurately record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings.


A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.


C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15000.

D. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA.

B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch (22mm) OD: ANSI/ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.26 cast copper. 2. Joints: Flared.

2.2 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: Coordinate with equipment supplier. 2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi, and maximum temperature of 200°F (93°C).

2.4 VALVES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 275°F (135°C).

B. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket,

rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 275°F (135°C).

C. Packed Ball Valves: Two piece bolted forged brass Body with Teflon ball seals

and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem


with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 300°F (149°C).

2.5 STRAINERS

A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or Monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi (2960 kPa).

2.6 CHECK VALVES

A. Globe Type: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, Teflon seat disc; for maximum working pressure of 425 psi and maximum temperature of 300°F (149°C).

B. Straight Thru Type: Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel

spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 200°F (93°C).

2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Straight Thru or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 400 psi setting; selected to ANSI/ASHRAE 15.

2.8 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ANSI/ARI 710, UL listed, brass shell and bronze cap, perforated brass shell and molded desiccant filter core; for maximum working pressure of 350 psi (2410 kPa).

B. Permanent Straight Thru Type: ANSI/ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with

molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of 400 psi. 2.9 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. Stem shall permit manual operation in case of coil failure.

B. Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electomagnetic coil, moisture

and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box.


2.10 EXPANSION VALVES

A. Angle or Straight Thru Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.

B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine

available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10°F (6°C) superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load.

2.11 RECEIVERS

A. Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Smaller: ANSI/ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psi maximum pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.

B. Internal Diameter Over 6 inch (150 mm): ANSI/ARI 495, welded steel, tested

and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code; 400 psi with tappings for inlet, outlet and pressure relief valve.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches (230 mm) long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 400 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope

piping one percent in direction of oil return.

E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

K. Insulate piping; refer to Section 15260.

L. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream or evaporator on

suction line.

M. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.

N. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor.

O. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

P. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 16660.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Provide line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser, or if receiver is provided, in liquid line leaving receiver.


B. Provide line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used install single main liquid line strainer.

C. On steel piping systems, provide strainer in suction line.

D. Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer.

E. Provide permanent filter-driers in low temperature systems and systems utilizing

hermetic compressors.

F. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers with three valve bypass assembly to permit isolation of driers for servicing.

G. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with three-valve bypass assembly.

Provide filter-driers for each solenoid valve.

H. Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down.

I. Provide refrigerant charging (packed angle) valve connections in liquid line

between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

J. Utilize flexible connectors at or near compressors where within piping configuration does not absorb vibration.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5.

C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig (1470 kPa). Perform final tests at 27 inches (92 kPa) vacuum and 200 psig (1470) kPa) using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.

3.5 PIPING DESIGN


A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design and size all refrigerant piping for air conditioning equipment. Contractor shall consider length of run and fitting loss when sizing refrigerant piping.


15786-1 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15786 – COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Gantry Building air handling and condensing units

B. Controls 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15980 - Instrumentation

B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code

B. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (100 Volts Maximum)

C. ASHRAE 52 - Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature and data indicating drain, and electrical rough-in connections.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures required for rigging

and making service connections. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance, and repair data.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Warranty: Include coverage of refrigeration compressor for five years, all other parts and labor one year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Liebert B. Data Aire

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15000. 2.2 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS, STAND-UP

A. Cabinet and Frame Construction:

1. The frame shall be constructed of MIG welded tubular and formed steel. All frame and internal fill components shall be coated using an autophoretic process to protect against corrosion. The exterior shall be 20 gauge steel and shall be powder coated. The panels shall be insulated with a minimum 1 in., 1-1/2 lbs. density fiber insulation. Front and side panels shall have captive, ¼ turn fasteners. The cabinet shall be designed so that all components are serviceable and removable from the front of the unit.

B. Fan and Motor Section:

1. The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width, double inlet.

C. Filter:

1. The filter shall be 2 inches thick and rated not less than 30% efficiency. D. Advanced Microprocessor Control:

1. The advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor LCD display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven with on-screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review and programming of temperature and humidity setpoints, alarm parameters, and setup selections including


choice of control type. A password shall be required to make system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature, humidity, or time delay) shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, component run times, date and time, and four analog inputs from sensors provided by others.

E. Control:

1. The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions:

a. Temperature Setpoint: 65°F to 85°F b. Temperature Sensitivity: +1°F to +9.9°F in 0.1° increments c. Humidity Setpoint 20% to 80% RH d. Humidity Sensitivity +1% to +3-% RH

2. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor

panel. Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel.

F. Predictive Humidity Control:

1. The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and

prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. In addition the system shall provide the following internal controls:

a. Compressor short-cycle control b. System auto-restart c. Sequential load activation

G. Front Monitor Display Panel:

1. The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor LCD backlit display panel with 4 rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This display (along with five front mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such as room conditions, operational status, alarms, control and alarm setpoints, and all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable.

H. Alarms:


1. The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions:

a. High temperature b. Low temperature c. High humidity d. Low humidity e. Short cycle f. High head pressure g. Change filter h. Loss of air flow i. Low suction pressure j. Loss of power

I. Audible Alarm:

1. The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator.

J. Common Alarm:

1. A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user

selected alarms with a remote alarm device.

K. Remote Monitoring:

1. Provide manufacturer’s network card (Network Interface Card or equivalent) for remote monitoring capabilities. Card shall be compatible with Ethernet wiring. Factory mount card in unit.

L. Analog Inputs:

1. The system shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20 mA signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5 vdc or 0 10 10 vdc if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front panel. The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front panel.

M. Diagnostics:

1. The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self-diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The microcontroller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass/not pass. Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control output shall be able to be


turned on or off from the front monitor panel without using jumpers or a service terminal. Each control output shall be indicated by an LED on a circuit board.

N. Data Collection:

1. The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of compressor, reheat, and fan motor. The ten most recent alarms shall also be retained.

O. Communications:

1. The microprocessor shall be compatible with all Liebert remote monitoring and control devices.

P. Electric Reheat:

1. The low-watt density, 304/304, stainless steel, finned-tubular electric reheat coils shall be capable of maintaining room dry bulb conditions when the system is calling for dehumidification. The reheat section shall include U.L. approved safety switches to protect the system from overheating.

Q. Floor Stand:

1. The floor stand shall be constructed of a heliarc welded tubular steel frame. The floor stand shall be coated using an autodeposition process to protect against corrosion. The floor stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads. The floor stand shall be 12 inches (30 cm) high.

R. Plenum:

1. The unit shall be supplied with a 2-way air discharge plenum. The plenum shall be 18 inches (457 mm) high, insulated, and powder painted the same color as the room unit.

S. Direct Expansion Coil:

1. The evaporator coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. The coil shall be provided with a stainless steel drain pan.


T. Condensing Unit

1. Air-Cooled Prop Fan Condensing Unit for Computer Room Units: The condenser coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins with a direct-drive propeller-type fan, and shall include a scroll compressor, high pressure switch, and lee-temp receiver. All components shall be factory assembled, charged with refrigerant, and sealed. Condensing unit shall be designed for 95ºF (35ºC) ambient and be capable of operation to -30ºF (-34.4ºC). Provide a hot gas bypass circuit to allow operation under low load conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify gantry equipment room is ready to receive work.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide adequate drainage connections for condensate system.

C. Provide an additional set of disposable filters. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 15786

15890-1 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Low pressure ducts B. Ductwork cleaning

C. Ductwork leak testing

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09900 - Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors: Sleeves.

C. Section 15910 – Ductwork Accessories

D. Section 15936 - Air Outets and Inlets

E. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE - Handbook 1981 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct Design

B. ASHRAE - Handbook 1983 Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction

C. ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles

D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,

and Strip

E. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

F. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot- Dip Process, Lock

Forming Quality

G. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

15890-2 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

H. ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe

I. ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

J. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

K. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

L. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-

Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooling Equipment

M. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards

N. SMACNA - High Pressure Duct Construction Standards

O. SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards

P. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors 1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: ½ inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm.


A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, NFPA 96 standards. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for low pressure systems.



B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15000.

15890-3 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming

quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A480/A480 M, Type 316 cold rolled,

annealed, sheet. Exposed surface shall be No. 2B.

D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.

2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with

ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.

C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of

duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15º divergence wherever possible.

Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30º; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45º.

E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and

structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.

F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.

15890-4 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

2.3 DOUBLE WALL STAINLESS STEEL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1)Lindab Inc. (2)McGill AirFlow LLC. (3)SEMCO Incorporated. (4)Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Weld all duct seams.

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Weld all duct seams.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Weld all duct seams.

3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Weld all duct seams.

D. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch

E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

solid sheet stainless steel.

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

15890-5 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. 5. Thickness shall be 2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating

and maintenance activities.

C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

D. For underground ductwork from the relocated tunnel unit to existing below grade

concrete encased ductwork, weld all seams and back fill by hand to avoid damage to the underground ductwork. Seal penetrations into concrete encased ductwork watertight and seal all tunnel penetrations water tight.

3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL

Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel General Exhaust Galvanized Steel Underground Ductwork Double Wall Stainless Steel

3.3 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which

may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

15890-6 DUCTWORK FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

3.4 DUCTWORK LEAK TESTING

A. It is a requirement of this contract that all of the ductwork be leak tested. Contractor shall leak test all ductwork in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the Florida Building Code, Chapter 13.


15910-1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15910 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Air turning devices

B. Flexible duct connections

C. Duct access doors

D. Duct test holes

E. Louvers 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

B. Section 15290 – Ductwork Insulation

C. Section 15890 – Ductwork 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards

C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service

D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers, and duct access doors.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15000.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 AIR TUNING DEVICES

A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately two inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.

2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.

B. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and

quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

C. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.

D. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three

hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.

E. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.4 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with

screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.5 LOUVERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Greenheck


2. Ruskin B. Provide as scheduled. Louvers shall be Miami Dade approved for missile impact,

and missile impact and wind driven rain. Louver shall carry a current Florida Product Approval number and a Miami Dade Notice of Acceptance. Provide wind driven rain and hurricane rated louver with vertical blades and with manual volume damper behind louver where scheduled.

C. Frame shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum with heavy gauge extruded

aluminum, drainable blades.

D. Construction shall be welded and mechanically fastened. Finish shall be mill and shall be primed and painted to the color as selected by the architect.

E. Anchor plates and structural supports shall be factory attached, heavy gauge steel.

Provide insect and bird screens. Screen shall be flattened aluminum in removable frame, rear inside mount.


A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Cover connections to medium and high pressure fans with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters,

coils, fans, automatic dampers, and elsewhere as required. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated.

D. Provide duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


15936-1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15936 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Louvers 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual

B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

C. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

D. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.


A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. 1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide product data for items required for this project.

C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level.

D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting

prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets.

15936-2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOUVERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Greenheck

2. Ruskin

B. Provide as scheduled. Louvers shall be Miami Dade approved for missile impact,

and missile impact and wind driven rain. Louver shall carry a current Florida Product Approval number and a Miami Dade Notice of Acceptance. Provide wind driven rain hurricane rated louver with vertical blades and with and manufacturer’s integral manual volume damper behind louver.

C. Frame shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum with heavy gauge extruded

aluminum, drainable blades.

D. Construction shall be welded and mechanically fastened. Finish shall be mill and shall be primed and painted to the color as selected by the architect.

E. Anchor plates and structural supports shall be factory attached, heavy gauge steel.

Provide insect and bird screens. Screen shall be flattened aluminum in removable frame, rear inside mount.


A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 15936

15985-1 CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15985 – CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Computer room air handling units/condensing units 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit diagrams indicating mechanical system controlled and control system components. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence.

C. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control

logic. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 15000.

B. Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSTATS

A. Provide air handling units/condensing unit manufacturer’s programmable 24 hour/day, 7 day/ week thermostat with battery backup.

15985-2 CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMPUTER ROOM AIR HANDLING UNITS / CONDENSING UNITS

A. Cooling Mode: Air handling unit fan shall run continuously. Condenser programmable thermostat and humidistat shall index the compressor on and off to maintain space temperature and humidity set points. Air handling unit hot gas bypass and electric reheat coil shall energize as needed to maintain temperature and humidity set points.

B. Heating Mode: Air handling unit fan shall run continuously. Programmable

thermostat shall index the air handling unit stage(s) of heat on in order to meet the space temperature.


15990-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 15990 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation

B. Section 15786 – Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

C. Section 15890 - Ductwork

D. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories

E. Section 15936 - Air Outlets and Inlets 1.3 REFERENCES

A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.

B. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and

Balancing.

C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

B. Submit test reports as a submittal under provisions of Section 15000.

C. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 15000.

D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.


E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

1.5 REPORT FORMS

A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB forms.

B. Forms shall include the following information:

1. Title Page:

a. Company name b. Company address c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude

2. Instrument List:

a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date

3. Air Moving Equipment:

a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Return air flow, specified and actual f. Outside air flow, specified and actual g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual h. Inlet pressure i. Discharge pressure j. Fan RPM


4. Return Air/Outside Air Data:

a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio

5. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer b. HP/BHP c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. d. RPM e. Service factor f. Starter size, rating, heater elements

6. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

7. Duct Traverse:

a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature


j. Air correction factor

8. Electric Duct Heater:

a. Manufacturer b. Identification/number c. Location d. Model e. Design kW f. Number of stages g. Phase, voltage, amperage h. Test voltage (each phase) i. Test amperage (each phase) j. Air flow, specified and actual k. Temperature rise, specified and actual

9. Air Cooled Condenser:

a. Identification/number b. Location c. Manufacturer d. Model e. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual f. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual g. Number of compressors

10. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual j. Air pressure drop, design and actual

11. Duct Leak Test:

a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure c. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor


f. Test apparatus

(1) Blower (2) Orifice, tube size (3) Orifice size (4) Calibrated

g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage


A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 15000. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented] experience. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.

B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National

Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 15000.

B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project.

C. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety system

with Fire Authority. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 15000.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:

1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in

addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.

B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to

Architect/Engineer.

C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.

D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as

observed.

E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 15000.


B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or

that such disruption has been rectified.

E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report.

Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, and return air quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross

sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that

adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive

changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil

pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.


I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, and return air dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, and return air dampers to

check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air

systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries.

3.6 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (100% OUTSIDE AIR TUNNEL

AND COMPUTER ROOM UNITS)

A. Perform air system test and balance as defined above.

B. Measure and record outside air dry bulb and wet bulb temperature prior to starting coil measurements.

C. Measure and record entering and leaving dry bulb and wet bulb air temperatures

across refrigerant cooling coils at a full load condition.

D. Measure and record entering and leaving air temperatures across electric duct heaters or unit heating coils at full load.

E. In units with motorized outside air dampers, calibrate damper positions, including

full closed and normal. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 15990

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contractual Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections.

B. Provide and install all equipment, labor, material and accessories, and mounting

hardware for a complete and operating system as described within these Division 16 Specification Sections.

C. Furnish, perform, or provide all labor including planning, purchasing,

transporting, storing, installing, testing, cutting and patching, trenching, excavating, backfilling, coordination, field verification, installation safety, supplies, and materials necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems (as described or implied by these specifications and the applicable drawings) in strict accordance with safety standards and applicable codes, which may not be repeated in these specifications, but are expected to be common knowledge of qualified Bidder.

D. All work shall comply with all applicable codes as a minimum and with the

additional requirements called for in these Contract Documents. E. Only trained and licensed personnel shall perform work. No Work shall be

performed which violates applicable Codes, even if called for in the Contract Documents.

F. Coordinate and verify power and telephone company service requirements prior to

installation and material procurement. G. Coordinate all Work with Toll Operations (TO) prior to performing any work on

this project. H. Make connections to all items in the Work which require electric power.

Connections will include wire, conduit, circuit protection, disconnects, and accessories. Securing of roughing-in drawings and connection information for


equipment involved is included under this division. See other divisions for specifications for electrically operated equipment.

I. Secure and pay for all permits, fees, licenses, and inspections required to perform

Division 16 work. J. Provide temporary electrical service, power, and lighting for construction. Refer

to Division 1 for requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: Furnish, install, and connect complete.

B. Review of shop drawings: A service by the Engineer to reduce the possibility of materials being ordered which do not comply with Contract Documents. The Engineer’s review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions or compliance with the contract documents. When an error is not detected, this does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error.

C. Wiring: Wire and cable, installed in raceway with boxes, fittings, connectors,

supports, accessories, overcurrent protection, and disconnects per applicable codes.

D. Work: Materials completely installed. E. Connect: Provide all wiring and connections required for a properly operating

system. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Install Work in stages or phases to accommodate TO and Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) requirements. Coordinate electrical schedule and operations with the Department Project Manager (PM).

1.5 DESCRIPTION

A. Install Work in locations shown or described in the Contract Documents, unless prevented by Project conditions.

B. Install all equipment so that all Code and Manufacturer recommended working

and servicing clearances are maintained. Properly arrange and install all equipment within designated spaces. If a departure from the Contract Documents is necessary, submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed drawings of the proposed changes with written reasons for the changes. No change shall be implemented without approval as permitted by the General Conditions.


C. The Contractor shall verify finish dimensions at the project site in preference to

using dimensions noted on Contract Documents. 1.6 INVESTIGATION OF SITE

A. Investigate the site and existing conditions thoroughly before bidding. B. During the course of his site visit, the electrical bidder shall become familiar with

all aspects of the proposed work and existing field conditions of the work. No compensation or reimbursement for additional expenses for failure investigate the existing facilities will be authorized. This shall include rerouting around existing obstructions.

C. Submission of a proposal will be construed as evidence that such examination has

been made and later claims for labor, equipment or materials required because of difficulties encountered will not be recognized.

D. Existing conditions and utilities indicated are taken from existing construction

documents, surveys, and field investigations. Unforeseen conditions probably exist and existing conditions shown on drawings may differ from the actual existing installation with the result being that new work may not be field located exactly as shown on the drawings.

E. Not all existing electrical serving the existing mainline facility is shown. The

Contractor shall become familiar with all existing conditions prior to bidding, and include in his bid the removal of all electrical equipment, wire, conduit, devices, fixtures, etc. that is to be demolished.

F. Reroute conduit and wiring in area of construction remaining active. Include

temporary connections necessary to maintain continuity of existing circuitry required to remain active during renovation.

G. Occupied existing buildings must remain in operation while work is being

performed. Schedule work for a minimum outage to the Department. Notify the PM appropriately for any shut-down of existing systems.

1.7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SITE

A. The drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to include every detail of construction, materials, methods, and equipment. They indicate the result to be achieved by an assemblage of various systems. Coordinate equipment locations with Civil, Architectural, Structural, HVAC, Plumbing, and Toll equipment. Layout equipment before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Coordinate installation in a neat and workmanlike manner.


B. Should conflicts exist between the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor

shall ask for clarification prior to doing and conflicting work. C. Refer to the architectural, structural, plumbing, sprinkler and HVAC plans and

details for dimensions, and fit the work to conform to the details of building construction. The right is reserved to shift any switch, receptacle, ceiling outlet or any special outlet a maximum of 10’-0” from its location as shown before it is permanently installed, without incurring additions to the contract.

D. Wiring arrangements for equipment shown on the drawings are intended to be

diagrammatic and do not show all required conductors and functional connections. All such items incidental to a complete and operating system shall be provided.

E. Submit specific shop drawings which indicate the fabrication, assembly,

installation, and erection of particular systems’ components. Drawings that are part of the Contract Documents shall not be considered a substitute for required shop drawings, field installation drawings, code requirements, or applicable standards.

F. Locations indicated for outlets, switches, and equipment are approximate and

shall be coordinated with the Contract Documents. Where instructions or notes are insufficient to locate the item, notify the Engineer.

1.8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted, all material shall be new and U.L. listed or labeled. In lieu of UL listing or labeling, a statement or data demonstrating compliance with contract documents from a nationally recognized testing agency shall be submitted for approval.

B. Where Contract Documents list design selection or manufacturer, type, this model

shall set the standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to the Engineer’s review and approval. Where Contract Documents list approved substitutions, these items shall comply with Division 1 requirements for substitutions.

C. When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or

government standard and at the request of the Engineer the Contractor shall furnish a certificate that the product complies with the referenced standard and supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

D. Where multiple items of the same equipment or materials are required, they shall

be the product of the same Manufacturer.


E. Prior to placing equipment orders, verify the physical size of specified equipment

to fit spaces allotted on the drawings and with NEC working clearances. F. Electrical equipment shall be protected from the weather, during shipment,

storage, and construction per manufacturer's recommendations. Should any apparatus be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be thoroughly dried and put through a dielectric test, at the expense of the Contractor, to ascertain the suitability of the apparatus, or it shall be replaced without additional cost to the Department.

G. Inspect all electrical equipment and materials prior to installation. Damaged

equipment and materials shall not be installed or placed in service. Replace or repair and test damaged equipment in compliance with industry standards at no additional cost to the Department. Equipment required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.

H. Material and equipment shall be provided complete and shall function up to the

specified capacity/function. Should any material or equipment as a part or as a whole fail to meet performance requirements, replacements shall be made to bring performance up to specified requirements. Damages to finish by such replacements, alterations, or repairs shall be restored to prior conditions, at no additional cost to the Department.

I. Where tamperproof screws are specified or required, Phillips head or Allen head

devices shall not be accepted. For each type used, provide the Department with three tools. The Department will designate the specific hardware design to correspond with existing devices elsewhere in the building, to limit special tool requirements.

J. Communications backboards shall be 3/4" A/B grade, Class A, flame spread,

painted with light gray fire retardant paint. Neatly mask off a minimum of one (1) plywood Manufacturer’s pre-printed certified fire rating stamp per section of board prior to application of paint. Remove masking after paint has cured.

1.9 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK

A. Reference the General Conditions for additional requirements. B. A qualified and experienced electrical superintendent shall be in charge of the

work in progress at all times. If, in the judgment of the Department, the electrical superintendent is not performing his duties satisfactorily, the Contractor shall immediately replace him upon receipt of a letter of request from the Department. Once a satisfactory electrical superintendent has been assigned to the work, he


shall not be withdrawn by the Contractor without the written consent of the Department.

C. Provide field superintendent who has had a minimum of four (4) years previous

successful experience on projects of comparable sizes and complexity. Superintendent shall be present at all times that work under this Division is being installed or affected. All work performed by a non-licensed Journeyman shall be under the direct supervision (in the presence of) of a Licensed Journeyman as specified herein. Increase the quantity of licensed Journeymen as required for supervision of all areas where direct contact is not possible. Project Superintendent and supervising Journeyman shall have passed a proctored H.H. Block Journeyman Exam with 75% grade or better and shall be a licensed Journeyman within the State of Florida. A resume of the Project superintendent's experience shall be submitted to the Department before starting work. At least one member of the electrical contracting firm shall hold a State Master Certificate of Competency. Each Journeyman shall have possession of licensing documentation at all times during work. Display to the Department when requested.

D. Superintendent shall be employed by a State Registered (Type "E.R." License) or

State certified (Type "E.C." License) electrical contractor. 1.10 COORDINATION

A. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work connects to or is affected by work of others, and comply with all requirements affecting this Division. Work required under other divisions, specifications or drawings to be performed by this Division shall be coordinated with the Contractor and such work performed at no additional cost to the Department including but not limited to electrical work required for:

1. Door hardware 2. Roll-up doors 3. Roll-up grilles 4. Signage 5. Fire shutters 6. Sliding doors 7. Mechanical Division of the Specifications 8. Landscape Architect drawings 9. Lifts 10. Kitchen equipment 11. Interior design drawings 12. Millwork design drawings and shop drawings


B. Installation studies shall be made to coordinate the electrical work with other trades. Work shall be preplanned. Unresolved conflicts shall be referred to the Department prior to installation of the equipment.

C. Coordination drawings shall be prepared prior to the start of work. Drawings

shall show the actual physical dimension required for the installation to assure proper integration of equipment with building systems and NEC required clearances. Location of conduit racking, etc., shall be provided. Coordination drawings shall be provided for all areas. Comply with the requirements of Division 1.

D. Secure approved shop drawings from all required disciplines and verify final

electrical characteristics before roughing power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data on approved shop drawings differs from that shown or called for in Construction Documents, make adjustments to the wiring, disconnects, and branch circuit protection to match that required for the equipment installed.

E. Damage from interference caused by inadequate coordination shall be corrected at

no additional cost to the Department. F. Coordinate the exact location of floor outlets, floor ducts, floor stub-ups, etc. with

the Department and Engineer (and receive their approval) prior to rough-in. Locations indicated in Contract Documents are only approximate locations.

G. The Contract Documents describe specific sizes of switches, breakers, fuses,

conduits, conductors, motor starters and other items of wiring equipment. These sizes are based on specific items of power consuming equipment (heaters, lights, motors for fans, compressors, pumps, etc.). Coordinate the requirements of each load with each load's respective circuitry shown and with each load's requirements as noted on its nameplate data and manufacturer's published electrical criteria. Adjust circuit breaker, fuse, conduit, and conductor sizes to meet the actual requirements of the equipment being provided and installed and change from single point to multiple points of connection (or vice versa) to meet equipment requirements. Changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Department.

1.11 PROVISION FOR OPENINGS

A. Locate openings required for work. Provide sleeves, guards or other approved methods to allow passage of items installed.

B. Coordinate with roofing Contractor on installation of electrical items which

penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations shall be installed so as to not void roof warranty.


C. Where work pierces waterproofing, it shall maintain the integrity of the waterproofing. Coordinate roofing materials which pierce roof for compatibility with membrane or other roof types with Contractor.

1.12 CONCRETE PADS

A. Furnish and install reinforced concrete housekeeping pads for transformers, switchgear, generators, motor control centers, and other free-standing equipment installed within the building. Unless otherwise noted, pads shall be four (4) inches high and shall exceed dimensions of equipment being set on them, including future sections, by six (6) inches each side, except when equipment if flush against a wall where the side against the wall shall be flush with the equipment. Pads shall be reinforced with W1.4 x 1.4 6 x 6 welded wire mesh. Chamfer top edges 1/2". Trowel all surfaces smooth. Provide 4000 psi concrete.

B. Refer to Civil plans for the requirements for concrete pads supporting

transformers, switchgear, generators, motor control centers, and other free-standing equipment installed outside the building. Coordinate pad installation, dimensions, conduit windows, or stub-ups with approved equipment shop drawings.

1.13 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, conduit, panels, etc. shall have finish or shall be painted as directed by designer. Paint shall be in accordance with applicable sections and/or divisions of these specifications.

1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Reference Division 1 - General Requirements.

1. Provide cutting and patching necessary for the installation of Division 16 work.

2. Provide cutting and patching necessary for the demolition of existing

electrical scheduled for removal. 3. Cutting of work in place shall be cut, drilled, patched and refinished to

match specified finish. 4. Backfill new grades to match adjacent undisturbed surface. 5. Schedule work to place Division 16 work to avoid as much cutting and

patching as practical.


1.15 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. All trenching, backfilling and compaction requirements shall be in accordance with other sections of these specifications.

B. Trench excavation in excess of 5 feet deep shall comply with OSHA Standard 29

C.F.R.s. 1926. 650 Subpart P. 1.16 DELIVERY, HANDLING, PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, AND STORAGE

A. Ship, deliver, and store products in the manufacturer’s protective packing to prevent damaging.

B. Handle equipment carefully to prevent damage to components, breakage and

denting or scoring of surfaces and finishes. C. Store all equipment and products in clean, dry spaces. Protect all equipment from

dirt, fumes, water, chemicals, construction debris and physical damage. Any equipment exposed directly to moisture will not be acceptable and shall be replaced.

D. Replace damaged products and equipment. Repair and repaint marred and

damaged finishes to original factory finish as directed by manufacturer and as herein specified.

E. Keep all conduit and other openings protected against entry of foreign matter.

1.17 INSTALLATION

A. Erect equipment to minimize interference and delays with the execution of the Work.

B. Take care in erection and installation of equipment and materials to avoid marring

finishes or surfaces. Any damage shall be repaired or replaced as determined by the Department at no additional cost to the Department.

C. Equipment requiring electrical service shall not be energized or placed in service

until the Department is notified and is present or have waived their right to be present. Where equipment to be placed in service involves service or connection from another Contractor, notify the Department in writing as appropriate when the equipment will be ready.

D. Equipment supports shall be secured and supported from structural members

unless written approval is granted by the Engineer.


E. Plywood material shall not be used as a backboard for mounting panel boards, disconnects, motor starters, and dry type transformers. Provide "cast in place" type inserts or install expansion type anchor bolts. Electrical equipment shall not be mounted directly to dry wall for support without additional channels as anchors. Channels shall be anchored to the floor and structure above. Panelboards and terminal cabinets shall be provided with structural framing located within drywall partitions.

F. Inserts, pipe sleeves, supports, and anchorage of electrical equipment shall be

provided. Where items are to be set or embedded in concrete or masonry, the items shall be furnished and layout made for setting or embedment thereof so as to cause no delay.

1.18 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Contract for construction shall be based upon products and standards established in the Contract Documents.

1. Product substitutions shall only be considered if:

a. Substituted product meets the design intent and quality of the

specified project. b. All requirements of Section 16013 are met and the substitution is

approved by the Engineer.

2. Approval of substitutions is at the Engineer’s sole discretion. If substitutions are rejected by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit specified products.

1.19 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS

A. As-Built Documents: As-built Documents include Drawings, Shop Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, and other modifications permitted by the General Conditions.

B. Comply with all requirements of Division 1. C. Verify aspects of redlined as-builts for accuracy. As-Built Documents shall show

all components including but not limited to:

1. All raceways 1-1/4" and above, cable tray systems, and grouped raceway racking as installed, including dimensions from fixed building lines such as column lines.


2. All site underground raceways and duct banks indicating burial depths and distances from fixed building lines or global tracking coordinates.

3. Underground pull boxes and manholes including elevations. Detail

manhole and pull boxes, conduit terminations (butterfly layout) including conduit sizes, designated systems and cabling description.

4. General conduit routing from receptacle to receptacle, fixture to fixture,

device to device. (Exact routing is not required for raceways 1” and smaller.)

5. Lighting. 6. The first junction box within each homerun, regardless of size shall be

shown in the installed location. 7. All junction boxes and pull boxes located above non-accessible ceilings

shall be shown in exact location. All junction boxes 6”X6” and larger shall be shown in exact location.

8. Any combining of circuits (which is only allowed by specific permission)

or change in homerun outlet box shall be indicated. 9. Any circuit number changes. 10. All conductors and cables, conductors and cable sizes, raceway sizes, etc

not shown on contract documents and any changes from the documents. 11. Any switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, relay panel, or

dimming control panel schedule changes, including load changes. 12. All access panels. 13. All existing conditions. 14. Location of lighting control devices such as photocell controls, space

occupancy sensors, etc. 15. Exact quantity of conductors and cables shall be shown for all raceway

systems. 16. All devices, wall outlet boxes, and control components. 17. All wireway and cable tray systems.


18. Exact location of all driven grounding electrodes including burial depths and dimensions from fixed building lines. Location of all grounding system busbars.

19. All building automation system (BAS) control panels and associated

electrical devices, connections, power supplies, and dampers. 20. Riser diagrams exactly as installed. 21. Switchboard, panelboards, motor control center, motor control devices,

terminal cabinets, equipment racks, relays, disconnects and switches and surge protection devices.

22. Change the equipment schedules (i.e. symbol legends, light fixture

schedule, etc) to agree with items actually furnished. 23. Change plan notes to agree with items actually furnished, actual

installation methods, etc. respectfully. 24. Cross-out all items, circuitry, devices, etc. not applicable.

D. As-Built red line information shall not compromise the clarity of the Contract

Documents and Shop Drawings. Major components such as grouped raceway assemblies, cable tray systems, larger conduits, duct banks, racking, elevations, dimensions, etc. shall be shown on a clean architectural base plan(s) separate from the Contract Electrical Documents, as required to clearly delineate work. Obtain electronic base plan file from the Department.

1.20 SYSTEMS WARRANTY

A. Reference the General Conditions. B. Warranty shall be by the Contractor to the Department and shall cover for a period

of one year from the date of the Substantial Completion. Warranty shall not include light bulbs in service after one month from date of substantial completion of the System.

1. Explain the provisions of warranty to the Department at the

"Demonstration of Completed System" meeting to be scheduled with the Department upon project completion.

C. Where items of equipment or materials carry a manufacturer's warranty for any

period in excess of twelve (12) months, then the manufacturer's warranty shall apply for that particular piece of equipment or material.


D. Where extended Guarantees are called for herein, furnish three copies to be inserted in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

E. All preventative maintenance and normal service will be performed by the

Department’s maintenance personnel after final acceptance of the work which shall not alter the Contractor's warranty.

1.21 WASTE MATERIALS DISPOSAL

A. Include in base bid the transport and disposal or recycling of all waste materials generated by this project in accordance with all rules, regulations and guidelines applicable. Comply fully with Florida Statute 403.7186 regarding mercury containing devices and lamps. Lamps, ballasts and other materials shall be transported and disposed of in accordance with all DEP and EPA guidelines applicable at time of disposal. Provide the Department with written certification of approved disposal.

1.22 PROHIBITION OF ASBESTOS AND PCB

A. Prior to the Final Review field visit the Contractor shall certify in writing that the equipment and materials installed in this Project under this Division 16 contain no asbestos or PCB. Additionally, all manufacturers shall provide a statement with their submittal that indicates that their product contains no asbestos or PCB. This statement shall be signed by a duly authorized agent of the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16010

SUBMITTALS 16012-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16012 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements for submittals specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1 General Requirements and any supplemental requirements/conditions.

B. See Section 16013 - Substitutions for additional requirements when submittals

consist of substitution equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTAL OF “SUBSTITUTE” EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT

A. Representation: In submitting item, equipment, product, etc. that has not been listed on contract drawings, in contract documents or in an addenda, Contractor represents that he:

1. Has investigated substitution item and determined that it is equal or

superior to specified product in all aspects.

2. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making changes as may be required to complete work in all aspects.

3. Waives all Claims for additional costs related to substitution which may

subsequently become apparent.

4. Will provide the same warranties for the substitution as for the product specified.

5. Will absorb all costs incurred by the substitution when affecting other

trades including but not limited to electrical, mechanical, structural, architectural, civil, etc.

6. Will absorb any cost incurred by the Engineer in review of the substituted

product if the acceptance of the substituted item creates the need for system modification and/or redesign, or if the substituting contractor exhibits negligence in his substituting procedure thus submitting inferior, misapplied or mis-sized equipment. In the event of additional engineering costs the billing structure shall be agreed upon prior to review by all involved parties.

SUBMITTALS 16012-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1.3 SUBMITTAL TO INCLUDE

A. Submittal product data shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete non-pertinent data. Markings shall be made with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable).

B. Shop Drawings: Drawings to include identification of project and names of

Architect, Engineer, General Contractor, subcontractor and supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate the following:

1. Fabrication and erection dimensions.

2. Arrangements and sectional views.

3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections

with other work.

4. Kinds of materials and finishes.

5. Descriptive names of equipment.

6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the work.

7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2 1/2 inches, near title block (for A/E’s stamp imprint).

8. In order to facilitate review of drawings, they shall be clearly noted,

indicating by cross reference the contract drawings, note, and specification paragraph numbers where items occur in the Contract Documents.

9. Conduit/raceway rough-in drawings.

10. Items requiring shop drawings include (but not limited to):

a. Each section of 16700 b. Special and/or modified equipment. c. U.L. listed fire and smoke stopping assemblies for each applicable

penetration.

11. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.

C. Product Data: Technical product data is required for all items as called for in the specifications regardless if item furnished is as specified.

SUBMITTALS 16012-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1. Submit technical data verifying that the item submitted complies with the requirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include manufacturer’s name and model number, dimensions, weights, electrical characteristics, and clearances required. Indicate all optional equipment and changes from the standard item as called for in the specifications. Furnish drawings, or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, covering equipment, showing arrangement of components and overall coordination.

2. In order to facilitate review of product data, they shall be clearly noted,

indicating by cross reference the contract drawings, note, and/or specification paragraph numbers where and/or what item(s) are used for and where item(s) occur in the contract documents. Identify product data as to the item and/or location (i.e. “surge suppression switchboard MDPI”).

3. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.

4. Submit any and all technical data rejected by A/E regardless if not

specifically noted herein. 1.4 PROCESSING SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements of the Contract and this section of the Specifications, which ever is the most strict.

B. Submittals are to be submitted no later than 60 days after award of contract or 60 days prior to request for substantial completion whichever is earlier.

C. The General Contractor shall review the brochures before submitting to the A/E.

D. Note that the review of shop drawings or other information submitted in

accordance with the requirements herinbefore specified, does not assure that the Engineer, Architect, or any other Owner’s Representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved, the ability of the material or equipment involved or the Mechanical/Electrical performance of equipment. Review of shop drawings and technical product date does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict; unless a letter requesting such change is submitted and approved on the Engineer’s letterhead.

1.5 DELAYS

A. Contractor is responsible for delays in job project accruing directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of shop drawings, or product data.

SUBMITTALS 16012-4 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1.6 RESUBMITTALS

A. The A/E shall be reimbursed cost to review resubmittals subsequent to the second submittal. Cost will be billed to contractor at engineer’s standard hourly rate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza.

SUBMITTALS 16012-5 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

PROJECT ADDRESSES OWNER: PHONES: FAXES: ARCHITECT: CONSULTING ENGINEER: Sims Wilkerson Cartier Engineering, Inc. 12124 High Tech Avenue, Suite 200 Orlando FL 32817 Telephone No.: (407) 380-0400 FAX No.: (407) 380-5900 GENERAL CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: (Provide list of all subcontractors)

SUBMITTALS 16012-6 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

PROJECT INFORMATION NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: Fill in the blanks below and insert one copy as page number 3 in each Submittal Brochure. Project Name:

Contractor’s Job Superintendent:

Job Phone No.:

Job Fax No.:

Subcontractor’s Job Superintendent:

Job Phone No.:

Job Fax No.:

Date Project Bids:

Official Project Starting Date:

Date Technical Information Brochures Submitted:

Target Completion:

The following items shall be completed before date of Contractor’s Request for substantial

completion:

Date of Performance Verification Information Submitted:

Date check-out Memos Submitted:

Date Written Operating Instructions Submitted:

Date Maintenance Information Submitted:

Date Marked-Up Progress Prints Submitted:

Date As-Built Corrections Submitted:

Date Contractor’s Instruction Conference with Owner:

Date Contractor’s Request for Acceptance:

Date Project Accepted:

SUBMITTALS 16012-7 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

“EXAMPLE”

(PROJECT NAME)

FPID # 416537-1-52-01

COUNTY: MIAMI-DADE

FLORIDA

(SWC #08021)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SUBMITTAL BROCHURES END OF SECTION 16012

SUBSTITUTIONS 16013-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16013 - SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies general, administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions for Division 16 sections above and beyond the requirements of Division 1 General Requirements and any Supplemental requirements/conditions.

B. Request for substitutions must be submitted within 30 days of the award of the

contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this article are not intended to change of modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Products, materials, equipment, finishes, and methods of

construction are considered substitutions if they meet any one of the following conditions:

1. Does not meet all the requirements of these specifications under Part 1 -

General or Part 2 - Products for any section included in Division 16 - Electrical Specifications.

2. Is not the specified manufacturer and/or model which accomplishes the

same result as that design specified in Division 16 - Electrical Specifications.

3. Is of similar or different design that:

a. Requires more space. b. Requires more power. c. Requires changes in other elements of the work such as (but not

limited to) architectural, mechanical, structural, or other electrical work.

d. Affects the Construction schedule.

4. Is listed in these specifications on the Contract Documents or in any addenda as an approved substitution.


1.3 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTALS

A. A separate requests for substitutions shall be submitted for each product, material, etc. that is defined as a substitution.

B. Submittal must consist of written request for substitution with date as required

below. Request must be very specific as to what specified item, request for substitution is submitted for.

C. Each request for substitution submittal for each product, etc. shall include:

1. Name of material or equipment for which it is to be substituted.

2. Drawings, product data, performance data and/or other information

necessary for the engineer to determine that the equipment meets all specifications and requirements.

3. Compliance statement. Each request shall include the following

compliance statement typed on letterhead of submitting company:

a. Submittal complies with all aspects/requirements of contract documents: (Y/N) If no, state deviances:

b. Submittal complies with all applicable codes: (Y/N) If no, state deviances:

c. Submittal does not require change to any other element of the work: (Y/N) If no, state required change:

d. Meets or exceeds the performance of specified product: (Y/N) If no, state required change:

1.4 CONSIDERATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Request for substitutions will not be considered if:

1. Submittal does not comply with all requirements as noted above or contain all information required above.

2. If submittal does not contain compliance statement, fully filled out.

3. If compliance statement contains a ‘no’ or ‘N’.

4. Submittals are submitted beyond time limitations noted above.

B. Samples

1. Sample may be required to be submitted, if deemed necessary by the A/E

to determine if the substitution meets specifications.


2. The A/E reserves the right to reject sample and consequently the

substitution should the sample not meet the requirement of the contract documents.

C. Substitutions will be considered on basis of design, concept of work, and overall

conformance with information given in Contract Documents, including but not limited to:

1. Design criteria, which shall be equal or superior to the specified item.

2. Finishes, which shall be identical or superior to finishes of specified

product.

3. Lenses or louvers, which shall be identical size, thickness and type material specified.

4. Physical size and dimension which are identical or within design criteria

limitations as determined by the Engineer.

5. Photometric data, which shall be identical or superior in quantity and quality.

6. Trim detail, electrical, and mechanical qualities, shall be identical or

within design criteria limitations as determined by the Engineer.

D. The Engineer’s decision on acceptance or rejection of substitutions will be final.

E. Approval of a substituted item or listing a substituted item as an approved substitution does not modify or act as a waiver in any way, of the requirements of the contract documents. See Section 16012 for additional requirements on approved substitution submittals, equipment, etc.

F. The naming of any manufacturer as an approved substitution does not imply

automatic approval as a substitution. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for systems that meet or exceed these specifications.


REFERENCE STANDARDS 16014-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16014

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Reference Standards and Regulatory Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 sections.

B. The requirements stated herein are in addition to Division 1 - General

Requirements and any supplemental requirements/conditions. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. The following references may or may not be referenced within these specifications:

1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

2. AHERA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act

3. AIA American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20006

4. ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018

5. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

6. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329

7. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017

8. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103


9. BICSI BICSI Executive Offices

University of South Florida Tampa, Fl 33620-8700

10. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195

11. DCA-ARM Department of Community Affairs-Accessibility Requirements Manual

12. DOCA or DCA State of Florida Department of Community Affairs 2740 Center View Drive Tallahassee, Florida 32399-2100

13. EIA/TIA Electronics Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20006

14. EJCDC Engineers’ Joint Contract Documents Committee American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street, NW Washington, DC 20005

15. FBC Florida Building Code

16. FBCFG Florida Building Code – Fuel Gas 17. FBCM Florida Building Code – Mechanical 18. FBCP Florida Building Code – Plumbing 19. FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency.

20. FLA.

DMA/DOC State of Florida Department of Management Services Division of Communications 2737 Centerview Drive Knight Building, Suite 110 Tallahassee, Fl 32399-0950

21. FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062

22. FPC Fire Protection Code

23. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street


New York, NY 10017

24. IES Illumination Engineering Society

25. ICPEA International Power Cable Engineer’s Association

26. LPCR Local Power Company Requirements

27. LTCR Local Telephone Company Requirements

28. NECPA National Energy Conservation Policy Act

29. NESC National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C2)

30. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association 2101 ‘L’ Street, NW Washington, DC 20037

31. NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269

32. OSHA The Occupational Safety and Health Act

33. SFM E State Fire Marshal’s Rule on Elevators

34. SFM FAS State Fire Marshal’s Rule on Fire Alarm Systems

35. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180

36. UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062

37. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

38. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

39. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

40. NFPA 31 Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment

41. NFPA 33 Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials


42. NFPA 69 Standard for Explosion Prevention Systems

43. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

44. NFPA 72 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Local Protective Signaling Systems

45. NFPA 75 Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment

46. NFPA 82 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows

47. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

48. NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

49. NFPA 91 Standard for the Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials

50. NFPA 92A Standard for Smoke Control Systems

51. NFPA 96 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment

52. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

53. NFPA 105 Standard for Smoke Control Door Assemblies

54. NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

55. NFPA 780 Standard for Lightning Protection 56. ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a

Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees Fahrenheit


A. Conform to all the applicable requirements of the following codes, standards, guidelines, etc. If there should be conflicting requirements between these codes, standards, guidelines, etc., the more or most stringent requirement shall apply that does not violate any codes or laws. All work shall meet these requirements.

1. Standards and Miscellaneous Codes/Requirements: Comply with latest

edition or notice available unless otherwise adopted by Authority having


Jurisdiction of the following standards, codes and Regulatory Requirements:

a. ADA b. ANSI c. ASHRAE d. ASME e. ASTM f. CRSI g. DCA h. EIA/TIA i. FBC j. FBCFG k. FBCM l. FBCP m. FFPC n. IEEE o. IES p. LPCR q. LTCR r. NEC s. NECPA t. NESC u. NEMA v. NFPA Codes and Standards as listed in section 1.2 above w. OSHA x. SMACNA y. UL z. Applicable Florida Statutes and Referenced Codes/Standards. aa. All Federal, State, Local Codes, Laws and Ordinances as applicable.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16014

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 16015-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16015 - ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Symbols and abbreviations specifically applicable to all Division 16 sections in addition to those in Division 1 - General Requirements and any supplemental requirements/conditions.

1.2 SYMBOLS

A. In general the symbols used on the drawings conform to the Standard Symbols of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers with the exception of special systems or agencies as hereinafter noted.

1. Corps of Engineers

2. Special Symbols as shown in schedules or legends.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following abbreviations or initials are used.

1. A/C Air Conditioning

2. AFD Adjustable Frequency Drive

3. A.C. Alternating Current

4. ACSR Access Control Security Rack

5. A/E Architect/Engineer (or Engineer when Architect not applicable)

6. AFF Above Finished Floor

7. AFG Above Finished Grade

8. AHU Air Handler Unit

9. AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity

10. AL Aluminum


11. AMP Ampere

12. ANSI American National Standards Institute

13. AWG American Wire Gauge

14. @ At

15. B.C. Bare Copper

16. BLDG Building

17. BRKR Breaker

18. BTU British Thermal Unit

19. BTUH BTU Per Hour

20. C. Conduit

21. C.B. Circuit Breaker

22. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers

23. CFM Cubic Feet per Minute

24. CKT. Circuit

25. C/L Center Line

26. Clg. Ceiling

27. Comp. Compressor

28. Conn. Connection

29. Cond. Condenser

30. Cont. Continuous

31. C.R.I. Color Rendering Index

32. C.T. Current Transformer

33. C.T.B. Computer Terminal Board


34. CU. Copper

35. C.U. Compressor Condenser Unit

36. C.W. Cold Water

37. D.B. Direct Burial

38. D.C. Direct Current

39. D.C.P. Design Criteria Package

40. Disc. Disconnect

41. DN. Down

42. DPST Double Pole Single Throw

43. E.C. Electrical Contractor (or General Contractor)

44. ELEV. Elevator

45. EMT Electric Metallic Tubing

46. Equip. Equipment

47. EST Estimate

48. FAAP Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel

49. FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel

50. FATC Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet

51. FCCP Fire Alarm Command Center Panel

52. FHC Fire Hose Cabinet

53. FLA Full Load Amperes

54. FT. Feet

55. FLR Floor


56. F.C. Footcandles

57. FVNR Full Voltage Non-Reversing

58. GAL. Gallon

59. GEC General Electrical Contractor

60. Galv. Galvanized

61. GPH Gallons per Hour

62. GPM Gallons per Minute

63. GFI Ground Fault Interrupting

64. GRS Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

65. GND, GRD Ground

66. HTG Heaters

67. HT Height

68. HZ Hertz (Cycles)

69. HPF High Power Factor

70. HPS High Pressure Sodium

71. HP. Horsepower

72. HR. Hour

73. H.S. Heat Strip

74. IMC Intermediate Metallic Conduit

75. I.T.S. Information traffic System

76. Incand. Incandescent

77. in. Inches

78. J.B. Junction Box


79. KVA KiloVolt Ampere

80. KW Kilowatts

81. KWH Kilowatt Hour

82. K Kelvin

83. L.L.D. Lamp Lumen Depreciation

84. LED Light Emitting Diode

85. LT. Light

86. LTG. Lighting

87. LTS. Lights

88. L.P.F. Low Power Factor

89. M.C.B. Main Circuit Breaker

90. M.D.P Main Distribution Panelboard

91. M.L.O. Main Lugs Only

92. Maint. Maintenance

93. MH. Manhole; Metal Halide

94. MFG. Manufacturer

95. max. Maximum

96. MCM Thousand Circular Mils

97. MPH Miles Per Hour

98. MM Millimeter

99. Min. Minute

100. MCP Motor Circuit Protector


101. MTD Mounted

102. N. Neutral

103. NEC National Electric Code

104. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

105. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

106. N.P.T. National Pipe Thread

107. NF Non Fused

108. N.C. Normally Closed

109. N.O. Normally Open

110. NIC. Not in Contract

111. No. Number

112. O.A.R. Owner’s Authorized Representative (including A/E)

113. OD Outside Diameter

114. O.L. Overload

115. OLS Overloads

116. OS&Y Outside Screw and Yoke (Sprinkler)

117. % Percent

118. ∅ Phase

119. P. Pole

120. PL Compact Fluorescent Lamp

121. P.T. Potential Transformer

122. PSF Pounds per Square Foot

123. PSI Pounds per Square Inch


124. PB Pullbox

125. PNL Panel

126. PR Pair

127. Pri. Primary

128. PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

129. Recept. Receptacle

130. RPM Revolutions per Minute

131. R.S. Rapid Start

132. SCA Short Circuit Amps

133. Sec. Secondary

134. S/N Solid Neutral

135. SPST Single Pole Single Throw

136. SF Square Foot

137. SW. Switch

138. SWBD Switchboard

139. Sys. System

140. TEC Toll Equipment Contractor

141. THHN; THWN Nylon Jacketed Wire

142. TTB Telephone Terminal Board

143. TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet

144. TV Television

145. TVTC Television Terminal Cabinet


146. TVEC Television Equip. Cabinet

147. TYP Typical

148. Temp. Temperature

149. U.L. Underwriters’ Laboratories

150. UPS Uninteruptible Power Supply

151. VFD Variable Frequency Drive

152. VSD Variable Speed Drive

153. VHF Very High Frequency

154. VHO Very High Output

155. V Volt

156. VA Volt Amperes

157. Vol Volume

158. W Wire

159. W.P. Weatherproof

160. XFMR Transformer

161. Y Wye

162. Yd. Yard

163. Yr. Year

164. 3R Rainproof

165. 4X Stainless Steel Dustight, Watertight PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)

TEST AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 16090-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16090 - TEST AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. This section pertains to the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to test and prove performance of the electrical system.

B. Operate system for a 3-day period. Do performance verification work as required

to show that the system is operating correctly in accordance with design. Supply instruments required to read data. Adjust system to operate at the required performance levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTS

A. System:

1. General: After installation of all conductors, and before final acceptance, make required tests to determine proper functioning of all circuits. Furnish all necessary instruments required to make tests, and correct any deficiencies found. Prior to energizing, circuits shall be “ringed-out” to verify opens, intentional and non-intentional grounds, continuity and detect short circuits by approved constant “megger”.

2. Procedure:

a. Insulation resistance of all feeder conductors and all conductors

AWG #1 and larger shall be tested. This is to include all new conductors and/or all existing conductors that are connected and/or extended. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps, and connections are made except connection to source and point of final termination at distribution or utilization equipment.

b. Insulation resistance of conductors that are to operate at 600 volts

or less shall be tested by using AVO biddle (or approved equal) Megger at not less than 1000 volts dc. Resistance shall be measured from conductor to conduit (ground). Testing methodology shall conform to short-time or spot-reading


procedural recommendations of AVO Biddle Instruments for specific megger being used. Acceptable insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall not be less than on (1) megohm.

c. Conductors that do not satisfy test requirements (b.) above shall be

removed, replaced, and testing repeated on new cable, at no additional costs to the Department. All tests shall be performed by licensed electrician trained in the use of test instruments. Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed and complete “Conductor Insulation Resistance Test” form (found at the end of section 16098) and submit five (5) copies to Engineer for approval. Test shall be witnessed by Department’s representative and engineer (if so desired). Final approval data is to be submitted in O & M Manual.

d. Test reports shall identify each feeder conductor tested, date, time,

and result of test, weather conditions, and range, test voltage, and serial number of the megger instrument used. Any conductor or splice that is found defective shall be promptly removed and replaced, and additional test shall be performed.

e. Observe all safety instruction set by testing equipment

manufacturer. Application of voltage testing involves risk of electric shock and sparking.

3. Take readings of voltage and amperage at building main disconnect switch

and at main for each panel, at primary and secondary side of each transformer and at the end of the longest branch circuit at each panel. The above readings shall be taken (1) “no load” conditions and (2) “full load” conditions with all equipment using electricity. Tabulate readings, complete “TABULATED DATA VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE READINGS” form (found at the end of Section 16098) and submit five (5) copies to the engineer for approval. Final approved data is to be submitted in O & M manual.

B. Motors:

1. Test run each motor via motor’s control unit in both manual mode and

automatic mode. Verify proper operation and voltage.

2. Test run each motor furnished under this division of the specifications and all existing motors specifically noted on the drawings and/or specifications to be tested:


a. With the system energized, line-to-line voltage and line current measurements shall be made at the motors under full load conditions. Should measured values deviate 10% from the nameplate ratings, the condition shall be corrected. Notify the engineer immediately should deviations occur.

b. Record results of existing motors tested and submit values to A/E

in writing.

c. Test the insulation resistance’s of all motor windings to ground with a “megger” before applying line voltage to the motors. If these values are less than one megohm the contractor furnishing the motor shall be responsible for correcting the error.

d. Determine power factor of motor(s) at full load.

e. Tabulate readings, complete “Motor Test Information” form

(found at the end of Section 16098) and submit five (5) copies to the engineer for approval. Final approved data is to be submitted in O & M manual.

C. Grounds:

1. Test each raceway for raceway continuity as called for in Section 16170,

“GROUNDING AND BONDING”.

2. Test each grounding system used in the project as called for in Section 16170 “GROUNDING AND BONDING”.

3. Submit “GROUND TEST INFORMATION” form (see form at the end of

section 16098) for each and every grounding system in the project including but not limited to: each ground rod installation; each water pipe and ground installation (test water pipe to ground and test water pipe to building service equipment); and each building steel ground connection (test building steel to ground and test building steel to building service equipment).

4. Grounding resistance shall be as called for in Section 16170,

“GROUNDING AND BONDING”.

5. Testing shall be three (3) point method in accordance with IEEE recommended practice.

D. Communications, etc.:


1. See specific sections of these specifications for further requirements.

3.2 DATA PROCESSING

A. Testing Data:

1. Tabulate data for submission.

2. Submit data on 8 1/2” x 11” sheets with date and name of checker with one copy for each operation and maintenance manual.

3. Where specific performance verification information is called for in the

specifications, use copies of the sheets provided for recording readings.

4. Data shall be submitted and approved before check-out memos are signed or a request for final inspection is made.

B. Equipment Check-Out:

1. At completion of construction after all performance verification and

testing information has been gathered, submitted, and approved, provide one copy of this information to the authorized manufacturer’s representative of the equipment.

a. Manufacturer’s authorized representative must be trained by the

manufacturer and authorized to inspect, adjust, test, and repair equipment.

2. Work required under this section shall include having the representative

examine the performance verification information, check the equipment in the field while it is operating, and sign a check-out memo for a record.

a. Check out of equipment is to include examining performance of

equipment and certifying equipment has been installed per manufacturer’s recommendations that all necessary adjustments have been performed and that equipment is operating properly.

3. Submit one (1) copy (for each operation and maintenance manual) of the

memo on each major item of equipment. Approved memos shall be inserted in each O & M manual with the performance verification information and submittal data. Memos shall be submitted and approved before instruction to owner or a request for final inspection.

4. Items requiring check-out memos are all major items of equipment such as

(but not limited to):


a. Panels, distribution panels, switchboards b. Transformers c. UPS equipment d. Generators e. Lighting control systems f. Feeders g. Motors h. Equipment/system installed per Sections 16700 through 16799. i. Any other equipment noted to be checked-out by engineer during

construction.

5. Do not submit Check-out Memo form at the time Submittal Brochures are submitted. This form shall be completed and submitted before instruction in operation to Owner or a request for final inspection.


DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16095-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16095 - DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate to the Department the essential features of the following electrical systems (if applicable):

1. Communications Systems

a. Each and every system included in Sections 16700 through 16799.

2. Electrical Entrance Equipment

a. Circuit breakers b. Fuses and fuseholders c. Meters (where applicable)

3. Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment

a. Kitchen exhaust hood shut down b. Electrical systems controls and equipment c. Electrical power equipment d. Motor control centers e. Motor control devices f. Relays g. Special transformers h. Starting devices i. Surge suppression equipment

4. Lighting Fixtures (include relamping and replacing lenses)

a. Exit and safety fixtures b. Fixtures, indoor and outdoor c. Lighting control system

5. Lightning Protection System

6. Distribution Equipment

a. Lighting & Appliance Panelboards b. Distribution panels c. Switchboard d. Voltage stabilizers


7. Standby Electrical Equipment

a. Batteries b. Battery chargers c. Controls and alarms d. Emergency generators, transfer switches e. UPS systems

8. Wiring Devices

a. Low-voltage controls b. Switches: regular, time

B. Each system shall be demonstrated once only, after completion of testing.

1.2 TIME

A. The demonstration shall be held upon completion of all systems at a date to be agreed upon in writing by the Department or his representative.

1.3 ATTENDING PARTIES

A. The demonstration shall be held by this Contractor in the presence of the Department, and the manufacturer’s representative.

1.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate the function and location (in the structure) of each system, and indicate its relationship to the riser diagrams and drawings.

B. Demonstrate by “start-stop operation” how to work the controls, how to reset

protective devices, how to replace fuses, and what to do in case of emergency.

C. Certificate of Completed Demonstration.

1. Submit one (1) copy (for each O & M manual) of Certificate of Completed Demonstration Memo Form (found at the end of Section 16098) signed by the contractor, subcontractor and Department for each type of equipment and system. Insert one copy in each O & M manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 16098-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16098 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O & M Manuals) specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements and any supplemental requirements/conditions.

1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. O & M Manuals shall consist of a minimum of one (1) hard cover, view type, 3-ring binders sized to hold 8 1/2” x 11” sheets for power, lighting, and systems (Sections 16700 through 16799) (black).

1. Each binder is to be adequately sized to comfortably hold required

submittals. Minimum spline size to be 1”, maximum spline size to be 3” (provide additional binders if 3” size is not sufficient to properly hold submittals.

2. Binder covers to have outer clear vinyl pocket on front cover (to hold 8

1/2 x 11” sheet) and on spline (to hold spline width x 11” sheet). Provide correct designation of project in each pocket, see “examples” included at the end of this section. Description sheet is to be white with black letters, minimum of 11” high and full width of pocket. Description is to describe project and match project drawing/spec description. Description to include submittal type, i.e. “Electrical” for power and lighting O & M Manuals or “Systems” for Section 16700 - 16799 O & M Manuals.

3. Binders shall be labeled to describe type, i.e. “Electrical” for power and

lighting of the O & M Manuals or “Systems” for Sections 16700-16799 of the O & M Manuals.

B. O & M Data:

1. Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data is required for all items as

called for in the specifications. O & M’s shall include manufacturer’s name, model number(s), characteristics, manufacturer’s agent, service agent, supplier, where and/or what item(s) are used for and description (i.e. surge suppression - switchboard MDPA).

2. Include troubleshooting instructions, list of special tools required, theory

of operation, manufacturer’s care and cleaning, preventative maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams, and point-to-point schematics.


C. O & M Manuals to include:

1. Completed forms and information per Division 1, general requirements, and this section of the specifications.

2. Shall include table of contents, project address, and project information

list form (found under Division 1, general requirements of the specifications.

3. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate

specification reference number and typed index for each section in the Systems Schedule.

4. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be a copy of the final and approved

shop drawing submitted as required in Section 16012 “Submittals”. These shall be inserted in binder in proper order.

5. Product Data: Product data and/or Catalog sheets shall be a copy of the

final and approved submittal submitted as required in Section 16012 “Submittals”. These shall be inserted in binder in proper order.

6. Warranty/Guarantee: Provide copy of warranty/guarantee in respective

location in O & M manual binder (power/lighting and systems). Original warranty/guarantee is to be incorporated into separate project warranty book with warranty/guarantees provided for other sections and divisions of the specifications and submitted for Architectural/Owner approval.

7. Copies of electrical panel schedules and electrical panel directories

included with the corresponding specification section.

8. Wiring diagrams, schematic, etc. inserted in proper order, for:

a. Time clocks b. Control devices, motor controls c. Transformers d. Panelboards and Switchboards e. Each and every part of the systems sections of these specifications,

16700 through 16799

9. For Sections 16100 through 16199:

a. Product data and/or catalog sheets on all equipment applicable to this project.

b. Equipment supplier list for each section’s equipment.


c. Floor boxes; in addition to above, provide:

(1) Installation/removal instructions (2) Parts list

d. Ground fault wiring devices; in addition to above, provide:

(1) Wiring diagram

e. Grounding; in addition to above, provide:

(1) Test results on each ground rod (2) Submit Ground Test Form (Section 16098)

10. Sections 16400 through 16499:

a. Product data and/or catalog sheets on equipment applicable to this

project.


c. Transformers; in addition to above provide:

(1) Recommended periodic testing procedures. (2) Parts list (3) Any special manufacture suggested O & M information (4) Installation/removal instructions (5) Check-out memo

d. Panels, distribution panelboards, switchboards; in addition to

above provide:

(1) Internal wiring diagrams (2) Bus diagrams (3) Operation and maintenance requirements, instructions, and

recommended testing (4) Parts list (5) Copy of directory (6) Voltage and amperage readings (7) Check-out memo

e. Overcurrent protective devices; in addition to above provide the

following for large circuit breakers:

(1) Parts list (2) Operation and maintenance requirements


(3) Wiring diagrams (4) Testing data (5) Installation/removal instructions (6) Check-out memo

11. Section 16500:

a. Product data and/or catalog sheets on all equipment applicable to

this project.

b. Equipment supplier list for each sections equipment.

c. Lighting fixtures; in addition to above, provide the following:

(1) Operation and maintenance requirements/instructions for special light fixtures (these fixtures to be determined by A/E) including:

(a) Installation/removal instructions (b) Special relamping instructions

(2) Parts list

12. Section 16600:

a. Product data and/or catalog sheets on all equipment applicable to

this project.


13. Sections 16700 through 16799:

a. Installer’s name, address, phone, etc. for each system.

b. Authorized representative’s name, address, phone, etc. for each system.

c. Equipment supplier’s name, address, phone, etc. for each system.

d. Surge Suppression

(1) Product data and/or catalog sheets on equipment applicable

to this project (2) Parts list (3) Recommended testing and replacement procedures


e. Fire Alarm

(1) Product data and/or catalog sheets on equipment applicable to this project.

(2) Parts list (3) Installation/removal instructions (4) Wiring diagrams of panels\ (5) Point-to-Point wiring diagrams of system (6) Operation and maintenance requirements (7) Shop drawing as submitted and approved in submittal

process (8) Check-out memos

f. Telephone, Computer Systems:

(1) Product data and/or catalog sheets on equipment applicable

to this project (2) Parts list (3) Wiring diagrams of panels (4) Shop drawing as submitted and approved in submittal

process

14. Any specifically requested equipment check-out memos. (see form at the end of this section).

15. Project Addresses (see form at the end of this section).

16. Required Check-out memo (see form at the end of this section).

17. Progress and Record Drawing Certification (see form at end of this

section).

18. Tabulated Data-Voltage and Amperage Readings (see form at end of this section).

19. Conductor insulation resistance test memo (see form at end of this

section).

20. Motor Test Information (see form at end of this section).

21. Ground Test Information (see form at end of this section).

22. Spare Parts Certification Memo (see form at end of this section).

23. Certificate of Completed Demonstration Memo (see form at end of this section).


1.3 PROCESSING SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the general requirements of the contract, Division 1, and this section of the specifications, whichever is not strict.

B. The General Contractor shall review the manuals before submitting to the A/E.

No request for payment will be considered until the brochure has been reviewed and submitted for approval.

1.4 DELAYS

A. Contractor is responsible for delays in job project accruing directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of shop drawings, or product data.

1.5 RESUBMITTALS

A. The A/E shall be reimbursed cost to review re-submittals subsequent to the second submittal.



PROJECT ADDRESSES OWNER: PHONES: ARCHITECT: CONSULTING ENGINEER: Sims Wilkerson Cartier Engineering, Inc.

12124 High Tech Avenue, Suite 200 Orlando FL 32817 Telephone No.: (407) 380-0400 Fax No.: (407) 380-5900

GENERAL CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR:


PROJECT ADDRESSES PROJECT INFORMATION NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: Fill in the blanks below and insert one copy as page number 3 in each Submittal Brochure. Project Name: Contractor’s Job Superintendent: Job Phone No.: Subcontractor’s Job Superintendent: Job Phone No.: Date Project Bids: Official Project Starting Date: Date Technical Information Brochures Submitted: Days Allowed for Construction: Target Completion: The following items shall be completed before date of Contractor’s Request for substantial completion: Date of Performance Verification Information Submitted: Date check-out Memos Submitted: Date Written Operating Instructions Submitted: Date Maintenance Information Submitted: Date Marked-Up Progress Prints Submitted: Date As-Built Corrections Submitted: Date Contractor’s Instruction Conference with Owner: Date Contractor’s Request for Acceptance: Date Project Accepted:


“EXAMPLE” (PROJECT NAME) FDIP # 416537-1-52-01 COUNTY: MIAMI-DADE FLORIDA SWC #08021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


TABULATED DATE VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE READINGS PROJECT NAME: SWITCHGEAR/PANELBOARD FULL LOAD AMPERAGE READINGS: DATE TIME PHASE A. B. C. N. GROUND FULL LOAD VOLTAGE READINGS: DATE TIME PHASE A TO N A TO B B TO N A TO C C TO N B TO C VOLTAGE AT THE END OF THE LONGEST BRANCH TYPE OF LOAD NO LOAD VOLTAGE READINGS: DATE TIME PHASE A TO N A TO B B TO N A TO C C TO N B TO C ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIVE DATE


MOTOR TEST INFORMATION Project Name: Description of Motor: Name of Checker: Date Checked: (a) Name and identifying mark of motor (Indicate at existing) (b) Manufacturer (c) Model Number (d) Serial Number (e) RPM (f) Frame Size (g) Code Letter (h) Horsepower (i) Nameplate Voltage and Phase (j) Nameplate Amps (k) Actual Voltage (l) Actual Amps (m) Starter Manufacturer (n) Starter Size (o) Heater Size, Catalog No. and Amp Rating (p) Manufacturer of dual-element fuse (q) Amp rating of fuse (r) Power Factor CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE: SIGNATURE OF CHECKER: DATE: OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE:


CHECK-OUT MEMO This form shall be completed and a copy provided to the Owner at the Owner’s Performance Verification and Demonstration meeting. A copy shall also be included in the specification section of each O & M Manual for the equipment checked. Project Name: Type of equipment checked: Equipment Number: Name of manufacturer of equipment: Signature below by the manufacturer’s authorized representative signifies that the equipment has been satisfactorily tested and checked out on the job by the manufacturer. 1. The attached Test and Data and Performance Verification information was used to evaluate

the equipment installation and operation. 2. The equipment is properly installed, has been tested by the manufacturer’s authorized

representative, and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with all requirements, except for items noted below.*

3. Written operating and maintenance information has been presented to the Contractor, and

gone over with him in detail. 4. Sufficient copies of all applicable operating and maintenance information, parts lists,

lubrication checklists, and warranties have been furnished to the Contractor for insertion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

Checked by: (Print or Type Name of Manufacturer’s Representative) (Address and Phone No. of Representative) (Signature and Title of Representative) (Date Checked) Witnessed by: (Signature and Title of Contractor Rep.) *Exceptions noted at time of check-out (use additional page if necessary)


PROGRESS AND RECORD DRAWING CERTIFICATION Re: (Name of Project) (Division Number and Name) This is to certify that the attached marked-up design prints were marked as the items were installed at the Site during construction, and that these prints represent as accurate “As-Builts” record of the work as actually installed. One copy will be turned over to the Owner at the instruction in Operation Conference. The duplicate copy is for the Engineer’s files. (Name of General Contractor) By: (Authorized Signature and Title Date: (Name of Subcontractor) By: (Authorized Signature and Title Date:


CONDUCTOR INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST MEMO PROJECT NAME: CONDUCTOR FROM TO SIZE INSULATION TYPE INSULATION VOLTAGE RATING DATE TIME WEATHER CONDITIONS TEST VOLTAGE (DC) RANGE MEGGER INSTRUMENT/SERIAL NUMBER TESTING METHODOLOGY INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT (ACCEPTABLE MEASUREMENT NOT TO BE LESS THAN (1) MEGOHM): PHASE A TO GROUND PHASE B TO GROUND PHASE C TO GROUND NEUTRAL TO GROUND ISOLATED GROUND TO GROUND CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE: ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE:


SPARE PARTS CERTIFICATION MEMO This form shall be completed and a copy provided to the Owner at the Owner’s Performance Verification and Demonstration meeting. A copy shall also be included in the specification section of each O &M Manual for the equipment checked. Project Name: Type of Spare Parts: Specification Reference: Quantity of Spare Parts: Signature below by the contractor signifies that the spare parts required by the drawings and/or specifications have been turned over to the Owner. (Name of General Contractor) (Signature, Title, Date) (Name of Subcontractor) (Signature, Title, Date) (Name of Owner) (Signature, Title, Date)


CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: Do not submit this form at the time Submittal Brochures are submitted. Submit five (5) copies of all information listed below for checking at leas one week before scheduled completion of the project. After information has been approved and inserted in each brochure, give the Owner a Demonstration of Completed Electrical Systems and have him sign five (5) copies of this form. Provide one signed copy for each brochure. After this has been done, a written request for final inspection of the System shall be made. Re:

(Name of Project) (Division Number and Name)

This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given a Demonstration of Completed Electrical Systems on the work covered under this Division. This conference consisted of the system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipment were pointed out, and the following items were given to the Owner: (a) Owner’s copy of Submittal Brochures containing approved submittal sheets on all items,

including the following: (To be inserted in the Submittal Brochures after the correct table).

(1) Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items. (2) Printed Warranties by manufactures on equipment items. (3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor. (4) Check-Out Memo on equipment by manufacturer’s representative. (5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items. (6) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system. (b) Prints showing actual “As-Built” conditions. (c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which will

be required. (Name of General Contractor)

By:

(Authorized Signature, Title, Date) (Name of Subcontractor)

By:

(Authorized Signature, Title, Date) Brochure, Instruction, Prints, Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received:

(Name of Owner) By: (Authorized Signature, Title, Date) cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor and General Contractor


GROUND TEST INFORMATION (Refer to Specification Section 16010) Project Name: Ground Type: Test By: Date of Test: Ground Location: Ground Type (rod, water pipe, etc.):

Prior to Connection to System: Ground: (OHMS) After Connection to System: Ground: (OHMS) Weather Conditions (Wet/Dry): Soil Conditions (Wet/Dry): Contractor Representative: Date Engineer’s Representative: Date Owner’s Representative: Date END OF SECTION 16098

CONDUIT 16111-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Rigid metal conduit

1. Rigid steel conduit (GRS)

B. PVC coated rigid metal conduit

C. Flexible metal conduit

D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit

E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)

F. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC)

G. Liquid-tight flexible nonmetallic conduit

H. Fittings and conduit bodies 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07270 - Fire Stopping

B. Section 07535 - Roofing Penetrations

C. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements

D. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable

E. Section 16130 - Boxes

F. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding

G. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices

H. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated

CONDUIT 16111-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated

C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit

and Cable Assemblies

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

E. NECA "Standard of Installation"

F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic and Conduit EPC-40 and EPC-80 (PVC)

H. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70, unless otherwise noted or specified (conduit size shall be increased above the minimum requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 where indicated in this or other sections of these specifications or on the drawings).

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, conduit bodies.

C. Submit a dimensioned conduit stub-up locations plan showing all underground

conduit at plaza and building. D. Submit a ductbank layout showing all different ductbank sections.


A. Submit under provisions of Sections 01700 and 16010. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.

CONDUIT 16111-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade.

Provide appropriate covering.

D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid steel conduit (GRS)

1. Conduit: ANSI C80.1; Hot dipped galvanized steel. All factory threads shall be galvanized after cutting.

2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Hot dipped galvanized malleable iron or steel. All fittings shall be threaded and conduit bodies shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

2.2 PVC COATED RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Conduit: ANSI C80.1, NEMA RN 1; Hot dipped galvanized steel conduit with a 40mil thick external PVC coating and a 2mil internal urethane coating. All factory threads shall be galvanized and urethane coated after cutting.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Hot dipped galvanized

malleable iron or steel with a 40mil thick external PVC coating and a 2mil internal urethane coating. All fittings shall be threaded and conduit bodies shall have threaded hubs.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Conduit: ANSI/UL 1; Interlocked steel or aluminum construction.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Hot dipped galvanized or zinc plated malleable iron or steel, squeeze type connectors with insulated throat. Set screw type connectors are not acceptable.

CONDUIT 16111-4 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

2.4 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Conduit: ANSI/UL 360; Interlocked hot dipped galvanized steel construction with extruded PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Compression type with threaded connectors,

insulated throat and sealing washers. Hot dipped galvanized or zinc plated malleable iron or steel.

2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Conduit: ANSI C80.3; Thin wall ferrous steel, hot dipped galvanized with smooth interior reamed ends.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Hot dipped galvanized malleable iron or steel. Set

screw type for dry locations and compression type for all other locations. All connectors shall be insulated throat type.

C. Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Hot dipped galvanized malleable iron or

steel with threaded hubs and gasketed covers. D. Die-cast fittings and conduit bodies are not permissible.

2.6 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)

A. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; High impact polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40 and 80.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.7 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT)

A. The use of ENT is not permitted. 2.8 METAL CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. The use of MC cable is not permitted. 2.9 EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION FITTINGS

A. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1

1. Metal Conduit Applications: Hot dipped galvanized malleable iron or steel with a 4” expansion chamber, internal tinned copper braided bonding jumper and factory installed packing.

CONDUIT 16111-5 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

2. Non-Metallic Conduit Applications: Polyvinyl chloride with a 4” expansion chamber and factory installed packing. Fitting wall thickness shall match conduit system application (i.e. schedule 40 or 80.)

2.10 CONDUIT SEALS

A. Conduit seals for Class 1, Div 1 areas shall be threaded malleable iron type. Seals shall be filled with Class 1, Div 1 sealing compound. Seals shall be Crouse-Hinds type EYS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MINIMUM SIZE

A. Flexible and liquid-tight conduit: 1/2” unless otherwise specified or noted.

B. Homerun Conduit: 3/4” unless otherwise specified or noted.

C. Branch Circuit Conduit: 3/4” unless otherwise specified or noted.

D. Site Electrical Conduit: 3/4” unless otherwise specified or noted.

E. Conduit size shall be increased as required for conductor fill, per NFPA 70, when conductor size is increased due to voltage drop as specified in other sections of these specifications.

3.2 GENERAL

A. All wires for power, lighting, systems, and controls shall be installed in conduit. Conduit shall be of the sizes required to accommodate the number of conductors in accordance with the National Electrical Code, or as noted on the drawings. The sizes shown on the plans may be increased if desired to facilitate the pulling of conductors. The minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch, unless noted otherwise.

B. Install conduit in accordance with NECA “Standard of Installation.” Contractor

shall perform installation studies prior to rough-in and shall arrange conduit in a neat manner avoiding excessive crossing of conduits.

C. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels,

gantries, shafts, equipment rooms, and at connections to surface panels and free standing equipment, or as otherwise noted.

E. Arrange Conduit (including supports) to maintain headroom, access to equipment

and means of egress.

CONDUIT 16111-6 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1. Conduits serving equipment more than 24” from a wall shall be roughed-

in from underground or over head and serve the equipment vertically within 12” from the equipment. Conduits shall not create a trip hazard around equipment.

2. Conduits shall be routed concealed within ceiling cavities (in all spaces

which have a ceiling assembly below the structure) unless specifically indicated as exposed on the drawings.

3. The minimum headroom clearance for exposed conduits within a space

shall meet all of the following:

a. Install conduit as high as possible b. Install conduit above the bottom of all light fixtures. c. Install conduit at least 6” above the tallest door height (including

large doors i.e. roll-up and sliding doors) serving the space. d. In no case shall headroom be less than 7’-0” above the finished

floor. e. If a through d above cannot be met and conduit does not serve the

space then conduit shall be routed around the space. f. If a through e above cannot be met coordinate exact conduit

routing with the architect and engineer prior to rough-in and route conduit around required means of egress and per owners required clearances for the use of the space.

F. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Back straps or “stand-

offs” shall be used to keep the conduit far enough away from supporting surfaces to allow painting and to prevent the accumulation of dirt and moisture.

G. Route conduit installed above ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

H. Conduits in and under slabs may be routed from point-to-point.

I. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.

1. No conduit shall be installed less than 2” from piping by other trades or 8”

if the pipe is to be insulated. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the conduit installation with all trades.

J. Maintain 12 inch (300mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with

temperatures exceeding 104ºF (40ºC).

K. Conduits which contain communication, signal, data, control wiring and other cable sensitive to EMF and RF interference shall be routed at least 12 inches from

CONDUIT 16111-7 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

power conduits and other EMF/RF generating equipment (i.e. light fixture ballast’s, motors, capacitors etc.).

L. Conduits installed within structural concrete i.e. columns, beams and suspended

slabs shall meet all of the following:

1. Conduit shall not

be installed within structural concrete until specific written permission is given by the structural engineer. The contractor shall contact the structural engineer in writing within ten days of the award of contract and shall coordinate the installation of conduit within structural concrete. Installation shall meet the structural engineers requirements.

2. Conduit installation within structural concrete shall meet the requirements of applicable building codes.

3. Conduit & outlets which are not indicated on the drawings as being

installed within the structural concrete shall be installed outside of the structural concrete (i.e. concealed below slab, above ceiling, within wall cavities or exposed) as indicated.

4. The contractor shall coordinate and install conduit and outlets within

structural concrete where indicated on the drawings unless the requirements of items 1 & 2 above cannot be met. If conduit and outlets cannot be installed within the structural concrete, as shown then the contractor shall route the conduit outside of the structure at no additional cost. Coordinate routing of conduit outside of the structure with the architect and engineer prior to installation.

M. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

N. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

O. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coats of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

P. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in

damp and wet locations.

Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes.

1. Limit each bend to 90° or less. 2. For voice, data, fiber optic and video raceway systems:

a. Radius of bends shall be 10 times the conduit diameter or greater.

CONDUIT 16111-8 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

b. Use pullboxes to make sharp changes in direction (i.e. around beams). Pullboxes shall be sized to allow required wire bending space for large radius bend of cabling per the cabling manufacturers’ recommendations.

c. Install no more than equivalent of two 90 degree bends between boxes.

3. For all other raceway systems (unless noted otherwise in these

specifications or on the drawings):

a. Radius of bends shall be 6 times the conduit diameter or greater. b. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (i.e. around

beams).

R. Avoid moisture traps, where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses seismic, control, deflection, and expansion joints.

T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. Provide tracer wire with pull string or pull tape with integrated tracer wire.

U. Provide bonding bushings at the end of all conduit stubs which do not terminate

into a bonded metal enclosure or junction box (i.e. at terminal boards, cable trays, etc.) bond per 16170.

V. Seal all conduits with insulating electrical putty, which extend from the interior to

the exterior of the building to prevent the circulation of air.

W. Use a Thruwall waterproof seal on each conduit that penetrates a wall at or below grade level.

X. Seal all conduits entering building from below grade and all conduits entering

refrigerated spaces (freezers, coolers, etc.) with insulating electrical putty to prevent moisture from entering. Slope these conduits away from the building.

Y. Install an explosion-proof seal in each conduit run where it enters and leaves a

hazardous location. Z. Wherever conduit crosses an expansion joint an approved expansion fitting for

this type of installation shall be installed.

AA. Flexible conduit - wet locations: Where liquids are present, form drip loops in liquid-tight flexible conduits to prevent liquid from running into connections.

CONDUIT 16111-9 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

BB. All raceway runs in masonry shall be installed at the same time as the masonry so that no face cutting is required, except to accommodate boxes.

CC. All raceways shall be run from outlet to outlet as shown on the drawings, unless

permission is granted, in writing from the Engineer, to alter arrangement shown. If permission is granted, arrangement shall be marked on field set of drawings as previously specified.

DD. Extend homeruns from outlets shown to panel designated, do not combine

homeruns, and do not collect homeruns in pull or junction boxes.

EE. Spare conduit stubs shall be capped and location marked with concrete marker set flush with finish grade. Marker shall be 6” round x 6” deep with appropriate symbol embedded into top to indicate use. Also, tag conduits in panels where originating.

FF. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture

during construction. Caps shall remain on conduits which remain empty after construction is complete.

GG. All connections to motors or other vibrating equipment including dry type

transformers or at other locations where required shall be made with not less than 12” of flexible steel conduit. Use angle connectors wherever necessary to relieve angle strain on flexible conduit.

HH. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.

II. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.

3.3 SUPPORTS

A. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

B. Support conduit using hot dipped galvanized or zinc coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

C. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel

channel and allthread provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

D. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.

1. Electrical conduit system shall be supported independently of all other

systems and supports (i.e. duct work, piping, etc.), and shall in every case avoid proximity to other systems which might cause confusion with such

CONDUIT 16111-10 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

systems or might provide a chance of electrolytic actions, contact with live parts or excessive induced heat.

E. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports.

F. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 3.4 APPLICATION

A. Underground Installations:

1. Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit only unless local authority having jurisdiction or applicable codes/utility requirements, etc. require rigid steel conduit or drawings indicate otherwise.

2. All conduits or elbows entering, or leaving the ground shall be rigid steel conduit coated with PVC or asphaltic paint.

3. Where rigid metallic conduit is installed underground as noted above it shall be coated with waterproofing black mastic before installation, and all joints shall be re-coated after installation.

4. PVC runs over 200 feet in length or 2”c. and larger shall utilize rigid steel elbows or bends with black mastic or PVC coating at each riser and change in direction unless indicated otherwise.

B. In Slab Above or on Grade:

1. Use coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic conduit, unless

drawings indicate otherwise.

2. Coating of metallic conduit to be black asphaltic or PVC.

C. Penetration of Slab

1. Exposed or Concealed Location:

a. Where penetrating a floor from underground or in slab, or a column from within the column, a black mastic coated or PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used, starting at a point at least 6” within the floor or column and extending at least 6” out of the slab or column. Where conduits are grouped together in an exposed location, the rigid steel conduit penetrations shall terminate at the same length in the first coupling or connector.

D. Outdoor Location:

1. Above Grade:

CONDUIT 16111-11 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

a. Where penetrating the finished grade, a black mastic coated or

PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used, starting a minimum of 6” below grade.

b. In general all exterior conduit runs shall be rigid steel conduit with threaded connections.

c. Exposed exterior conduit shall be painted as directed by the Architect.

2. Metal Canopies:

a. Conduit runs (except for canopy lighting raceways) are not to be

run on (top or bottom) of metal canopies roof systems. All

new conduit shown on or at these areas shall be run underground.

3. Roofs:

a. Conduit is not to be installed on roofs, without written authorization by the Engineer for specific conditions.

b. When approved by written authorization conduit shall comply with

the following:

(1) Shall be rigid galvanized metal conduit. (2) Conduit shall be supported above roof at least 6 inches

using approved conduit supporting devices. Refer to applicable sections of specifications on roofing, etc.

(3) Supports to be fastened to roof using roofing adhesive or means as approved by roofing contractor.

E. Interior Dry Locations:

1. Concealed: Use rigid galvanized steel and electrical metallic tubing,

unless drawings indicate otherwise. 2. Exposed: Use rigid galvanized steel and electrical metallic tubing, unless

drawings indicate otherwise. 3. Concealed or exposed flexible conduit:

a. Flexible steel conduit or seal tight flexible steel conduit in lengths

not longer than six (6) feet in length with a ground conductor installed in the conduit.

F. Interior Wet and Damp Locations:

1. Use rigid galvanized steel conduit. 2. The gantry structure is considered a wet location.

CONDUIT 16111-12 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

G. Concrete Columns or Poured in-place Concrete Wall Locations:

1. Use thickwall non-metallic conduit. Penetration shall be by approved

metal raceway (i.e., metal conduit as required elsewhere in these specifications).

H. Underground Concrete Duct Bank:

1. Provide PVC conduit duct bank, encased in concrete with at least three

inches of concrete at the top and bottom and two inches on each side. The minimum cover to top of duct bank shall be 24 inches. A horizontal and vertical separation between the ducts of 1 inch or 1-1/2 inches (as required) shall be maintained by installing high impact spacers with horizontal and vertical locking intervals of 8 feet. Provide reducers for 1 inch and 3/4 inch conduits. Concrete shall be minimum 2,500 psi strength at 28 days; 1/2 inch maximum aggregate size. Duct bank shall extend inside the building below the slab as shown on Drawings. Duct bank conduits shall have a continuous slope downward toward the associated pull boxes and away from buildings with a minimum pitch of 3 inches in 100 feet.

2. Products: Provide the following duct bank spacers as manufactured by

Carlon Power & Telecom Systems:

a. Base spacers shall be Series S288. b. Intermediate spacers shall be Series S289. c. Reducers shall be Series S287.

3. Pull boxes associated with the duct bank shall be open bottom type. 4. Prior to installation, submit a duct bank section layout identifying each

conduit within duct bank, including reduction of conduits at each island and reduction of duct bank size as required by conduit count.

3.5 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SITE ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND

CONDUIT

A. Routing of conduits shall be coordinated with the civil, hardscape and landscape construction documents and installers.

1. All conduit shall be installed in accordance with Article 300 of the NEC

except the minimum cover for any conduit shall be 2 feet and the minimum cover for secondary conduit shall be 3 feet.

CONDUIT 16111-13 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

2. All conduit must maintain a minimum of 1ft. clearance with parallel utilities and at utility crossings.

3. All conduit must maintain a minimum of 1ft. clearance with footers,

foundations and tree ball.

4. All conduits shall be routed around tree save areas and retention ponds.

5. Conduits shall not be routed within drainage ditches. Conduits crossing drainage ditches shall be provided with a 4” concrete cap (minimum 12” wide) extending a minimum of 5ft. beyond the limits of the ditch.

6. Conduit depth shall be increased as required to maintain the clearances

noted above. 3.6 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

A. All connections shall be threaded. The use of an Erickson type coupling is acceptable where two segments of a run must be joined and neither can be rotated. Non-threaded type connectors shall not be allowed.

B. A threaded insulated bushing shall be provided at all conduit terminations.

C. Rigid steel conduit shall be used for all cables rated over 600 volts in exposed

locations. 3.7 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMT

A. Electric metallic tubing (thin wall) may be installed inside buildings above slab on grade in dry locations where not subject to mechanical injury. If subject to mechanical injury, rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used.

B. All cuts shall be reamed smooth and free of sharp and abrasive areas by use of an

approved reamer. 3.8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC

CONDUIT)

A. PVC conduit is not allowed anywhere inside building(s) except underground, in slab, or in poured in place concrete.

B. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

CONDUIT 16111-14 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

C. Threads will not be permitted on PVC conduit and fittings, except for rigid steel to PVC couplings.

D. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

E. PVC conduit shall not be used to support fixture or equipment.

F. Field bends shall be made with approved hotbox. Heating with flame or hand held dryers is prohibited.

G. PVC conduit 2” and smaller shall be Schedule 80. PVC 2-1/2” and larger shall be

Schedule 40. 3.9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PRIMARY CONDUIT SYSTEM

A. Shall meet all utility company requirements.

B. Shall be 6” conduit for medium voltage cabling unless noted otherwise.

C. Shall be 1-1/2” conduit for low voltage control cabling.

D. Shall be non-metallic conduit (Schedule 40) for underground locations.

E. All bends in 6” conduit shall have a 48” radius. All bends in 4” conduit or smaller shall have a 36” radius.

F. All bends 45º or grater shall be encased in concrete with a minimum of 4” cover.

G. All conduits or elbows entering or leaving the ground in exposed locations (i.e. at

pole base) shall be rigid steel conduit.

1. Conduits terminating within transformers, pullboxes or switchgear shall not be considered exposed.

H. Provide polyester pull rope in all empty conduit raceways and provide tag at each

end labeling destination of conduit.

I. Provide underground warning tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. Install warning tape 12” below grade directly above each primary conduit.

J. All underground conduit shall have a minimum of three feet of cover.

K. All conduit must maintain a minimum of 1ft. clearance with parallel utilities and

at utility crossings.

CONDUIT 16111-15 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

L. Conduit must be a minimum of 3ft. from property line, foundations, footer, tree

balls, and retention ponds. 3.10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOLL OPERATIONS

A. All conduit locations shall be coordinated and located per the State Toll Facility Engineer (STFE) and Toll Operations. Conduit installations shall be inspected by STFE prior to covering up.

B. All conduit located below grade within the tolling lanes shall be PVC. All

supports in these locations shall be non-ferrous metal or plastic. Tolling lanes extend to the limits of fiberglass reinforced concrete slabs used in these areas. All areas where traffic loop detectors are used are also considered tolling lanes.

3.11 GROUNDING

A. All raceways shall have a copper system ground conductor throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC codes.

B. Grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit

sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings.

C. Grounding conductors run with feeders shall be bonded to portions of conduit that are metal by approved ground bushings.

D. See other sections of these specifications for additional requirements.

E. Grounding conductors (including lightning protection down conductors) run in

metal conduit shall be bonded to metal conduit at both ends. 3.12 VERTICAL RACEWAYS

A. Cables in vertical raceways shall be supported as per NEC Article 300-19. Provide and install supporting devices for cables, including any necessary accessible pullbox as required regardless if shown on drawings or not. Provide and install access panels as required. Coordinate location of pullbox and access panel with architect prior to installation. This includes empty raceways for future use.

3.13 FIRESTOPPING

A. All penetrations through fire resistance rated partitions and other assemblies, including empty openings and openings containing cables, conduits and other penetrating items, shall be fire-stopped to preserve the fire resistance rating of the assembly. Fire-stopping shall comply with the following:

CONDUIT 16111-16 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1. Compatibility: Provide fire-stopping composed of Components that are

compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items if any, penetrating the fire-stopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-stopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Fire-stopping shall be listed in the underwriters laboratories fire resistance

directory and installation shall be identical to that shown in the directory.

3. Fire-stopping details shall be submitted and approved by the Architect, Engineer and authority having jurisdiction prior to installation.

B. System Performance Requirements

1. General: Provide fire-stopping systems that are produced and installed to

resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.

2. F-Rated Through-Penetration Fire-stop Systems: Provide through-

penetration fire-stop systems with F ratings equaling or exceeding the fire resistance rating of the constructions penetrated, as determined per ASTM E 814.

3. T-Rated Through-Penetration Fire-stop Systems: Provide through-

penetration fire-stop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect floor penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials such as:

a. Where fire-stop systems protect penetrations located outside of

wall cavities.

b. Where fire-stop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.

c. Where fire-stop systems protect penetrations located in

construction containing doors required to have a temperature-rise rating, whether or not penetration is located within wall cavity.

d. Where fire-stop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4”

diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area, whether or not penetration is located within a wall cavity.

C. For fire-stopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of

less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 50, as determined per ASTM E 84.

CONDUIT 16111-17 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

D. Fire-stopping shall meet the requirements of applicable building codes as

determined by the authority having jurisdiction.

E. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the fire-stopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements.

F. Provide fire-stopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by

the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized Light Microscopy.”

G. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items

to ensure that through-penetration fire-stop systems are installed per specified requirements.

3.14 ROOF MEMBRANE PENETRATION

A. Route Conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable weatherproof boot. Coordinate location and penetration requirements with roofing installation specified under other sections of these specifications, penetration shall meet all requirements of roofing specifications. Provide fire-stopping of rated roof structure assemblies.


SURFACE RACEWAYS 16112-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16112 - SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Multi-outlet assemblies B. Wireways 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractor's Association) Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials,

fabrication details, finishes, and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold B. Multi-outlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired

receptacles, suitable for use as multi-outlet assembly. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle. E. Receptacle Spacing: 6 inches on center. F. Receptacle Color: Black G. Channel Finish: Gray H. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device

boxes, and connectors. 2.2 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman B. Description: 1. Interior Dry Locations - General Purpose, NEMA Type 1 2. Damp or Wet Locations - NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel C. Knockouts: None D. Size: As indicated on Drawings. E. Cover: Hinged cover with full gasketing in wet locations.

F. Connectors and Fittings: Slip-in type with captive screws and removable sides to allow complete lay-in wiring.


G. Finish:

1. NEMA 1 Wireway - ANSI -49 gray epoxy paint applied by an E-coat process per UL 870

2. NEMA 4X – Natural stainless steel PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces.

Mount plumb and level. C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner

fittings. D. Wireway Supports: Provide steel channel as specified in Section 16190. E. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings. F. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 16170. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16112

CABLE TRAYS 16114-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cable trays and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Firestopping. B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding. C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products

Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. C. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by

the Hot-Dip Process. D. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 16010 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 16010 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use


CABLE TRAYS 16114-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01720 - Contract Closeout B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of

supports. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings, instructed by

manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. B-Line Systems, Inc. B. P-W Industries, Inc. C. MP Husky Corporation 2.2 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray. B. Material: Aluminum Association Alloy 6063-T6 C. Finish: Anodized D. Inside Width: 18 inches

CABLE TRAYS 16114-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

E. Inside Depth: 4 inches F. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches on center. G. Inside Radius of Fittings: 12 inches H. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer

plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. 2.3 WARNING SIGNS A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2-inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic

nameplate, engraved with the following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR

SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1. B. Support trays in accordance with Section 16190. Provide supports at each

connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 8 ft maximum.

C. Use expansion connectors where required where joints aer crossed. D. Provide firestopping under provisions of Section 07270 to sustain ratings when

passing cable tray through fire-rated elements. E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 16170. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. 2. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before

assembly. 3. Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire

length of tray; bond to each tray section and component. 4. Connections to tray to be made using mechanical connectors. 5. Bond all metallic conduit terminating at the tray with a bonding bushing and

#8 AWG copper to the tray equipment grounding conductor. H. Install warning signs at 50 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.

CABLE TRAYS 16114-4 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

I. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the cable tray installation with other

trades to avoid interferences and maintain proper NEC clearances. J. Install to create a continuous, low-resistance, electrical ground return path in

accordance with the requirements of the NEC. K. Install at locations and heights indicated and at locations required by field

connections. L. Provide short section of tray covers at all openings in walls for passage of cable

tray unless otherwise indicated. Grout-in openings around cable tray after installations.

M. Cable tray wire shall not be spliced at tray. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16114

DUCT BANK 16118-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16118 - DUCT BANK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Section 1611 - Conduit 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 16010 - Submittals B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of

openings, and accessory locations for precast manholes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing and elevations of underground

conduit and duct, and locations and sizes of manholes. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for

rough-in. C. Verify locations of manholes prior to excavating for installation. D. Duct bank routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are

indicated. Route as required to complete duct system. E. Manhole locations are shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are

indicated. Locate as required to complete ductbank system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DUCT BANK 16118-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

2.1 PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit

bodies to NEMA TC 3. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored

yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION A. Install duct to locate top of ductbank at depths as indicated on drawings. B. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (0.33 percent). Slope

duct away from building entrances. C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. E. Join nonmetallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. F. Wipe nonmetallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of

adhesive to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

G. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points. H. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where

required. I. Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell. J. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum. K. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers. L. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement. M. Place concrete under provisions of Section 03300.

DUCT BANK 16118-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

N. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of ductbank. O. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas (except

under tolling lanes). P. Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels. Q. Connect to manhole wall using dowels. R. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples. S. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and

moisture. T. Backfill trenches under provisions of Section 02200.

U. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling.


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building wire and cable

B. Wiring connectors and connections 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association)

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association)

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 16010 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data for each type of conductor, connector and termination.

C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop for copper conductors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSE-OUT

A. Section 01720 - Project Closeout, 01740 - Warranties

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years experience.


PROJECT CONDITIONS

B. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings

C. Conductor sizes are based on copper. D. No aluminum wiring shall be permitted.

E. All sizes shall be given in American Wire Gauge (AWG) or in thousand circular

mils (kcmil). 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01040.

B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required.

C. Determine required separation between cable and other work.

D. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire

B. Conductor: Copper

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts

D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN and XHHW 2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Split Bolt Connectors:

B. Spring Wire Connectors:

C. Compression Connectors: Raychem with heat shrink insulating covers.



A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

E. Before installing raceways and pulling wire to any mechanical equipment, verify

electrical characteristics with final submittal on equipment to assure proper number and AWG of conductors. (As for multiple speed motors, different motor starter arrangements, etc.).

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 GENERAL

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.

C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation".

D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.

E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

F. Branch conductor sizes shall be increased as required to maintain a branch circuit voltage drop of less than 3% to the load served

G. All 120V, 20A circuit homeruns over 50ft. shall be #10 cu. minimum unless noted

otherwise.

H. All 120V, 20A circuit homeruns over 150ft. shall be #8 cu. minimum, unless noted otherwise.

I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Pulling means which might

damage the raceway shall not be used. The manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded.


1. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete from pull

point to pull point and major equipment terminating conduits have been fixed in position.

2. Bending radius of insulated wire or cable shall not be less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Where coaxial or fiber optic conductors are installed, special requirements shall apply as outlined under that specific system detail specifications.

J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire. Compound or lubricant shall

not cause the conductor or insulation to deteriorate.

K. Protect exposed cable from damage.

L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and Panelboards.

N. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

O. All conductors shall be installed in raceway.

P. Conductor sizes indicated on circuit homeruns or in schedules shall be installed

over the entire length of the circuit unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications.

Q. Wiring in vicinity of heat producing equipment: Use only XHHW insulation, in

raceway.

R. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. Up to three phases and a neutral are allowed in the same raceway unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Do not combine homeruns.

3.4 VERTICAL RISERS

A. Provide vertical cable riser supports per Article 300-19 in NFPA 70. Cable supports shall be O-Z/Gedney Type “S” or equal. These shall be located in accessible pullboxes of adequate size. Provide for adequate structural connection of cable supports to pullbox, which will transfer cable weight to building.

3.5 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS

A. For control and signal circuits above 50 VAC, conductors shall be #14 AWG minimum size, Type XHHW or THWN-THHN as permitted by NFPA 70, within voltage drop limits, increased to #12 AWG as necessary for proper operation.


B. For control and signal circuits 50 VAC and below, conductors, at the Contractor’s

option, may be #16 AWG, 300 volt rated, PVC insulated, except where specifically noted otherwise in the contract documents.

C. Conductor insulation for Fire Alarm Systems shall be as approved by Code

Inspection Authority only. Wire approvals by the A/E shall not supersede this final Approval for conditions of this specific project.

D. Install circuit conductors in conduit.

E. Circuit conductors to be stranded.

3.6 COLOR CODING

A. All power feeders and branch circuits No. 6 and smaller shall be wired with color-coded wire with the same color used for a system throughout the building. Power feeders above No. 6 shall either be fully color-coded or shall have black insulation and be similarly color-coded with tape or paint in all junction boxes and panels. Tape or paint shall completely cover the full length of conductor insulation within the box or panel.

B. Unless otherwise approved or required by A/E to match existing, color-code shall

be as follows: Neutrals to be white for 120/240V system, natural gray for 240/480V system; ground wire green, bare or green with yellow strips nominal. 120/240V, Phase A - black; Phase B - red. 480/240V, Phase A - brown; Phase B - orange. All switchlegs, other voltage system wiring, control and interlock wiring shall be color-coded other than those above.

3.7 TAPS/SPLICES/CONNECTORS/TERMINATIONS

A. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.

C. Conductors shall be continuous and unspliced where located within conduit.

Splices shall occur within troughs, wireways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, or equipment enclosures where sufficient additional room is provided for all splices. No splices shall be made in in-ground pull boxes (without written approval of engineer).

D. Allow adequate conductor lengths in all junction boxes, pull boxes and terminal

cabinets. All termination of conductors in which conductor is in tension will be rejected and shall be replaced with conductors of adequate length. This requirement shall include the providing by the Contractor of sleeve type vertical


cable supports in vertical raceway installations provided in pullboxes at proper vertical spacing.

E. A calibrated torque wrench shall be used for all bolt tightening.

F. Interior Locations:

1. All (non-electronic systems) copper taps and splices in No. 8 or smaller

shall be fastened together by means of “spring type” connectors. All taps and splices in wire larger than No. 8 shall be made with compression type connectors or split bolt connectors and taped to provide insulation equal to wire.

G. Exterior Locations:

1. All taps and splices shall be made with compression type connectors and

covered with Raychem heavywall cable sleeves (type CRSM-CT, WCSM or MCK) with type “S” sealant coating with sleeve kits as per manufacturer’s installation instructions or be terminated/connected to terminal strips in above grade terminal boxes suitable for use.

H. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

I. Make splices, taps, and termination’s to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16123

BOXES 16130-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16130 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes

B. Floor boxes

C. Pull and junction boxes 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07270 - Firestopping

B. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices

C. Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation

B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies

C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)


1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01720 - Contract Closeout

B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Concealed within wall or ceiling cavities:

BOXES 16130-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. C. Concealed within concrete walls or ceilings:

1. Cast box and cover: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted

junction box: 2. Material: Galvanized cast iron 3. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel

cover screws.

D. Surface Mounted:

1. Cast box and cover: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:

2. Material: Galvanized cast iron 3. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel

cover screws.

E. Toll Island/Lane/Sidewalks Boxes:

1. Boxes for installation on Toll Booth islands, gatorheads or lane pavements shall be galvanized cast iron, heavy duty, watertight, sidewalk type boxes with gasketed, heavy gauge galvanized steel checkered cover, external flange for flush mounting and comply with UL50, H-20 Vehicle Loading.Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

F. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.

E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable.

B. Material: Galvanized cast iron

C. Service Fittings: As scheduled on the drawings. 2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Concealed within wall or ceiling cavities:

BOXES 16130-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

1. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. C. Concealed within concrete walls or ceilings:



cover screws.

D. Surface Mounted:



cover screws.

D. Toll Island/Lane/Sidewalks Boxes:

1. Boxes for installation on Toll Booth islands, gatorheads or lane pavements shall be galvanized cast iron, heavy duty, watertight, sidewalk type boxes with gasketed, heavy gauge galvanized steel checkered cover, external flange for flush mounting and comply with UL50, H-20 Vehicle Loading.


A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights

indicated.

BOXES 16130-4 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet (3 m) if required to accommodate intended purpose.

E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section

16140.

F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6

inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07270.

J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,

benches, and backsplashes.

K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar

devices.

M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6

inches (150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in fire rated or acoustic rated walls, or provide firestopping and/or acoustic treatment where boxes cannot be separated.

P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately

position to allow for surface finish thickness.

Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

BOXES 16130-5 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

U. Support boxes independently of conduit.

V. Use one piece gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not

use sectional box.

W. Set floor boxes level. X. All exterior boxes shall be weather proof type with weather proof covers.

Y. Large Pull Boxes(8”or larger): Use hinged enclosure unless noted otherwise,

refer to section 16160. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 16180.

3.4 ADJUSTING


B. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.

C. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

D. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16130

WIRING DEVICES BOXES 16140-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches

B. Receptacles

C. Device plates and decorative box covers

D. Floor box service fittings 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16130 - Boxes 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation

B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices

C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations and ratings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 16010 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. P & S 2. Hubbel 3. Leviton

B. Description: NEMA WD 1, commercial specification grade, AC only general-use

snap switch.

C. Configuration and Model:

1. Single pole toggle light switch, P & S 20AC1. 2. Provide same series switch for other configurations.

D. Ratings:

1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC 2. Current: The minimum rating shall be 20 amp unless indicated higher on

plans. Increase rating if load served exceeds rating scheduled, (rating shall exceed load served).

E. All wiring devices shall be provided grounding screw and terminal.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:

1. P & S 2. Hubbel 3. Leviton

B. Description: NEMA WD 1, commercial specification grade general use

receptacle.

C. Configuration and Model:

1. Single and Duplex Receptacles - 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired, 20 amp, 125 volt, P & S BR20.

2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be duplex feed through type with test and reset buttons, P & S 2094.


D. Voltage rating: Match branch circuit voltage.

E. Current rating: The minimum rating shall be as indicated in schedule. Increase rating if load served exceeds rating scheduled, (rating shall exceed load served).

F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit

interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.

G. All wiring devices shall be provided grounding screw and terminal. 2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth 302 stainless steel. Plate shall be of same manufacturer as wiring device.

B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast iron or stainless steel, with hinged

gasketed device cover. 2.4 WIRING DEVICE COLOR

A. Device color shall be gray, unless noted otherwise for special purpose outlets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate outlet heights

with architectural elevations and millwork shop drawing.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for

connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

B. Install devices plumb and level.

C. Install switches with OFF position down.

D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box and branch circuit

equipment grounding conductor.

H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.

I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.

J. Install cast iron plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and on surface mounted outlets.

K. Install wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings, and as called for below.

L. Switches and receptacles shall be installed and located as follows, unless noted

otherwise on Drawings.

1. Switches: Centerline 46" above finished floors.

2. Receptacles: Centerline 18" above finished floors generally; 8" above counters and workbenches in kitchens, shops, mechanical rooms and similar areas. Contractor shall verify and coordinate exact height and locations with Architectural plans and elevations and millwork shop drawings.

M. Where light switches are located adjacent to doors, they shall be installed on

"knob" side of door. Field-verify door swings.

N. Where walls have wainscot finish, switch height shall be adjusted as required, so switch is either all in wainscot or all in wall above wainscot. Switch centerline shall be no higher than 46" AFF.


O. Prior to roughing-in outlet boxes, Contractor shall verify from general construction drawings; door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and other equipment.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights indicated on drawings.


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16140

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16160 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hinged cover enclosures

B. Cabinets

C. Terminal blocks

D. Accessories 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control

B. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association)

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

D. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 16010- Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 16010- Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS


B. Furnish two of each key. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman B. Square D Co. C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES

A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 4X steel enclosure as required for application.

B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.

C. Provide interior metal panel with stand off brackets for mounting terminal blocks

and electrical components; finish with white enamel.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel or brushed stainless steel.

E. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages.

2.3 CABINETS

A. Boxes: Galvanized steel

B. Box Size: 24-inches (600-mm) wide x 24 inches (600 mm) high x 6-inches (150-mm) deep, minimum, increase dimensions as required for application.

C. Provide interior metal panel with stand off brackets for mounting terminal blocks

and electrical components; finish with white enamel.

D. Fronts: Steel, flush or surface as indicated with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel.

E. Knockouts: None


F. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems

and voltages.

G. Provide mounting rack for free-standing equipment. 2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4

B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts.

C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel

mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.

D. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner under the provisions of Section 16190.

C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

D. All cabinets and enclosures shall be hinged cover enclosures as noted in 2.2 above

except the following locations shall be cabinet type as noted in 2.3 above:

1. Electrical Rooms 2. Mechanical Rooms 3. Systems Rooms 4. Above accessible ceilings (only when indicated on the drawings) 5. Flush wall applications where indicated on the drawings. 6. Cabinet type enclosures shall not be acceptable in exterior or wet

locations. 3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.


C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16160

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding electrodes and conductors

B. Equipment grounding conductors

C. Bonding 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16620 - Lightning Protection Systems 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association)

1.4 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Metal underground water pipe

B. Metal frame of the building

C. Concrete-encased electrode

D. Rod electrode 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION



B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use



A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and

grounding electrodes.

C. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Material: Copper or Copper-clad steel

B. Diameter: 5/8 inch

C. Length: 20 feet. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Material: Bronze 2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Caldweld


2.4 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper

B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 2.5 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS

A. Well Pipe: 6 inch NPS schedule 40 PVC by 12 inch (300mm)

B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod

electrodes. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. Service entrance ground rod electrodes shall consist of three rods minimum in a delta configuration spaced at 30 feet.

B. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top

flush with finished grade.

C. Provide grounding electrode conductors and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing, structural steel, main cold water pipe and ground rod.

D. Provide bonding to meet NFPA 70 and Regulatory Requirements (i.e., metal duct

work, metal piping, gas piping etc.).

E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.

F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

G. Interface with lightning protection system installed under Section 16620.


H. Bond the end of all conduit stubs with #8 CU to local ground bus or cable tray.

I. Provide ground bar bus at all terminal boards and bond to main electrical room ground bus (#4 CU minimum unless indicated larger on the plans).

J. Provide wall mounted main ground bus (1/4” x 2” x 12” minimum) in main

electrical room and bond to main switchboard with 3/0 CU.

K. Provide wall mounted ground bus bar (1/4” x 2” x 8” minimum) in each distribution electrical room or closet. Bond to load side of step down transformer. If electrical room does not contain a transformer bond to largest panel bond ground bus with #3 CU minimum unless indicated larger on the plans.

L. Provide exothermic connections for all connections made below grade. M. Bond all metal pull/junction box covers used with concrete, plastic, fiberglass,

composite or other non-metal pull boxes to the equipment grounding conductor with #8 CU minimum unless noted otherwise.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16170

EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 14240 – Electric Elevators – Passenger B. Section 15170 – Motors C. Section 1545 – Plumbing Equipment

D. Section 15671 – Air Cooled Condensing Units E. Section 15786 – Computer Room Air Conditioning Units F. Section 15855 – Air Handling Units G. Section 15857 – Built-Up Air Handling Unit H. Section 15870 – Power Ventilators I. Section 15985 – Controls and Sequence of Operation

J. Section 16111 – Conduit K. Section 16123 – Building Wire and Cable

L. Section 16130 – Boxes

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations

C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing

dimensions, configurations, and construction.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Sections 01040 and 16010.

B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

C. Determine connection locations and requirements.

D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation

schedule for equipment.

E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight

flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.

D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated.

Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.


E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as

indicated.

G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.

H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated.

I. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls,

floor, and ceilings. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16180

SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports

B. Anchors and fasteners 1.2 REFERENCES

A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.


C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete surfaces and structural elements: Use expansion anchors, preset inserts, and self drilling anchors.

2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. 3. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts

and hollow wall fasteners. 4. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors, preset inserts, and self

drilling anchors. 5. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 6. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturer:

1. Kindorf 2. Unistrut 3. Beeline

B. Description: Galvanized or Painted steel


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.

D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps and metal banding straps.

E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural

members.

G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.


I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

J. Concrete/insert anchors, thread rods, or similar fasteners installed on side or

bottom of pre-stressed beams are not

acceptable.

K. In wet and damp locations use stainless steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 3/4 inch (25 mm) off wall.

L. All items shall be supported directly from structural portion of the building. All

above ceiling or ceiling mounted items shall be supported directly from building superstructure, except standard lay-in type ceiling lighting fixtures, and small outlet boxes for devices such as exit lights. Lay-in type ceiling fixtures shall be provided with supplemental support wire or chain as specified elsewhere. Outlet boxes shall be attached to ceiling system by means of approved mounting brackets and shall also be provided with supplemental threaded rod hangers from super structure as specified elsewhere. No sagging of the ceiling will be permitted. Adjust supplemental supports accordingly.

M. Wire shall not be used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or

fastened to ceiling suspension wires or to ceiling channels. Support independent of ceiling per NEC-article 300-11(latest addition). Lighting fixtures and devices shall have supplemental supporting as specified herein.

N. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place per NEC; and hangers, supports

or fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits will not be permitted. The required strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables.

O. Parallel groups of conduit or conduit runs in a similar direction; they shall be

grouped together and supported by means of 1½" x 1½", 12 gauge, pre-galvanized zinc (B-Line or approved substitution), conduit channel trapeze hanger system (racking) consisting of concrete inserts, threaded rods, washers, nuts, locknut washers, etc. Where galvanized "L" angle iron is used, conduits shall be individually fastened to the cross members with malleable iron hangars listed and approved for use on "L" angle iron, bolted with proper size cadmium machine bolts, washers and nuts. Conduits supported to unistrut channel shall be individually fastened with two piece unistrut straps with bolts and nuts listed and approved for such use. Mineralak hangars or one hole type straps fastened to Kindorf racking is not acceptable. Beam clamps shall be malleable iron.

P. Hangers for PVC coated conduit shall be PVC coated galvanized conduit.


Q. On concrete or brick construction, insert anchors shall be installed with round head machine screws. In wood construction, round head screws shall be used. An electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in brick, concrete or similar construction. In brick, inserts shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint. Where steel members occur, same shall be drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be fabricated from rust-resisting metal, or approved substitution. Fasteners similar to "TAP-CON" self tapping power driven type are acceptable on interior block walls only. Plastic anchors and explosive fasteners are not

acceptable.

R. Threaded rod hangars shall be galvanized continuous thread type, minimum 3/8" diameter. Increase size as required to support assembly. Bending of rod hangars is not permitted.

S. Support channel (unistrut) shall be 1-1/2" x 1-1/2", 12 gauge, pre-galvanized zinc

(B-Line or approved substitution). 3/4" x 3/4" unistrut channel is acceptable on wall-mounted applications to support raceways at panelboards or where special written permission is granted by A/E.

T. Conduit support racks shall be minimum of 24", increase, distance as required for

quantity of conduits and spare capacity) provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits. Group conduits on channel racking adjacent to each other at sides, allowing all remaining unused space at center as spare capacity. Spacing between conduits shall not exceed 1" unless written permission is granted by architect/engineer.

U. Each rack shall be provided with minimum of two (2) all-thread rod hangars located

at the ends of the channel. Increase number of hangars as required to support assembly.

V. In general conduit supporting devices such as spring type conduit clips

manufactured by Caddy Corporation are not acceptable. Caddy type conduit clips with snap close strap is acceptable for use in dry interior concealed locations, where steel peril type construction is used. Back to back arrangement or attachment to other raceways, piping, etc. is not permitted.

W. All hangers, clips and accessories for supporting shall be UL listed.

X. Support systems shall meet requirements for seismic loads. Refer to general

Conditions of the specifications.

Y. All hangers and mounting hardware clamps shall be made of durable material suitable for the application involved. Excessive corrosive conditions, exterior and wet locations (i.e. kitchens, wash-down, etc.) conditions are encountered, hanger


assemblies, supporting hardware and materials shall be made of malleable iron, hot dipped galvanizing steel, or stainless steel.

Z. Attachment of cables to ceiling system or support wires, regardless if support wire is

a dedicated wire, is prohibited. Support cables directly to building superstructure. Only a vertical cable drop down to a recessed lay-in luminaire can be supported to the fixture support wire with approved fasteners. Vertical cable drop attachment may be by means of Ty-Rap cable tie if approved by the Local Inspecting Authority having jurisdiction and UL plenum rated within plenum air environments.

AA. Materials installed in environmental air plenum s shall be UL Plenum Listed and

bear the appropriate UL markings.

BB. Free-air cable, where specified and permitted elsewhere, shall be supported directly from the superstructure with UL Listed devices intended for such use. Ty-Rap cable ties in conjunction with UL Listed support devices shall be UL plenum rated within plenum air environments.

CC. Comply with requirements of Specification section 16111 and 1690.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates and labels

B. Wire and cable markers

C. Conduit markers 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic, chamfer edges, black front and back with white core, with lettering etched through the outer covering. White engraved letters on black background.


B. Nameplates for emergency power (where applicable) shall be laminated phenolic plastic. Red front and back, with white core, with lettering etched through outer covering, white engraved letters on red background.

C. Letter Size:

1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

D. Nameplates shall adequately describe the function of the particular equipment

involved. Where nameplates are detailed on the drawings, inscription and size of letters shall be as shown and shop drawing submitted for approval. Nameplates for panelboards and switchboards shall include the panel designation, voltage and phase of the supply. For example, “Panel A, 120/208V, 3-phase, 4-wire”. In addition, provide phenolic label in panel to describe where the panel is fed from. For example, “Fed from MDP-1:3:5”. The name of the machine on the nameplates for a particular machine shall be the same as the one used on all motor starters, disconnect and P.B. station nameplates for that machine.

E. The following items shall be equipped with nameplates: All motors, motor

starters, motor-control centers, push button stations, control panels, time switches, disconnect switches, transformers, panelboards, circuit breakers (i.e. all 2 pole, 3 pole C.B.’s), contractors or relays in separate enclosures, power receptacles where the nominal voltage between any pair of contacts is greater than 150V, wall switches controlling outlets that are not located within sight of the controlling switch, high voltage boxes and cabinets, large electrical systems junction and pull boxes (larger than 411/16”), terminal cabinets, terminal boards, and equipment racks. Nameplates shall also describe the associated panel and circuit number (if applicable).

F. All Electrical System panels, transfer switch, etc. shall be labeled as per branch,

i.e., “Panel ABC-Life Safety Branch” (similar for critical or equipment branch).

G. Provide adhesion label on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

H. All Electrical Emergency System panels, transfer switches, etc. shall be labeled as

per branch as defined by NEC, i.e., labeling shall be:

1. "Panel (****)-Emergency Life Safety Branch" for Emergency systems per NEC Article 700.

2. "Panel (****)-Legally Required Standby Branch" for Emergency systems

per NEC Article 701


3. "Panel (****)-Optional Standby Branch" for Emergency systems per NEC Article 702

4. Provide label on interior of each Electrical Emergency panel as follows:

a. Each Emergency Life Safety Branch panelboard label shall read:

"WARNING: PANEL SHALL BE DEDICATED TO THE INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY BRANCH WIRING AS DEFINED BY NEC-700/NFPA-110 AS ESSENTIAL FOR SAFETY TO HUMAN LIFE. CONNECTION OF OTHER LOADS/EQUIPMENT NOT DEFINED BY NEC IS PROHIBITED".

b. Each Emergency Legally Required Standby Branch panelboard

label shall read: "WARNING: PANEL SHALL BE DEDICATED TO THE INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY LEGALLY REQUIRED BRANCH WIRING AS DEFINED BY NEC-701/NFPA-110 WHEN INTERRUPTION COULD CREATE HAZARD OR HAMPER FIRE-FIGHTING OPERATION. CONNECTION OF OTHER LOADS/EQUIPMENT NOT DEFINED BY NEC IS PROHIBITED".

c. Each Emergency optional Standby Branch panelboard label shall

read: "WARNING: PANEL SHALL BE DEDICATED TO EQUIPMENT OWNER DESIRES TO BE ON EMERGENCY THAT IS NOT DEFINED BY NEC-700/NEC-701/NFPA-110 AS EMERGENCY LIFE SAFETY OR EMERGENCY LEGALLY REQUIRED. CONNECTION OF OTHER LOADS/EQUIPMENT DEFINED BY NEC 700/701 IS PROHIBITED".

2.2 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.

B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.

C. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated

on drawings including neutral conductor.

2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on shop drawings.


2.3 CONDUIT/JUNCTION BOX COLOR CODE

A. All conduit system junction boxes (except those subject to view in public areas) shall be color coded as listed below:

Color Code for Junction Boxes Krylon Paint #

System Emergency 277/480 volt Cherry Red 2101

System Emergency 120/208 volt Light Red 2110

Fire Alarm Popsicle Orange 2410

Normal Power 277/480 volt Leather Brown 2501

Normal Power 120/208 volt Glossy Black 1601

Fiber Optics Plum Purple 1929

Sound System Daisy Yellow 1813

Clock Baby Blue 1902

Intercom True Blue 1910

Computer/Data Gold 1701

TV Glossy White 1501

BAS Light Beige 2502

FIDS / BIDS Beige 2504

Security/CCTV Moss Green 2004

Telephone Light Green 2011

Grounding Fluorescent Green #3106

B. Conduits (not subject to public view) longer than 20 feet shall be painted with above color paint band 20 ft. on center. Paint band shall be 4” in length. Where conduit are parallel and on conduit racking, the paint bands shall be evenly aligned. Paint shall be neatly applied and uniformed. Paint boxes and raceways prior to installation or tape conduits and surrounding surfaces to avoid overspray. Paint overspray shall be removed.

C. Junction boxes and conduit located in public areas (i.e. areas that can be seen by

the public) shall be painted to match surface attached to. Provide written request to A/E for interpretation of those public areas which may be in question.

2.4 CONDUIT/JUNCTION BOX MARKER


A. All new and existing junction boxes/cover plates for power, lighting and systems

(except those installed in public areas) shall adequately describe it’s associated panel and circuit reference number(s) within, (i.e. ELRW-2, 4, 6) or systems within (i.e. fire alarm, intercom, etc.). Identification shall be by means of black permanent marker. (Paint 1/2 cover plate with appropriate color as noted in 2.3 above, and mark other 1/2 with associated panel/circuit or system description as described).

B. Identify conduit not installed in public areas with circuit numbers as described

above. Spacing: 20 ft. on center, adjacent to color identification bands. 2.5 DEVICE COVER PLATE IDENTIFICATION

A. Self-adhesive clear printed labels with Black typed letters (pre-printed, dot matrix, or laser).

B. Locations:

1. Each new receptacle cover plate. 2. Each existing receptacle cover plate in areas of remodel/renovation. 3. Each new communications cover plate (Systems Sections 16700 through

16799). 4. Each existing communications cover plate (Systems Sections 16700

through 16799) in areas of remodel/renovation. 5. Fire alarm system control modules, monitor modules and remote test

stations. 6. Each connection to modular office furniture system.

C. Legend:

1. Receptacle plates shall adequately describe its associated panelboard and

circuit reference (i.e., L1A-3).

2. System plates shall adequately describe its terminal board, or terminal cabinet, termination cable identifier, and assigned user code number, (i.e., TTB-LS2-***).

3. Fire alarm control devices shall adequately describe item severed and

assigned address, if addressable, (i.e., AHU-1 Supply ID 12345-***). 2.6 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE


A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.

2.7 SIGNAGE

A. Description: laminated phenloic plastic, chamfer edges, white core, face color as specified elsewhere, with lettering etched through the outer covering, ¼” lettering.

B. Locations:

1. More than one service per NEC 230-2 (if applicable). 2. Emergency Generator Systems per NEC 700-8 (if applicable). 3. Electrical Fire Pump Systems per NFPA-20, Chapter 6 (if applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using stainless steel pop rivets.

C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.

D. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet (2 m).

E. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape

per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

F. Identify junction boxes and outlet boxes.

G. Nameplates installed inside on dead front cover shall be self adhesive tape. (Do not drill or install screws in dead front unless prior approval is granted by equipment manufacture).


H. Install wire markers at all connections and terminations.


UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE 16421-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16421 - UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Service racks

B. Metering transformer cabinets

C. Meter bases 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16426 - Distribution Switchboards: Metering transformer compartment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association)

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System Characteristics: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four- wire, 60 Hertz. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases.



B. Submit Utility Company prepared drawings. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.9 UTILITY FEES

A. Contact the Utility Company to determine if fees, charges or costs are required by the Utility Company for permanent power, installations and hook-ups. Notify the Department if any such fees are required.

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with Utility Company representative.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METER BASES

A. Furnish meter base and metering transformer cabinets per Utility Company specifications.

2.2 PAD FOR UTILITY TRANSFORMER

A. Utility Company transformer pads will be furnished by the Utility Company. 2.3 METERS

A. Utility Company meters will be furnished by the Utility Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION


A. Arrange with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. Contact Utility Company within 10 days of the award of contract and coordinate permanent electric service.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by Utility Company.


ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16441 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fusible switches

B. Nonfusible switches 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16477 - Fuses 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association)

B. NEMA FU1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600

Volts Maximum)

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association)




B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout B. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Square D Co. B. General Electric C. Cutler-Hammer

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, heavy duty type, with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

B. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, heavy duty type, with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1.

1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1 2. Exterior Damp and Wet Locations: 4X (stainless steel)



B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.


FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

D. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16441

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16461-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16461 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Two-winding transformers 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.

B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (International Electrical Testing Association)

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code D. UL 1561



B. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.



B. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and sound level.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions

and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.




B. Record actual locations of transformers in project record documents. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional

heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with

lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Company 2. General Electric 3. Cutler Hammer

B. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type transformers, ratings as indicated.

C. Primary Voltage: 240 volts, 1 phase, unless noted otherwise.

D. Secondary Voltage: 480/240 volts, 1 phase unless noted otherwise. E. Frequency. 60Hz.

F. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:


1. 1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115ºC rise. 2. 16-1000 kVA: Class 220 with 150ºC rise.

G. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35ºC rise above ambient at warmest point at

full load.

H. Winding Taps:

1. Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding.

2. Transformers 15 kVA and larger: shall have a minimum of 6 - 2.5% full capacity primary taps for 480V primaries and a minimum of 2 - 5% full capacity taps for 208V primaries.

I. Sound Levels: Maximum sound levels are as follows:

1. 15-50 kVA: 45 dB 2. 51-150 kVA: 50 dB 3. 151-300 kVA: 55 dB 4. 301-500 kVA: 60 dB 5. 501-700 kVA: 62 dB 6. 701-1000 kVA: 64 dB

J. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for

transformers 300 kVA and larger.

K. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.

L. Mounting:

1. 1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 16-75 kVA: Suitable for floor or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.

M. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.

N. Enclosure: Type 1 for dry locations, Type 3R with weather shield for damp or

exterior locations. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

1. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges


and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49.

O. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

P. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on

rated allowable temperature rise.

Q. Lugs: Suitable for terminating conductors sized for full load ampacity of transformer unit. Transformer lugs and mounting hardware shall be furnished by Manufacturer of transformer and shall be grade 5 with beveled washers. Hardware shall be of suitable size of pad opening per NEMA Standards.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide General Purpose type transformer unless noted otherwise. B. Provide concrete housekeeping pad for floor mounted transformers, pad shall be

4” high and shall extend 4” beyond the sides and front of the transformer. Mount transformer off of wall per the manufactures’ recommendation to allow proper ventilation of the transformer (4” minimum).

C. Set transformer plumb and level.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 16111, 2 feet (600 mm)

minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

E. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets

furnished by the manufacturer.

F. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building structure.

G. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated. Provide spring vibration

isolators suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building structure.

H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16170.




B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Adjusting installed work.

B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.


PANELBOARDS 16470-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Distribution panelboards

B. Branch circuit panelboards 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding

B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification

C. Section 16477 - Fuses 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association)

B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies

D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600

Volts Maximum)

E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards

F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association)

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.



B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout: Submittals for project closeout.

B. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project record documents.

C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of

replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric 3. Cutler-Hammer

B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.


C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each

panelboard.

D. Integrated Short Circuit Rating:

1. All panelboards, bussing and breakers as a unit shall be fully rated or series rated to safely interrupt available short circuit currents. The AIC ratings shown on the drawings are the minimum ratings which can be provided when the available fault current is less than the AIC rating indicated.

E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral

thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.

F. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, molded case

circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. Include shunt trip, where indicated.

G. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.

H. Enclosure:

1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA 1 2. Exterior and Wet Locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel

I. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface type as indicated, fastened with concealed trim

clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.


C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard, provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.

D. Integrated Short Circuit Rating:

1. All panelboards, bussing and breakers as a unit shall be fully rated or

series rated to safely interrupt available short circuit currents. The AIC ratings shown on the drawings are the minimum ratings which can be provided when the available fault current is less than the AIC rating indicated.

E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, thermal magnetic trip circuit

breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

F. Enclosure:

1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA 1 2. Exterior, Damp, and Wet Locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel

G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide.

H. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface type, as indicated, cabinet front with concealed

trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.


A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation".

B. Install panelboards plumb.

C. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6

feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.

D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

E. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.


F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.

G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling, below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16170. I. Circuit breakers shall be molded case type except circuit breakers feeding ATS

shall be current limiting type. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit breakers.

3.3 ADJUSTING


B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.


TOLL OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT 16471-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16471 - TOLL OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT, PANELBOARDS, AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The panelboard shall contain a fully rated main circuit breaker.

B. The panelboard shall be rated as NEMA 1 for indoor installation.

C. The panelboard shall contain (1) 100A, 3P, sub-feed lug kit.

D. The panelboard and control system shall automatically control all toll operations equipment.

E. The system shall be used as a networked system for controlling loads via external

low voltage inputs, and/or from its internal time-of-day clock.

F. The system shall include branch circuit overcurrent protection and remote power switching, low voltage switch inputs, control logic functionality and shall all fit within a standard lighting panelboard enclosure.

G. To assure seamless integration, all major system components shall have a

common manufacturer. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. Required UL Listings: UL 489 for Molded Case Circuit Breakers, UL 67 for Panelboards, UL 50 for Boxes and Enclosures, and UL 916 for Energy Management Equipment.

B. NEMA Compliance: PB-1 for Panelboards

C. NEC 110-10 Compliance

D. FCC Approval: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC Emissions

Standards specified in Part 15 Subpart J for Class A applications. 1.3 SYSTEM START-UP AND TRAINING

A. Start-Up: After the system has been installed, and the documentation delivered to the Owner, the contractor shall secure the services of a factory trained manufacturer’s representative for two days to verify correct operation of all system components.


B. Training: At system start-up, the contractor shall arrange for the factory

representative to train the owner’s personnel.

C. Factory Support: Factory fax/telephone support shall be available free of charge during normal business hours to answer programming and application questions during the warranty period.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one year from the date of installation or eighteen months from date of purchase.


A. The panelboard control system shall be POWERLINK-G3 3000 Level as manufactured by Square D Company.

2.2 PANELBOARD CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The control system shall consist of a microprocessor-based control electronics with remote operated circuit breakers. The circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent protection meeting or exceeding the fault current of the system that the panelboard is being applied.

1. The control system shall meet or exceed the following capabilities:

a. Individual remote control for 42 branch circuits.

b. Up to sixteen 2-wire maintained dry-contact inputs for connection

to external low voltage (24 VDC or below) switch contacts.

c. Zone creation of multiple branch circuits and control of individual branch circuits or zones.

d. Individual branch circuit and zone override.

e. True closed loop control by monitoring branch circuit breaker

status based on actual system voltage at load side terminal.

f. Downloadable firmware that will permit field installation of newest features in existing systems.


B. All control components shall be installed in a conventional panelboard enclosure. Suitable barriers between Class 1 and Class 2 wiring shall be provided.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. To minimize installation labor and space requirements, the remote operated circuit breakers, power interface module and control module shall be integral to the lighting panelboard.

B. Remote Operated Circuit Breakers

1. All remote operated branch circuit breakers shall provide overload and

short circuit protection suitable for that location in the electrical system, as defined in the panelboard schedules. Remote operated power switching devices shall provide the following:

a. Load switching endurance rating of 200,000 open/close operations

at full load and 0.8 lagging power factor.

b. 15A, 20A, and 30A current ratings shall be available for remote operated power switching devices. Power switching devices shall provide integral branch circuit overcurrent protection as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC), and shall be either fully rated or shall have published series connected ratings for providing adequate protection at that point in the system.

c. Power switching devices shall be available in single-, two-, and

three-pole configurations.

d. UL Listing SWD rating on 15A and 20A 1-, 2- and 3-pole branches, UL Listed HACR rating and UL Listed HID rating on all remotely operated power switching devices.

e. Handle that mechanically opens power switching device contacts

when moved to the OFF position and disables remote control capabilities of the device.

f. Operating mode selector button on each power switching device

shall be provided to enable or disable remote operated function of the device independent of the handle.

g. Visible flag to clearly indicate the status of the circuit breaker

contacts. Status condition shall include: ON, OFF, TRIPPED. The visible flag shall be mechanical in nature, directly tied to the breaker mechanism, and shall be provided in addition to any status indicator supplied by the system electronics. Switching devices


not equipped with such an indicator shall be equipped with an alarm and auxiliary contacts.

h. All individual power switching devices rated for 120/240 or

208Y/120 VAC shall have a short circuit interrupting rating of 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes, minimum.

i. Panel shall be provided with a main circuit breaker and shall series

tested rated and shall have a short circuit interrupting rating of 42,000 rms symmetrical amperes, minimum.

j. Power switching devices shall meet all NEC requirements for

circuit breakers; shall be UL Listed as circuit breakers.

k. All electronic modules and circuit breakers in the panelboard shall be mounted in the positions and control the loads as indicated on the panelboard drawings.

l. Panelboards shall accept standard circuit breakers for loads not

controlled by the system.

C. Interconnections

1. All interconnections between circuit breakers, control buses and power interface modules shall meet NEC and UL requirements for Class 1 control circuits.

2. Modular control buses shall be used to provide control power and

communications to the remote operated branch breakers.

D. Power Interface Module

1. Power interface module shall be provided to supply control power for the operation of the remotely operated circuit breakers, power for low voltage inputs, and power for the electronics and communications.

2. The module shall provide screw type terminals for up to sixteen 2-wire

maintained or 2-wire momentary inputs, or eight 3-wire momentary inputs for connection to external low voltage (24 VDC or below) switch contacts.

E. Control Module

1. A control module shall be provided where indicated. The control module

shall provide time clock, communications, and programming functionality. There are two front panel display options:


a. Display control module shall have high-resolution graphics LCD display and keypad that will permit programming of the system, control override of the breaker status, give electronic indication of the breaker status and display diagnostic information at the front panel.

(1) Provide a display control module for each lighting control

panelboard.

b. The control module with time-of-day control shall meet or exceed the following capabilities:

(1) Ability to execute up to 4 daily schedules. (2) 365-day calendar with automatic leap year correction, and

daylight savings time adjustment (3) Astronomical clock with sunrise/sunset (4) 7-day repeating scheduler (5) 12-hour AM/PM or 24-hour military time format (6) 32 special holiday/event periods (7) Programmable sequence delay of circuit breakers (8) Local display of day/date/time (with available LCD

display) (9) Adjustable timer for inputs (time overrides) (10) Priority maintained inputs (11) Adjustable flash notice assignable to time-of-day or timed

inputs commands (12) Capacitor back-up power for time clock back up for 30

days.

2. The control module shall have downloadable firmware so that the latest production features may be added in the future without replacing the module.

2.4 NETWORK

A. RS-485 network option shall enable the panelboard lighting control system to connect with other control systems.

1. User may set-up, monitor and control any panelboard connected to the

network from a remote workstation.

2. Network shall be configured to support all panelboards and personal computer workstations as required.


2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. The software shall provide a user-friendly interface for set-up and maintenance of input-based and time-based schedules.

B. Software shall provide remote monitoring and control of the system or individual

remotely operated circuit breakers.

C. Operates on a Windows 3.1/Windows 2003 platform. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION

A. Installation

1. The panelboard control system with remotely operated circuit breakers shall be installed and wired completely as shown on the plans by the contractor.

2. All remote control wiring shall be installed in accordance with Article

725, Class 2 of the National Electrical Code and local codes.

3. Wire size shall be as recommended by manufacturer, but shall not be smaller than #24 AWG.

4. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and

the NEC.

5. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system.


ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16476 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current

curves, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D Company B. General Electric


C. Cutler Hamer 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.

1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning

equipment branch circuits. 2. Include shunt trip, where indicated.

B. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, molded case

circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. Include shunt trip, where indicated.

C. Solid-state Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, with electronic sensing,

timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings.

1. Ground fault trip, ground fault sensing integral with circuit breaker. 2. Instantaneous trip. 3. Adjustable short time trip. 4. Stationary mounting, drawout construction. 5. Include shunt trip, where indicated.

2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES A. Provide accessories as scheduled, to NEMA AB 1. B. Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking. C. Provide mechanical trip device. D. Provide grounding lug in each enclosure. E. Provide Products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where so applied. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1

1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA 1 2. Exterior and Wet Locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel


B. Finish using manufacturer's standard enamel finish, gray color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with

Section 16190. C. Height: 5 ft (1.6 M) to operating handle. D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test each circuit breaker to NEMA AB 1. B. Inspect each circuit breaker visually. C. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker. D. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position. E. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping

time to NEMA AB 1 requirements. F. Include description of testing and results in test report. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust trip settings so that circuit breakers coordinate with other overcurrent

protective devices in circuit. B. Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and fault

currents. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16476

FUSES 16477-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16477 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fuses

B. Spare fuse cabinet 1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time-current curves.



B. Record actual fuse sizes. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Provide two fuse pullers. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01740.

B. Provide three of each size and type fuse installed.

FUSES 16477-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01


A. Bussman B. Gould Shawmut C. Little Fuse

2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

C. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).

D. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).

E. Power Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).

F. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).

G. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).

H. Lighting Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (non-time delay).

I. Power Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).

J. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).

2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified.

B. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock.

C. Finish: Gray Enamel


A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

FUSES 16477-3 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily

read.

C. Install spare fuse cabinet in main electric room. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16477

ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16481 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manual motor starters

B. Magnetic motor starters

C. Combination magnetic motor starters 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices

B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

B. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association

C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers

D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

E. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory


Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Provide three of each size and type fuse installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D Company B. General Electric C. Cutler-Hammer

2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS

A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, NO and NC auxiliary contact, and push button operator.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose

Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator.

C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually

operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, with toggle operator.

D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 or 4 as required for the application.

2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.


B. Reversing Controllers: Include electrical interlock and integral time delay

transition between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation.

C. Two Speed Controllers: Include integral time delay transition between FAST and SLOW speeds.

D. Coil operating voltage: Match control voltage.

E. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; bimetal.

F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or as required for application.

2.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each normally open and closed contacts in addition to seal-in contact.

B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty oiltight type.

C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150.

D. Pushbuttons: Shrouded type.

E. Indicating Lights: Transformer LED type.

F. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

G. Relays: NEMA ICS 2

H. Control Power Transformers: Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond

unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. Match control voltage. 2.5 DISCONNECTS

A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with motor circuit protector disconnect in common enclosure.

B. Motor Circuit Protector: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral

instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section

16190.

C. Height: 5 ft (1.6 M) to operating handle.

D. Install fuses in fusible switches.

E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics.

F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.

G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor

served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.


A. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16481

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 16485-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16485 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General purpose contactors

B. Lighting contactors 1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION


B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


B. Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled on project record documents.

C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and

contacts. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric 3. Substitutions: Not permitted.

B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.

C. Size: As indicated.

D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R or 4as required to meet conditions

of installation.

E. Accessories:

1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF 2. Selector Switch: ON/OFF, ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC 3. Indicating Light: RED, GREEN 4. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open, normally closed, field

convertible. 2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.

C. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control.

E. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

F. Poles: As indicated.

G. Contact Rating: 30 amperes.

H. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 4X as required to meet conditions of

installation.


I. Accessories:

1. Selector Switch: ON/OFF, ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC 2. Indicating Light: RED, GREEN 3. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open, normally closed, field

convertible. 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pushbuttons and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.

B. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2, transformer type.

C. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.

C. Height: 5 ft to center.

D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16485

ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH 16496-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16496 - ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic transfer switch 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. B. Section 16620 - Package Engine-Generator System: Testing requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code B. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems

C. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

D. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems E. U.L. – 1008 F. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) G. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code H. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory


Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01740.

B. Operation Data: Include instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions [when engine generator is running.]

C. Maintenance Data: Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication

schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three

years experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 110, and NFPA 101. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL and acceptable to authority having

jurisdiction as suitable for purpose to supply power for Life Safety emergency systems.



B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional

heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs

provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure and finish.



A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switch for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide two of each special tool required for maintenance.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 110. B. Maintain one copy of document on site.


A. Russ Electric B. ONAN C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, automatic transfer switch. B. Provide the automatic transfer switch(es) as shown on the drawings with voltage

and continuous current ratings shall be as indicated. C. Provide a 2-pole (single phase applications), 3-pole (three phase applications)

transfer switch with a solid neutral fully rated CU neutral lug. D. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper

operation and compliance with the specification requirements.


E. The transfer switch shall be double-throw, actuated by two electrical operators momentarily energized, and connected to the electrical operator by a simple over center type linkage with minimum transfer time of 400 milliseconds. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction. In-phase monitors will not be considered.

F. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically

and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs and shall be silver-tungsten alloy, Separate arcing contacts, with magnetic blowouts, shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable.

G. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. H. All control wires shall be 600-volts SIS switchboard type. All control wire

termination’s are to be identified with tubular, sleeve-type markers. I. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise

indicated. Enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosure shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall exceed UL-1008 minimum wire bending space.

J. Each transfer switch shall be equipped with a door-mounted pocket, housing an

operations and maintenance manual. K. The switch shall come equipped with copper/aluminum solderless bolted

pressure-type lugs. L. All enclosure doors shall have three point latches. M. All bolted connections shall have Belleville compression-type washers. N. Control wires shall be terminated with locking spade-type connectors. O. Solid-state components shall have an operating range of -20°C to +55°C and shall

meet IEEE Standard 472-1974. P. Switch shall be top or bottom accessible. Q. Switch shall be capable of replacing main contacts without removing main power

cables.


R. Main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch.

S. Withstand Ratings

1. Switch(es) shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., Standard

UL-1008 with 3-cycle short circuit closing and withstand values as follows:

RMS Symmetrical 3-Cycle Closing Current Limiting Amperes and Withstand Fuse Rating

100 - 400 42,000 200,000 600 - 800 65,000 200,000 1000 - 1200 85,000 200,000 1600 - 4000 100,000 200,000

2. During the 3-cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact

welding or damage, and there shall be contact continuity across all phases after completion of testing. The 3-cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL-1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.

3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacturer

shall include post endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full-rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests.

4. When the transfer switch withstand and close-in values are less than the

interrupting rating of the circuit breaker that is specified to protect the circuit, or the available short circuit amps from the generator set, the contractor shall provide a fusible disconnect with current limiting fuses on the line side feeders for the transformer switch.

2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A. Adjustable, close-differential, solid-state, 3-phase, sensing relay energized from the normal source, factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 80% of rated voltage.

B. Time delay to override momentary normal source power outages. To delay engine

start signal and transfer switch operation. Adjustable 0.5-3 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds.


C. Time delay on transfer to emergency. Pneumatic type, adjustable 1-300 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds.

D. Time delay relays to control contact transition time ON transfer to either source,

pneumatic type, adjustable 1-300 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. (Model RMTD only)

E. Time delay on retransfer to normal. Motor driven type, adjustable 0-25 minutes,

factory set at 5 minutes with engine overrun to provide fixed 5-minute unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal.

F. Load test switch to simulate normal power failure. (Maintained type) G. Contact to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting or other

customer functions. H. Contact to open on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting or other

customer functions. I. Green pilot light to indicate switch in normal position. J. Red pilot light to indicate switch in emergency position. K. Plant exerciser with 7-day programmable timer to automatically exercise

generating plant. Adjustable type with minimum of 1-minute increments and battery back-up with two position ON-OFF exerciser mode selector switch to select “ON” (exercising capability) and “OFF” (exercise bypass), and switch to select “NO LOAD” (switch will not transfer) or “LOAD” (switch will transfer) exercise period.

L. Four-position selector switch with “OFF,” “Hand Crank,” “Load Test,” and

“Automatic” positions. M. (2) Auxiliary contacts closed in normal position. Wired to terminal strip. N. (2) Auxiliary contacts closed in emergency position. Wired to terminal strip. O. Adjustable relay to prevent transfer to emergency until voltage and frequency of

generating plant have reached acceptable limits. Factory set at 90% of rated value.

P. (2) time delay contacts that open simultaneously just prior to transfer in either

direction. These contacts close after a time delay (adjustable 1-300 seconds) after transfer. Pneumatic type, factory set at 3 seconds.


Q. (2) time delay contacts that open simultaneously 1-300 seconds (adjustable)

before transfer in either direction and re-close instantaneously after transfer. Factory set at 5 seconds.

R. (2) time delay contacts that open simultaneously 5 seconds prior to transfer in

either direction (1-300 seconds adjustable). The contacts re-close 3 seconds after transfer.

S. Automatic synchronizing check relay to prevent retransfer from emergency to

normal until the normal and emergency sources are within acceptable limits. T. Safe manual operator which allows manual operation of the switch without

opening the enclosure door. 2.4 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. The transfer switch shall be equipped to provide the following sequence of operation:

1. Should the voltage of the normal source drop below a preset value

(adjustable 70-100%) set at 80% on any phase after a time delay (adjustable 0.5-6 seconds) set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips, the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant.

2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant

has reached a preset value (adjustable 90-100%) set at 90% of rated voltage and frequency.

3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value

(adjustable 70-100%) set at 90% of rated voltage, an adjustable time delay period of 0-31 minutes (factory set at 5 minutes) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source.

4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate

at no load for a fixed 5-minute period.

B. The transfer switch shall be equipped with the following accessories and design features to provide operation as described above:

1. Adjustable (70-100%, solid-state, 3-phase sensing energized from the

normal source set to pick up at 9-% and drop out at 80% of rated voltage.


2. Time delay to override momentary normal source power outages (delays

engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Adjustable 0.5-6 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds if not otherwise specified.

3. Time delay relay to control contact transition time on transfer to either

source, adjustable 0-255 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. 4. Time delay on retransfer to normal, adjustable 0-31 minutes, factory set at

5 minutes if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide fixed 5 minuet unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal.

5. A maintained-type test switch shall be included to simulate a normal

power failure. 6. Contact, rated 15 amps, 24 volts DC to close on failure of normal source

to initiate engine starting or other customer functions. 7. Contact, rated 15 amps, 24 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source

to initiate engine starting or other customer functions. 8. Pilot lights shall be mounted on the cabinet door to indicate switch

position. (Green in normal position - Accessory 9a; Red in emergency position - Accessory 9b.)

9. Two auxiliary contacts shall be mounted on the main shaft; one closed on

normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts swill be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections Auxiliary contacts shall be rated at 10 amps, and 15 amps, 24 volts for switches 1000-4000 amps.

10. Voltage/frequency relay to prevent transfer to emergency until voltage and

frequency of generating plant have reached acceptable limits. Adjustable 90-100%, factory set at 90% if not otherwise specified.

C. Transfer switches shall transfer to emergency within the time limits as required by

the National Electrical Code for each branch of emergency (10 seconds for life safety, 60 seconds for critical).

D. When more than one emergency branch is shown, time delay relays shall be

provided on the transfer to emergency operation for critical and equipment branch transfer switches. Time delay shall be adjustable 1-300 seconds and shall be adjusted in stages with the limits of the N.E.C. and as follows:

1. Life Safety Branch - no time delay on transfer to emergency.


2. Critical Branch - shall transfer to emergency after life safety branch has

transferred to emergency and generator has recovered to 90% of rated voltage and frequency.

3. Equipment Branch - shall transfer to emergency after critical branch has

transferred to emergency and generator has recovered to 90% of rated voltage and frequency.

NOTE: These time delays shall not effect or be a function of contact transition

time as required above. 2.5 ENCLOSURE

A. Enclosure: ICS 6, Type 1.12. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

2.6 SURGE SUPPRESSION

A. Provide surge suppressor on all transfer switches. Refer to section 16691 for suppressor requirements.


A. Verify conditions under the provisions of Section 01040. B. Verify that surface is suitable for transfer switch installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide all associate control wiring to the generator as required.

B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. C. Provide all interface control wiring and conduit as required to provide require

emergency operation of equipment on project as applicable, i.e. elevators, building automation system, fire alarm control panel, smoke control system, etc.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES


A. Prepare and start systems. B. Site Test: An installation check and building load test shall be performed by the

manufacturer’s local representative. The engineer, regular operators and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting, transfer of the load and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination.

C. Load and Bank Tests:

1. After the building load test, a load bank test will be performed. This test

shall be done with resistive dry load banks, in the presence of the engineer and owner. Test shall be performed during regular business hours and days only - Monday - Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.

a. 1 hour 50% b. 1 hour 75% c. 3 hours 100% d. 10 minutes cool down

2. During test a written log shall be maintained at 15-minute intervals with

the following:

a. Ambient Air Temperature b. Amperes c. Hertz d. Oil Pressure e. Water Temperature f. Battery Charging g. Exhaust Stack Temperature h. Noise Level in dba (each side) i. Fuel for load test to be included in bid

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 16095. B. Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal and emergency modes.


INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires and accessories

B. Emergency lighting units

C. Exit signs

D. Ballasts E. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply

F. Lamps

G. Luminaire accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns

B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications

C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium

Lamps (Multiple Supply Type)

D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements


F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.




B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout: 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Submittals for project closeout.

B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish Products as scheduled. 2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Furnish products as scheduled.

B. Description: Self-contained emergency lighting unit.

C. Battery: 12 volt, with 1.5 hour capacity.

D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.

E. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.

F. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery

supply.

G. Electrical Connection: Connect to local area (within same room) lighting circuit ahead of switching. Connection shall be hardwired via conduit (cord and plug connection shall not be allowed).


2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Furnish products as scheduled.

B. Description: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency lighting unit.

C. Battery: 12 volt, nickel-calcium, lead calcium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.

D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.

E. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.

F. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery

supply.

G. Lamps: Manufacturers standard.

H. Electrical Connection: Connect to local area (within same room) lighting circuit ahead of switching. Connection shall be hardwired via conduit (cord and plug connection shall not be allowed).

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Advance 2. Universal 3. Sylvania/Osram

B. Description: ANSI C82.2, high power factor type, sound rated (group A), instant

start electronic type ballast with passive power factor correction, active power factor correction is not acceptable. Ballasts shall have less than 10% harmonic distortion total harmonic distortion. Ballasts with high line starting current (greater than 125% of operating current) are not acceptable. Ballasts shall be suitable for lamps specified.

C. Exterior ballasts shall meet requirements specified above and shall be for reliable

starting to -20ºF.

D. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.

E. Source Quality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.


F. All ballasts shall have been provided with in-line fuse protection. 2.5 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Advance 2. Universal 3. Sylvania/Osram

B. Description: ANSI C82.4 metal halide or high pressure sodium lamp ballast,

suitable for lamp specified. Ballast shall be pulse start high power factor type with multi-type line connections for 120, 208, 277, and 480 volts.


starting to -20ºF.


E. All ballasts shall have been provided with in-line fuse protection. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bodine 2. Chloride 3. Light alarms

B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast

compartment of fluorescent luminaire.

C. Lamp Ratings: (2) two F32T8 lamp providing 1400 lumens, minimum.

D. Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10 year life.

E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an assembled luminaire.

2.7 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Sylvania/Osram 2. General Electric (unless indicated otherwise on the drawings). 3. Substitutions: Not permitted.


B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire.

C. Fluorescent lamp color temperature shall be 4100 degrees Kelvin with a minimum

CRI of 82 and minimum lumen output as follows: Watts Lumens

1. Compact Fluorescent 9 525 2. Compact Fluorescent 13 900 3. Compact Fluorescent 18 1200 4. Compact Fluorescent 26 1800 5. Compact Fluorescent 32 2400 6. Compact Fluorescent 42 3200 7. T8 Fluorescent 32 3100

D. Low temperature lamps and ballasts shall be provided for all damp label, wet

label, and/or exterior applications.

E. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.

B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of

ceiling framing.

C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling

directly from building structure Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support surface mounted luminaires Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, screws, rivets, or suitable clips.

F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.

G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet

regulatory requirements for fire rating.


H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings, as scheduled.

J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

K. Provide thermal protection for all recessed incandescent fixtures.

L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation

suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.

M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.

O. Connect battery operated emergency light fixtures to local lighting circuit ahead

of all switches. Provide and install all wiring as required for proper operation.

P. Where ceiling mounted fixtures are called for in the Light Fixtures Schedule and on the drawings, this Contractor shall provide fixture trims and supports as required to match type of ceiling system which will be furnished. No ceiling fixtures shall be ordered until the Ceiling System installer has given written approval of the method and location of fixture hanging and fixture type. Fixtures supported by suspended ceiling systems shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by mechanical means, such as bolts, screws, or rivets. Clips identified for use with the type of ceiling framing member(s) and fixture(s) shall also be permitted.

Q. In addition to attaching ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to ceiling system, this

contractor shall support lay-in type fixtures to superstructure above by means of 12-gauge safety wire or jack chain. Safety wire shall be attached to from each corner of fixture and be connected directly to building structure. Surface mounted fixtures and/or ceiling boxes shall be supported to superstructure with all-thread rod.

R. All interior and exterior light fixtures shall not have any labels exposed to normal

viewing angles. This includes manufacturer labels and U.L. labels. All labels shall be concealed within the body of the fixture and/or luminaire. No manufacturers name or logo shall appear on the exterior of any light fixtures unless approved in writing by the engineer.

S. Miscellaneous (provide and install complete):


T. Dimming ballasts for all fluorescent lights connected to dimming circuits as required to match dimmer unit/system.

U. Low voltage transformers for all low voltage light fixtures.

V. Tents as required for fixtures in fire rated ceilings as per applicable codes.

W. Thermal protection for all fixtures with tents or fixtures surrounded by insulation

as per applicable codes.

X. Zero degree ballast for outdoor lighting fixtures.

Y. Heat removal or air supply slot covers for all fixtures requiring them as determined by mechanical engineer.

Z. Ceiling surface mounted fluorescent fixtures installed in exposed ceiling areas are

to suspend from ceiling structure with minimum 3/8" all-thread rods and 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" Kindorf channels, full length of fixture/row. Mount outlet box at structure with flexible connection to fixture.

AA. Coordinate fixtures installed in mechanical rooms with piping and ductwork prior

to installation and relocate fixtures as required to provide proper illumination and access.

BB. Electrical contractor shall remotely locate all transformers called for in these

specifications in a well ventilated and easily accessible space to comply with all codes. Revise circuitry as shown on plans as required to facilitate transformer/fixture location.

CC. All light fixtures shall have label near lamp socket, out of view of public stating

maximum wattage of lamp allowed in fixture. Maximum wattage to be stated is wattage as shown on schedule of lighting equipment herein. Circuits are based on these wattages, circuitry, etc. Any failure to comply with this requirement shall be responsibility of contractor. Location of labels must meet approval of lighting designer, architect and engineer.

DD. Downlights with horizontal lamps shall be installed with the same lamp

orientation throughout the facility. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING



B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated, as directed.

C. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.4 CLEANING


B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS


B. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.

B. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16510

SITE LIGHTING 16530-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16530 - SITE LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Exterior luminaires and accessories

B. Poles 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Foundations for poles. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns

B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps-Specifications

C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium

Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

D. ANSI O5.1 - Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles

E. IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting

F. IES RP-20 - Lighting for Parking Facilities

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire which is not a standard Product of the manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.




B. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.



B. Maintenance Data: For each luminaire. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.


A. Section 16010 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Section 01040 - Coordination

B. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 16010 for substitutions and product options.

2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Magnetek 2. Universal 3. General Electric


B. Description: ANSI C82.2, high power factor type, sound rated (group A), instant

start electronic type ballast with passive power factor correction, active power factor correction is not acceptable. Ballasts shall have less than 10% harmonic distortion total harmonic distortion. Ballasts with high line starting current (greater than 125% of operating current) are not acceptable. Ballasts shall be suitable for lamps specified.


starting to -20ºF.


E. Source Quality Control: Certify fluourescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.

F. All ballasts shall have been provided with in-line fuse protection.

2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Magnetek 2. Universal 3. General Electric

B. Description: ANSI C82.4 metal halide or high pressure sodium lamp ballast,

suitable for lamp specified. Ballast shall be pulse start high power factor type with multi-type line connections for 120, 208, 277, and 480 volts.


starting to -20ºF.


E. All ballasts shall have been provided with in-line fuse protection. 2.4 LAMPS

A. Refer to Section 16510. 2.5 POLES

A. Manufacturers: Match specified fixture provide as scheduled with following accessories.


B. Base: Breakaway C. Accessories:

1. Handhole 2. Anchor bolts 3. Anchor bolt base cover 4. Pole and fixture assembly shall be wind rated for 150 miles per hour.


A. Provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in accordance with Section 03300.

B. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each

base.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Bond luminaires metal accessories and/or metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole (5/8” x 20’0” copperweld ground rod) and bond to pole using a Class I Lightning Protection copper conductor.


A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation.

B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance

requirements.

C. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon.

3.3 ADJUSTING


B. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution indicated on Drawings as directed.


3.4 CLEANING


B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.

D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01740 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.

B. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16530

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16610-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16610 – TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Provide and install all materials, labor and auxiliaries required to furnish and install complete surge suppression for the protection of building electrical and electronics systems from the effects of line induced transient voltage surge and lightning discharge as indicated on drawings or specified in this section for power systems with voltages between 120VAC to 480VAC (single phase or three phase) and for all communications and alarm systems (i.e. data, voice, security, etc.)

B. Provide surge suppression equipment for the following equipment:

1. On each main electrical service panel as call for on the drawings. 2. On distribution and branch panels as called for on drawings. 3. All electronic communications equipment installed per all sections of 16700

including but not limited to: security, telephone, and radio systems. 4. All or any electronic equipment installed under Division 16 including

electronic time clocks, controls systems, etc. 5. All or any electronic equipment installed under Division 15 including:

electronic time clocks, halon systems, control systems, building management systems, etc.

6. Site lighting pole light circuits (at pole). 7. Additional locations as required by NFPA 780. 8. On all A.T.S. (automatic transfer switches). 9. On each conductor pair and cable sheath entering or leaving a building. 10. On any and all lease telephone lines. 11. Existing suppressors shown on the drawings shall remain active unless note

for replacement.

C. It is understood that each manufacturer or the electronic equipment being protected has different circuit requirements; therefore this specification is a modified performance specification. Contractor must provide the best type suppressor that matches these specifications and matches the equipment being protected.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. UL 1449 B. UL 1283 listed

Edition listed

C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, C62.45-2002 D. NEMA LS-1 B 1992 Section 2.2.7


E. IEEE Std. 1100-1999 Section 8.6.1 F. ANSI C84.1, American National Standard for Electric Power Systems and

Equipment B Voltage Ratings (60 Hertz). G. NFPA 780 - Lightning Protection Code, latest edition. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code(NEC), current adopted year. Article 285 (2005

and later edition) 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications B. SVR: Suppressed Voltage Rating C. SPD: Surge Protection Device

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements of the Contract Documents and Section 16012.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; bill of

materials of number of MOV’s installed per phase with MOV part number and surge current rating, operating weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

C. Product Certificates: For transient voltage suppression devices, signed by product

manufacturer certifying compliance with the following standards:

1. UL 1283 2. UL 1449 3. UL 1449

Edition certification listing and classification page

4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code - NEC 285 latest edition Edition fault current test report

D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Submit Product Data for each type of suppressor.



A. Submit operation and maintenance (O&M) data as called for in Section 16098.

B. O&M data to include:

1. All approved shop drawings, product data, and/or cutsheets. 2. Installation, connection, and maintenance information on each type of surge

suppression. 3. Procedure and/or timetable for recommended periodic inspection of devices

to determine continued usefulness, as applicable. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All surge suppression devices shall be manufactured by a company normally engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for electrical and electronics systems equipment.

B. Manufacturing facility shall operate a Quality System Certified as ISO 9001:2000 (or

latest version) Compliant.

C. CE Low Voltage Directive Compliant

D. The surge suppressor manufacturer shall provide requested technical assistance through support (including on-site as needed) by a factory-trained representative.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source

from a single manufacturer. F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical

performance of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

H. Product Standards:

1. Comply with IEEE C62.41.1, “IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits”, IEEE C62.41.2, “IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits”, and test devices according to IEEE C62.45,


“IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits”.

2. Comply with NEMA LS 1, “Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices”. 3. Comply with UL 1283, “Electromagnetic Interference Filters,” and UL 1449

2nd Edition, “Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors”. 4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code article 285 latest edition


A. Equipment Certification: Surge suppression equipment shall be listed by Underwriter Laboratories, shall bear the U.L. seal and be marked in accordance with referenced standard. Surge suppression equipment shall be U.L. listed and labeled for intended use.

B. Surge suppression devices shall be installed and located in accordance with

requirements of all applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes (including NFPA 780 and NFPA 70).

C. Comply with all standards and guides as listed under “References” above.

1.8 COORDINATION/PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify proper grounding is in place.

B. Verify proper clearances, space, etc. is available for surge suppressor.

C. Coordinate so that proper overcurrent device, as recommended by manufacturer, is installed to feed each surge suppression device.

D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

5. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 6. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written

permission.

E. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:


1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C)3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, no condensing.

.

4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m)

above sea level.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. For Data line Suppressors, Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Any suppressor, that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the

warranty period (to include failure of visual failure indicators) shall be replaced or repaired by the manufacturer during the warranty period. The manufacturer shall provide replacement units to the owner for installation


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. Advanced Protection Technologies or equal

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

2. TVSS shall be UL 1449 3. Install external TVSS to distribution equipment with installation leads short

as possible.

Edition listed.

4. TVSS marked with a 200kA short-circuit current rating. 5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 6. Integral disconnect switch 7. Replaceable modules 8. Modes of Protection: Line to Neutral, Line to Ground, Line to Line, and

Neutral to Ground


9. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

10. Retain subparagraph above or first subparagraph below depending on service entrance equipment.

11. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

12. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 13. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 14. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of

protection status. 15. Surge-event operations counter.

B. Peak Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per phase

C. Connection Means: Permanently wired, connected on the load side of the service

entrance overcurrent protection, and meet the TVSS manufacturer’s instructions for overcurrent protection (breaker or fuse size).

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for circuits with voltages of 120/240V, 1-Phase,

3-Wire shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 2. Line to Ground: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 3. Neutral to Ground: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 4. Line to Line: 600V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W

2.3 SUPPRESSOR FOR DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular design incorporating sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. TVSS shall be UL 1449 2. Install external TVSS to distribution equipment with installation leads short

as possible.

Edition listed.

3. TVSS marked with a 200kA short-circuit current rating. 4. Modes of Protection: Line to Neutral, Line to Ground, Line to Line, and

Neutral to Ground 5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground

bus.

B. Peak Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase


C. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for circuits with voltages of 120/240V, 1-Phase, 3-Wire shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 2. Line to Ground: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 3. Neutral to Ground: 330V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W 4. Line to Line: 700V for 120/240V, 1PH, 3W

2.4 SUPPRESSORS FOR POWER LINE CORD/DIRECT WIRED (120 VAC) SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

7. TVSS shall be UL 1449 8. 15 & 30 Amp, 120 V rated. All continuous current bearing components must

be either 15 or 30 Amp rated, minimum; depending on Location Load usage.

Edition listed.

9. Suppressors shall provide three suppression modes: Line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground.

10. Suppressor shall provide a pulse life rating of 3,000 amperes (8/20µs waveform) every thirty (30) seconds for 2,000 occurrences.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 13 kA per phase

C. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for circuits with voltages of 120/240V, 1-Phase,

2-Wire shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 330V for 120V, 1PH, 2W 2. Line to Ground: 330V for 120V, 1PH, 2W 3. Neutral to Ground: 330V for 120V, 1PH, 2W

2.5 DATA LINE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular DIN RAIL design.

1. Must be designed to U.L. 497B and/or UL-497B listed and labeled. 2. Plug-in replaceable DIN RAIL modules 3. Suppressor shall provide a pulse life rating of 3,000 amperes (8/20µs

waveform) every thirty (30) seconds for 2,000 occurrences.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 20 kA per phase. C. Maximum clamping voltage at 10,000 amperes, 8/20µs current waveform, shall not

exceed the peak of the normal applied signal voltage by 200%.


2.6 TELEPHONE LINE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design.

1. Must be designed to U.L. 497B and/or UL-497B listed and labeled. 2. Plug-in replaceable modules design to fit on standard M1-50 block 3. Must be installed with matching ground rail 4. Provide applicable breakdown voltages of either 270V, 200V, or 65V

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating (10x1000 µs): 200A Tip and Ring to

Ground 2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA Type 1 enclosures shall be used for all enclosures inside of the building and

NEMA Type 3R enclosures for exterior applications. 2.8 ADDITIONAL SUPPRESSOR PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Exterior Lighting Poles.

1. UL-1449 2. L-G, N-G, L-N and/or L-G, L-L Protection modes, (as applicable).

Ed. Listed and/or UL-1449 Registered (backwards RU)

3. MOV shunt type protection. 4. Indicator lamps for each protected phase. 5. Modular solid state, fail-safe, 30 Ampere models. 6. Enclosures:

a. Encapsulated, fire retardant, high impact, phenolic or plastic housing

or metal enclosure.

7. Peak Let-Through Voltage, ANSI/IEEE Std. C62.41-Category B3/C1, (L-N), 6 kV x 3 kA, (8 x 20μs):

a. 120V, 1ι: < 300 V b. 208V, 1ι: < 600 V c. 240V, 1ι: < 600 V

2.9 TERMINATIONS

A. Provide terminals sized for circuits required on project.


B. Where surge suppression modules are intended for mounting on >M= block assembly, provide M block assembly complete with grounding system that mates with surge suppression equipment.

2.10 TERMINAL CABINETS

A. Provide terminal cabinets for all termination=s and surge suppression equipment serving communications and alarm equipment including 120VAC power surge suppressor. Size terminal cabinets as required facilitating installation of terminations and surge suppression in a neat and workmanlike manner.

B. Terminal cabinet to meet specifications in Section 16160 unless specifically

manufactured for use.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Interior:

a. Square “D” b. Atlantic Scientific DLM Series

2. Exterior:

a. Hoffman

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Provide, install and connect suppressor at first piece of electrical equipment (panel, switchboard, ATS, etc.) that the electrical service encounters as it enters the facility as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide, install and connect suppressor at each branch panel as noted on drawings.

C. Provide, install and connect suppressor at each Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) in

project as shown on drawings.

D. Provide, install and connect surge suppressor in pole hand hole of all exterior lighting poles.

E. Provide, install, and connect surge suppression at location where Section 16700

equipment is connected to line voltage (120V). Provide cords and receptacles as


required to connect TVSS equipment to equipment being protected and maintain U.L. listing.

F. Extreme care shall be taken by contractor to assure a properly surge protected system.

G. Surge protection equipment must be selected by contractor to match the equipment

being protected including wire sizes, operating volts, amps, and circuit impedance.

H. Installation of surge protection equipment and its grounding must be per manufacturer’s recommendations to assure short and proper ground paths.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SELECTION

A. Contractor to coordinate with suppliers and installers of all equipment being protected and provide surge suppression equipment that meets these specifications on respective equipment, wires, etc.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUPPRESSORS

A. Suppressors for other than 16700 equipment shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel or electronic equipment to be protected, consistent with available space.

B. Suppressors for 16700 to 16899 section equipment power source shall be coordinated

with equipment contractor. Locate in terminal cabinet with surge suppression equipment and bond together.

C. Suppressors shall be close-nippled to the device being protected in a position nearest

the neutral bus (if present) to minimize wire lead length between suppressor and the buses or control breaker to which the suppressor connects. Suppressor leads shall not extend beyond the suppressor manufacturer’s recommended maximum lead length without specific approval of the engineer.

D. Location shown on drawings is diagrammatic only.

E. Suppressors shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. Lead dress shall be as

short and as straight as possible and be consistent with recommended industry practices for the system on which these devices are installed.

F. Supplementary grounding and bonding connections required between the bonding

bus or ground plane for each equipment cluster and other locations as indicated herein shall be accomplished using #6 AWG core copper conductor and approved connections unless otherwise noted. Referenced to a common earth ground.


G. Suppressors shall be installed in a manner that allows simple replacement within short periods of downtime.

H. Suppressors other than point of use type and those for exterior lighting poles shall be

installed with a means of disconnecting the suppressor at the panel. At the main service entrance location, provide a dedicated 30 amp, 3P-CB, 100,000 A.I.C. for the TVSS device. At the distribution secondary and/or subpanels location, provide dedicated 30 amp, 3P-CB, for the TVSS device. Label disconnect or CB ASurge Protector@. Fused disconnects may be substituted for the CB, with the approval of the engineer. Contractor to change rating of CB’s noted above as required to properly provide system as recommended by manufacturer.

I. Install surge suppression equipment per manufacturer’s recommendation at each wire

terminal as noted under Part 1.

J. Install in surge suppression equipment terminal cabinets, etc. as required to facilitate installation of surge protection equipment and terminal points. Increase size of terminal cabinets (from that shown on drawings) to size required to facilitate installation of surge suppression equipment and terminal blocks.

3.4 GROUND INSTALLATION

A. Ground Bus Connections:

1. Provide “local” ground bus in each terminal cabinet housing surge protection equipment (with lugs, etc. as required).

2. Bond “local” ground bus to terminal cabinet with minimum #6 copper wire.

3. Connect terminal cabinet “local” ground bus to “system” ground bus installed

per 16170 with minimum #6 copper insulated wire (unless otherwise noted) in conduit.

B. Surge Suppression Equipment Grounding:

1. Connect each surge suppressor to local ground bus in terminal cabinet with

wire sized as recommended by manufacturer. Where “M” block type terminations/surge suppressors are used, bond ground rail to local ground bar with wire as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Assure that 120VAC power source/supply surge suppressor is also grounded

to same local ground bus as surge suppressors provided in this section for same system (i.e. fire alarm, intercom, television, etc.).


C. Conductors:

1. Conductors shall meet requirements of Section 16123. Minimum size to be #8 THWN and shall be twisted together a minimum of three turns per inch.

2. Bends in excess of 90 degrees in any grounding conductor shall not be

permitted. A radius of 6 inches or greater shall be maintained on all bends.

3. Do not bundle unprotected conductors with protected conductors.

4. Conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible.

5. Conductors shall be secured at 12” intervals with an approved copper clamp.

6. Grounding conductors shall be properly connected to the building service ground by approved clamps.

D. Grounding Connectors:

1. Connectors, splicers, and other fittings used to interconnect grounding

conductors, bond to equipment or grounding bars, shall be approved by NEC or U.L. for the purpose.

2. All connectors and fittings shall be of the Nicopress crimp or compression set

screw type.

3. Special treatment to fittings, lugs, or other connectors of dissimilar material shall be applied to prevent electro-galvanic action.

3.5 TELEPHONE CIRCUITS

A. Systems utilizing telephone company pairs as a transmission medium shall be provided with suppressor conforming to respective device in Part 2 of this specification.

B. Suppressors shall be installed at each point where interface is made to telephone

company pairs. C. In cases where a modem or other device is used to interface with the telephone circuit

the following procedure shall apply:

1. Where the modem or coupling device is furnished by the telephone company the suppressors shall be installed on the system side of the modem or coupling device.


2. Where the modem or coupling device is furnished by the system contractor,

the suppressor shall be installed on the telephone line side of the modem or coupling device.

3.6 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust equipment installation, including connections and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written

installation requirements.

B. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transient voltage suppression devices.


LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16620-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16620 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Description of Systems

: A lightning protection system shall be placed on the structure as described herein, by experienced installers in compliance with provisions of NFPA 780, National Fire Protection Association, and Underwriters' Laboratories. All equipment to protect the structure against damage by lightning shall be included whether or not specifically called for herein. An U.L. Master Label (UL-96A) for the system and a witness of grounding form shall be required.


A. Manufacturers

: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lightning protection of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

1. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 2. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding

B. Installer

: Firms with at least five (5) years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1. Maxwell Lightning Protection of Florida 2. Other qualified installers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Shop Drawings

:

a. Shop drawings shall be submitted and reviewed before work is started. Drawings shall include full layout of cabling and points, and connections.

b. Submit shop drawings marked with roofing manufacturer's stamp of

approval. Failure to do so will result in rejection of submittal.


2. Product Data

: Product data shall be submitted on all equipment to show compliance with this Section of the Specifications and shall include manufacturer's written recommendations for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TERMINALS

A. Air terminals shall be solid aluminum and shall have proper base support for surface on which they are attached, and shall be securely anchored to this surface. Terminals shall project a minimum of 10" above top of object to which attached.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Roof conductors shall be aluminum and shall be coursed to interconnect with air terminals, and in general, provide a two-way minimum path to ground. The angle of any turn shall not exceed 90°, and shall provide an approximately horizontal or downward course. Down conductors shall be copper and shall be installed in PVC conduit and hidden within the structure. Radius of bends shall not be less than 8 inches. Ground loop conductors and counterpoise conductors shall be cooper.

2.3 FASTENER

A. Conductor fasteners shall be of the same material as the conductor, having ample strength to support conductor. Where fasteners are to be mounted in masonry's or structural work, they shall be furnished to the Masonry or Structural Contractor so they may be installed during construction of the project.

2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Ground connections shall be made in accordance with requirements of all applicable codes. Ground rods shall be placed a minimum of two (2) feet from building foundations. In addition to above artificial grounds, one down conductor of each two-path system shall be connected to water piping system with approved water pipe type strap connector. All ground rods shall be sectional, 5/8" x 20' minimum copperweld type.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be new and shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories and the NFPA 780 relating to this type of installation, and shall be U.L. Labeled.

B. All materials other than air terminal and conductors shall be heavy duty cast type.

(No stamped metal materials are acceptable.)


C. Class I materials shall be used on structures that do not exceed 75 feet in height and

Class II materials shall be used on structures that are 75 feet or higher above average grade.

D. Materials shall be selected to avoid deterioration due to environmental conditions or

connection of dissimilar metals.

1. Aluminum materials shall not come into contact with earth or where rapid deterioration is possible. Aluminum materials shall not come into contact with copper surfaces.

2. Copper materials shall not be mounted on aluminum surfaces or galvanized steel surfaces including Galvalume, galvanized steel and zinc; this includes these materials that have been painted. Aluminum materials shall be used for these applications.


A. Installation shall be made in an inconspicuous manner with conductors coursed to conceal equipment as much as possible. Down conductors shall be concealed within structure, and shall be run in 1" PVC conduit. All metallic equipment within 6 feet of any lightning conductor shall be bonded to conductor

.

B. Bond to main service electrical ground.

C. Bond to incoming metallic telephone and communications surge protectors.

D. Provide access boxes at ground rods to permit inspection of connections. Boxes may be reinforced plastic body and cover in landscape areas and shall be concrete with cast iron covers in paved areas.

E. Make all connections and fastening and mounting of equipment using similar metals.

Use bi-metal connectors where dissimilar metals are joined.

F. Provide a UL Master label (UL-96A) for the installation and mount framed certificated in the electrical room.

3.2 TESTING


A. All ground rods shall be tested individually to ensure the maximum resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms, and every rod that fails the test shall be driven deeper, using additional lengths of ground rod if necessary until the required resistance is achieved.

B. Upon completion of installation of the grounding and bonding systems, test ground

resistance of the system with a ground resistance tester. The resistance of the grounding system shall not exceed five ohms. Where tests show resistance to ground exceeds five ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to three ohms or less by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. Install additional rods at least eight feet apart.

C. Method for testing individual ground rods and the complete grounding and lightning

protection system shall be by the three point method. Test probes shall be placed a minimum of 30 feet and 60 feet from the rod being tested. Furnish a written report of all test results for all ground rods and the grounding system, witnessed by the Department’s representative.

D. All underground connections shall be made using exothermic welds. All ground rod

connections shall be welded. E. All ground wires shall be terminated with compression lugs and bolted with ½ inch

stainless steel nuts and bolts to the 1/4 inch by 2 inch by 12 inch wall mounted copper ground bus near the main service equipment.

F. Submit testing and witness reports for review and approval.



PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16622-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16622 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Packaged engine generator set B. Exhaust silencer and fittings C. Fuel fittings D. Control panel and remote annuciator E. Battery and charger F. Weatherproof enclosure


A. Section 15245 - Vibration Isolation B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation C. Section 15484 - Fuel Oil Piping System D. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping F. Section 15890 – Ductwork G. Section 16496 - Automatic Transfer Switch

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers B. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) D. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code


G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code H. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 16010. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

Show plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.

C. Product Data: Provide data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection

points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank, or skid base tank and remote radiator.

D. Test Reports: Indicate results of performance testing. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified

requirements. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 16010. H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures and findings.


A. Submit under provisions of Section 16098. B. Operation Data: Include instructions for normal operation. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements,

service manuals for engine and day tank, or skid base tank oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures.



A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 110. B. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three

years experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 110, and NFPA 101. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories and

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose to supply power for Life Safety emergency systems.

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01040.



B. Accept unit on site on skids. Inspect for damage. C. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.


A. Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01740.


B. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine

generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01740. B. Provide two of each fuel, oil and air filter element.


A. Caterpillar B. Cummins C. Kohler D. Detroit Diesel E. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 PACKAGE ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

A. Description: NFPA 110, engine generator system to provide source of power for Level 1 and 2 applications, and conforming to NFPA 99.

B. System Capacity: As indicated on the plans at elevation of 100 feet above sea

level, standby rating using engine-mounted radiator. 2.3 ENGINE

A. Type: Water-cooled inline or V-type, four stroke cycle compression ignition Diesel internal combustion engine.

B. Fuel System: No. 2 fuel oil. C. Engine speed: 1800 rpm. D. Governor: Intergrated digital electronic isochronous governor. E. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure,

overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer. F. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and

voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include


remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator control panel.

G. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral

thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), and suitable for operation on voltage as indicated on the plans.

H. Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain

safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F (43 degrees C). Radiator air flow restriction 0.5 inches of water (1.25 Pa) maximum.

I. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler,

fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on engine/generator control panel.

J. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount

on structural steel base. 2.4 GENERATOR

A. Generator: NEMA MG1, four pole (single phase units), six pole (three phase units) reconnectible brushless synchronous generator with brushless exciter.

B. Rating: KW as indicated on the plans, KVA at 1.0 power factor (single phase

units), 0.8 power factor (three phase units), voltage and phase as indicated on the plans, 60 Hz at 1800 rpm.

C. Insulation Class: F. D. Temperature Rise: 130 degrees C Standby. E. Enclosure: NEMA MG1, open drip proof. F. Voltage Regulation: Include generator-mounted PMG exciter and volts per hertz

regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation plus or minus 1 percent from no load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage droop, voltage level (plus or minus 5 percent) and voltage gain.

2.5 ACCESSORIES


A. Exhaust Silencer: Critical type silencer, with muffler companion flanges and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions.

B. Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead-acid storage batteries. Match

battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps. C. Battery Tray: Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage. D. Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and

equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.

E. Line Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breaker on generator

output with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, sized in accordance with NFPA 70. Include 120 volt operated shunt trip, connect to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Unit mount in enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.

F. Engine-Generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator mounted control

panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Include provision for padlock and the following equipment and features:

1. Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz. range, 3.5 inch (89 mm) dial. 2. AC Output Voltmeter: 3.5 inch (89mm) dial, 2 percent accuracy, with

phase selector switch. 3. AC Output Ammeter: 3.5 inch (89 mm) dial, 2 percent accuracy, with

phase selector switch. 4. Output voltage adjustment. 5. Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water

temperature, overspeed, and overcrank. 6. Engine start/stop selector switch. 7. Engine running time meter. 8. Oil pressure gauge. 9. Water temperature gauge. 10. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact

terminals prewired to terminal strip. 11. Additional visual indicators and alarms as required by NFPA 110. 12. Remote Alarm Contacts: Pre-wire SPDT contacts to terminal strip for

remote alarm functions required by NFPA 110.

G. Remote Annunciator Panel: Flush mounted panel with brushed stainless steel. Provide audible and visible indicators and alarms required by NFPA 110.


H. Weatherproof enclosure with a wind rating of 150mph. Muffler shall be installed within weatherproof enclosure.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide field inspection and testing. B. Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank per section 16496. C. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01740. B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01740. B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01695. B. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that

system operates to provide standby power. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16622

INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM 16726-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16726 – INTRUSION DETECTION, AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM PATHWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Security access devices

2. Terminal cabinets and raceways

3. Access control panel


1. Section 16111 - Conduit Systems

2. Section 16123 – Building Wire and Cable

1.3 REFERENCES

1. EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Wiring Standard

2. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces

3. NFPA 70 – Current version

4. NFPA 101 – Life Safety

5. NFPA 731 – Security System Installation

6. All power supplies shall be UL listed and have a UL label on them.

7. UL 294 Listed

8. UL 365 Listed

9. UL 309 Listed

10. UL 1610 Listed

11. UL 1635 Listed

12. UL 1076 Listed


1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. This specification section applies to the Pace Rd Ramps. Provide a complete stand alone Intrusion Detection and Security Access System for each Ramp equipment building as specified in this section and indicated on the plans.

2. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall consist of a standalone complete system with host computer (server), operator workstation, power supplies, battery backup, printer, and Smart Terminal Interfaces operating on a dedicated electronic data transmission network supporting card readers and door contacts.

3. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions including access control, alarm management, intrusion detection, video imaging and badging, database partitioning, interfacing to closed circuit television monitors (CCTV) and digital video recording (DVR) matrix switches, and interfacing with intercom equipment. It shall also be capable of controlling multiple banks of elevators, as well as allowing cardholder information and queries from external system databases (MIS interface).

4. System software shall be provided with the Intrusion Detection and Security Access System. System license shall be for the entire system and shall include capability for future additions.

5. The user interface at the host computer (server) and at the operator workstation shall be a mouse driven graphical user interface (GUI) allowing the user to open and work on multiple windows simultaneously.

6. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall control and monitor certain doors, manager’s cash locker, vault, depository, and elevators.

7. The system shall interface with existing Admin. Building system.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

1. To obtain access, a card holder shall use his card at the card reader of the access module. Card data shall be sent to a terminal interface unit that shall interpret card data and communicate it to the central controller where it will be compared with the data in the system files. When an authorized entry attempt is determined, the central controller shall grant access by sending a signal to the terminal interface unit to unlock an access restriction device. When an unauthorized entry attempt is determined, the access point shall remain secure.

2. The system shall provide an access control report by employee card number, time, and location of access. When an alarm occurs, the operator workstation shall alert the operator to take appropriate action. The system shall maintain a permanent record of alarms and all card activity. Hard copy printouts of reports shall be available on demand.



1. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

2. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

1. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

2. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


1. Furnish service and maintenance of the Intrusion Detection and Security Access System for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM

1. Server: The minimum system server requirements shall be a standard name brand personal computer with sufficient capacity for the intended purpose. The server computer shall ship factory configured with all software pre-loaded and tested. All computer hardware replacement components shall be available from multiple third party sources. Unless otherwise approved by the manufacturer, the minimum configuration for the server shall be as defined below for a system capacity of five workstations, 128 Readers and 15,000 cards:

1. Genuine Intel Pentium III CPU with a clock speed of 1 GHz or greater

2. 1 GB RAM (additional RAM required if P2000 options are included)

3. 3.5” floppy disk drive

4. SCSI DAT drive – 4 GB minimum

5. 24X speed CD-ROM

6. 10 GB SCSI hard disk, 7200 RPM


7. 1024 x 768 resolution 64K color, video card with 4MB RAM

8. 17” SVGA LCD color monitor

9. Standard 101- type keyboard and mouse

10. One network interface controller (10/100BaseT Network Controller port) or equivalent.

B. Workstation: The minimum workstation requirements shall be a standard name brand personal computer with sufficient capacity for the intended purpose. The workstation shall ship factory configured with all software pre-loaded and tested. All computer hardware replacement components shall be available from multiple third party sources. Minimum configuration for the workstation shall be:

1. Genuine Intel Pentium II CPU with a clock speed of 750 MHz or greater

2. 256 MB with Windows 2000 or Windows XP

3. 3.5” floppy disk drive

4. 24X speed CD-ROM

5. 1 GB available HD space.

6. 1024 x 768 resolution 64K color, video card with 2MB RAM

7. 17” SVGA LCD color monitor

8. Standard 101 type keyboard and mouse

9. 10/100BaseT Network Controller card.

C. Printer: System printers shall be provided in the quantities specified or as shown on the drawings. Printers shall be dot matrix, 180 characters per second, bi-directional printers.

D. Intelligent Network Controller: Cardkey CK722

E. Two Door Controller Interface with Supervised 4-State Inputs: Cardkey S300-DIN-RDR2SA

F. Async Mini Fiber Optic Modem: Black Box ME615A


G. 6-port 10/100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Switch: Black Box LBH600A-HD-24

H. Controller/lock Power Supply: Cardkey S300-DIN-L-PS

I. Door Strike: By others, refer to door hardware specifications.

J. Door Contacts: Sentrol 1078-C

K. Proximity Card Readers:

1) HID RP40 (no keypad)

2) HID RPK40 (with keypad)

L. Key Bypass (front door admin): SDC 800N

M. Request to Exit Pushbutton: Securitron EEB2

N. Request to Exit Passive Infrared Detector: Bosch DS 161

O. Controller and Power supply Enclosure: Cardkey S300-DIN-L

2.2 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. The software shall have an installed capacity to accommodate the following at a minimum:

1. A central database on the server able to support up to 200,000 badges maximum.

2. Unlimited number of access groups.

3. Up to 16,000 2-state alarm input points, or up to 8,000 4-state alarm input points (or any combination in between).

4. Up to 40 operator workstation terminals connected to a server via an Ethernet TCP/IP network.

5. Central online data storage of 500,000 historical transactions, expandable (as system resources allow), with local panel storage capability of up to 200,000 cardholders and 50,000 events.

6. 256 levels of alarm priority.


7. A minimum of ten (10) individual badge numbers per cardholder. Each badge shall be tracked separately.

8. 255 issue levels per card, only one of which shall be active at any given time.

9. Unlimited number of user-defined cardholder fields. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall be capable of reporting on any or all of the fields. Each field may be defined by the user as either alphanumeric text, numeric, date, or Boolean.

10. Security Management System Software: Cardkey P2000

C. System Software

1. The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows 2003 Server. It shall have multi-tasking and multi-user capability, and support workstations with Windows XP Professional operating systems.

2. The system database shall be Windows SQL Server 2000 for Windows 2003 Server.

3. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System software features shall be fully documented in the form of a complete User’s Manual including operation and installation sections, and a detailed description of the major Intrusion Detection and Security Access System functions.

D. The Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall be capable of partitioning (segmenting) the database which must include, but is not limited to, the following items:

1. Cardholders

2. Badges

3. Holidays

4. Time Zones

5. Workstations

6. Access Groups

7. Panels

8. Reader/Terminals

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE


1. Power Branch Circuits: 12 AWG THWN building wire as specified in Section 16123

2. Four element composite cable for lock power, card reader, door contacts and request to exit device circuits: Communications Supply Corporation 112115

3. Network Category 5e Cable: West Penn Wire 4245

4. Multimode Fiber optic Cable: West Penn Wire WP9B202

5. Shunt Circuits: 18 AWG TFFN building wire as specified in Section 16123

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Install conduit, wireways, cable tray, and pathways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with EIA/TIA 568 and Section 16111.

2. Install termination cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.

3. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 1 inch (25 mm) conduits to accessible location above ceiling, below floor at each location.

4. Install pullwire, polyethylene pulling string in each empty conduit over ten feet in length or containing a bend.

5. Mark all backboard and cabinets with the legend under the provisions of Section 16195.

6. Install system and devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide a minimum of two 2-hour training seminars at the Toll Plaza Administration Building to instruct the Department’s personnel in the proper use of the system and its features.

B. The Department will advise contractor of the dates and times of the seminars.



INTRUSION DETECTION 16727-1 AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16727 – INTRUSION DETECTION, AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Security access devices

B. Terminal cabinets and raceways 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit Systems B. Section 16123 – Building Wire and Cable

1.3 REFERENCES

A. EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Wiring Standard

B. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces

C. NFPA 70 – Current version D. NFPA 101 – Life Safety E. NFPA 731 – Security System Installation F. All power supplies shall be UL listed and have a UL label on them. G. UL 294 Listed H. UL 365 Listed I. UL 309 Listed J. UL 1610 Listed K. UL 1635 Listed

L. UL 1076 Listed



A. This specification section applies to the Polk Mainline Toll Plaza and the Signature Gantry.

B. The existing Intrusion Detection and Security Access System shall remain active

through out the project. Maintain server, operator workstations, power supplies, battery backup, printer, and Smart Terminal Interfaces, data transmission network, card readers and door contacts unless noted for demolition. Provide demolition and renovation of system as required to accommodate extention of the system to the new Signature Gantry. Provide new devices where indicated. Upgrade existing control panel including power supplies, batteries and control modules as required for the addition of new devices. Re-program system and re-label zones to indicated reconfigured system.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. To obtain access, a card holder shall use his card at the card reader of the access module. Card data shall be sent to a terminal interface unit that shall interpret card data and communicate it to the central controller where it will be compared with the data in the system files. When an authorized entry attempt is determined, the central controller shall grant access by sending a signal to the terminal interface unit to unlock an access restriction device. When an unauthorized entry attempt is determined, the access point shall remain secure.

B. The system shall provide an access control report by employee card number, time,

and location of access. When an alarm occurs, the VDT shall alert the operator to take appropriate action. The system shall maintain a permanent record of alarms and all card activity. Hard copy printouts of reports shall be available on demand.


A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.


A. Perform Work in accordance with TEC and SEC rules and regulations. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.




B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


A. Furnish service and maintenance of the Intrusion Detection and Security Access System for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTRUSION DETECTION AND SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM

A. CPU: Card Key D600-2/AUI with Card Key RS1-2 and RS232C Interface

B. CPU Power Supply: Card Key PB-1

C. Voltage Regulator: Square D 68200-08

D. Smart Terminal Interface:

1. Card Key DSTI-SI (double) 2. Card Key STI-SB-C2 (single)

E. Smart Terminal Power Supply: Altronix AL300ULM F. Electric Strike Power Supply: VON DUPRIN PS861B

G. Door Strike: By others, refer to door hardware specification. H. Door Contacts: Sentrol 1078-C I. Magnetic Swipe Readers:

1. Card Key L46-3 (no keypad) 2. Card Key D46-3 (with keypad)

J. Key Bypass (front door admin): SDC 800N K. Request to Exit Pushbutton: Securitron EEB2 L. Request to exit Passive Infrared Detector: Bosh DS161


2.2 TERMINAL CABINETS

A. Cabinet Boxes; Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches (61 mm) wide, 6 inches (15 mm) deep. Provide plywood backboard inside cabinet for mounting telephone termination devices.

B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw

cover front, concealed hinge, double doors, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard.

C. Finish: Gray baked enamel.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Power Branch Circuits: 12 AWG THWN building wire as specified in Section 16123

B. Smart Terminal Interface Circuits: Belden 8723 C. Doorlock Circuits: Belden 8760 D. Request to Exit PIR Circuits: Belden 8451 E. Card Reader Circuits: Belden 8771 F. Keyboard Circuits: Alpha 5198 G. Shunt Circuits: 18 AWG TFFN building wire as specified in Section 16123


A. Install conduit, wireways, cable tray, and pathways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with EIA/TIA 568 and Section 16111.

B. Install termination cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each

corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.

C. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 1 inch (25 mm) conduits to accessible location above ceiling, below floor at each location.


D. Install pullwire, polyethylene pulling string in each empty conduit over ten feet in length or containing a bend.

E. Mark all backboard and cabinets with the legend under the provisions of Section

16195. F. Install system and devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 TRAINING





VOICE/DATA SERVICE, PATHWAYS AND WIRING 16741-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16741 - VOICE / DATA SERVICE, PATHWAYS, AND WIRING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Telephone and data service entrance raceways

B. Equipment and terminal backboards

C. Telephone cabinets

D. Premises wiring and outlets

E. Pathways


A. Section 16111 - Conduit Systems

1.3 REFERENCES

A. EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Wiring Standard

B. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code


A. Service Entrance Pathway: Rigid steel conduit and nonmetallic conduit from point of connection shown to building service termination cabinet.

B. Backbone Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569 using conduit, sleeves, slots as indicated.

C. Horizontal Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569, using raceway, backboards, and cabinets as indicated.

D. Premises Wiring: Complete from telephone terminal backboard and data service racks to each outlet, using wire and cable as specified.




B. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.


A. Perform Work in accordance with TEC and the telephone utility’s rules and regulations.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in installing premises pathways with minimum three years experience.



B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


A. Furnish service and maintenance of premises wiring for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Provide four jacks and plates of each type.

1.11 TELEPHONE COMPANY FEES

A. Contact the Telephone Company to determine if fees, charges or costs are required by the Telephone Company for telephone service, installations and hook-ups. Notify the Department if any such fees are required.

1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Section 01040 – Coordination and Meetings: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with Telephone Company representative.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

A. Material: Interior Type “A” fire-retardant-treated plywood with a flame spread of 25 or less.

B. Size: 4 x 8 feet (1.2 x 2.4 m), ¾ inch (19 mm) thick.

C. Finish: Gray paint having a fire spread rating of Class C as a minimum.

2.2 VOICE / DATA WIRE, CABLE AND JACKS

A. Cable: Cat 5e 4PR plenum rated

B. Modular Plates / Jacks

1. Voice RJ-11

2. Data RJ-45

C. Terminal Blocks: Cat 5e 110 terminal blocks

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with EIA/TIA 568.

B. Finish paint both side of termination backboards with two coats of durable fire retardant gray paint under the provisions of Section 09900 prior to installation of telephone equipment.

C. Install termination cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.

D. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 1 inch (25 mm) conduits to accessible location above ceiling, below floor at each location.

E. Install pullwire, polyethylene pulling string in each empty conduit over ten feet in length or containing a bend.

F. Mark all backboard and cabinets with the legend under the provisions of Section 16195.

TELEPHONE SYSTEM 16761-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16761 –TELEPHONE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Scope:

1. This specification section applies to the Polk Mainline Toll Plaza and the Signature Gantry.

2. For the Toll Plaza buildings, furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to extend the existing electronic key telephone system including electronic key system expansion models and telephone stations to serve the Signature Gantry.


A. Reference Standards:

1. System shall conform to FCC rules for Radio Frequency Devices, Class A, or for connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. The manufacturer shall have a local service facility and be able to provide service within four (4) hours on a twenty-four (24) hour basis. Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of intercom / telephone systems whose product have been in satisfactory use for not less than five (5) years will be acceptable.


A. Telephone system shall consist of voice switching equipment expansion, voice instruments, power equipment, and other auxiliary equipment. System shall be directly connected to public switched network in accordance with the rules set forth by FCC Part 68, and other appropriate authorities such as Public Utilities Commission and local telephone company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

A. Telephone System:

1. Telephone jacks, wall plates, boxes, and telephone cables are provided under Section 16741.

B. Telephone 5-Slot Expansion Carrier:


1. The 5-slot expansion carrier shall support a maximum of 4 telephone expansion modules, and 1 expansion processor module.

2. Expansion carrier shall be provided complete with processor module, power card and expansion processor cable.

3. Manufacturer: Avaya Partner 5-slot expansion carrier.

C. Telephone Expansion Module:

1. The Telephone Expansion Module adds three outside lines (called ID when you subscribe to CLID service from you phone company), and eight Digital Station ports, for Partner NLS and ETR (Eurostyle) telephones. Universal Port Structure feature allows fthe use of multi-line analog phones or single line devices.

2. Manufacturer: Avaya Partner ACS Expansion Module (Qty: 3).

D. Single Line Analog Telephone:

1. The single line analog telephone shall be a 2500 Series model with the following:

a. Positive disconnect

b. Hearing-aid compatibility K-type handset.

c. 12- button dial pad with dual tone multiple frequency dialing.

d. Telephone station shall be available desk or wall mounted.

2. Manufacturer: Avaya 2500 basic for desk top model. Avaya 2554 basic for wall mounted model.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the installation of all wiring, cabinets, and backboards with cable contractor for Section 16741.

B. Included in this section shall be notification of the telephone company by the electrical contractor that the telephone system is being installed. The electrical contractor shall coordinate his work with the telephone company for obtaining service connection.

C. Wall mounted stations shall be 5'-0" above finish floor. All other stations shall be desk top models, with minimum of 6'-0" long flexible cable.

D. Contractor shall provide one telephone set per outlet.


3.2 TRAINING




TELEPHONE SETS 16762-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16762 – TELEPHONE SETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This specification section applies to the Pace Rd Ramps. B. The telephone communication shall consist of dual line voice telephone sets,

which operates over a Plain Old Telephone System (POTS) and is compatible with the Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN). The dual line voice telephone sets shall be installed in locations as indicated on the drawings. A telephone key system shall not be permitted. The dual line voice telephone sets shall not be interconnected with the intercom system.

C. Furnish and install complete and fully operational dual line voice telephone sets

including conduits and wiring, outlet boxes and jacks with plates, terminal cabinets, terminal blocks, plywood backboards, pull boxes, and telephone sets, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings.

D. Contractor shall provide transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) to incoming

telephone lines, as indicated in Section 16610, Transient Voltage Surge Suppression.

E. The manufacturer must be an approved vendor per Section 730-310-99-1 of the

State Purchasing Guidelines. 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 16610, Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 1.3 STANDARDS

A. Dual line voice telephone sets shall comply with dual tone, multiple frequency (DTMF) dialing.

B. Ringer type shall be per FCC ringer type specification per FCC Part 68, Section

68.312.

C. Dual line voice telephone sets shall support a voice bandwidth form 100 Hz to 4kHz, with leased service typically providing 300 Hz to 311 Hz bandwidth. The signal to noise ration (S/N) shall be a minimum of 40 dB for the dual line voice telephone sets with leased service providing 30 dB S/N to a 90% subscriber satisfaction.


D. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be provided with an RJ-11s compatible connector in accordance with FCC, Part 68, Subpart F, connectors.

E. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be designed to operate to specification

within a 0 deg C to + 50 deg C environment with relative humidity between 5 percent to 95 percent, noncondensing.

1.4 LINE ACTIVIATION

A. Telephones shall be activated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Toll Facility Engineer or Ms. Marge Matthews, Turnpike Toll Operations at 561-478-8866, at least 90 days prior to occupancy of the toll facility to make arrangements for telephone line activation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Wiring Diagrams: Provide internal wiring diagrams of dual line voice telephone sets with manufacturer’s technical data. Wiring diagrams shall show all dual line voice telephone sets interconnected with wire sizes.

B. Manuals: Submit operations and maintenance manuals. C. Submit manufacturer’s product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS

A. The contractor shall furnish and install one dual line voice telephone set. B. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be as shown on the drawings, as specified

herein, and as required to complete the system. C. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be furnished with surge and transient

protection at the incoming Telco lines. D. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be furnished with two (2) incoming Telco

lines. E. The dual line voice telephone sets shall be black or gray in color. F. All dual line voice telephone sets provided by the contractor shall be from the

same manufacturer, of the same model, and of the same color. 2.2 FEATURES


A. The dual line voice telephone sets shall include the following features.

1. Ring volume control knob 2. Separate LEDs for Line 2 and Line 2 3. Hands free speaker


A. The dual line voice telephone sets installed at the locations shown on the drawings shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, whether the actual installation is performed by the manufacturer, his agent, or the contractor.

B. The dual line voice telephone sets supplier shall have total system responsibility,

to include the furnishing, installing, connecting, testing, etc. of all components of the system.

C. Coordinate with and inform other trades ahead of time as to the location of all

pieces of equipment to be installed under this section for proper functional interface with other equipment or hardware and to avoid any interference or delay in the progress of the work.

D. Wires shall be of sufficient size for the system to perform properly, color coded

and tagged with number markers. Number and type of wires shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and wiring diagrams. Wiring shall be installed in conduit.

E. All conduits shall be installed in a manner conforming to the requirements

outlined in Section 16111, Conduit Systems.

F. Terminations and Splices: Terminations shall be made only at devices and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Only proper terminal strips shall be used in cabinets, panels, and boxes. Splices shall not be permitted.

G. In case of any discrepancies, consult with the Engineer prior to proceeding with

the work. Failure to comply will make the contractor responsible for all costs for remedial work.

H. Contractor shall provide one telephone set per outlet.

3.2 TESTS

A. The contractor shall test each dual line voice telephone set installed for proper operation. Each dual line voice telephone set shall test both Line 1 and Line 2.


3.3 OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Three (3) full sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including shop drawings, shall be provided after the installation has been completed. Any “as-built” changes shall be incorporated.

3.4 TESTS

A. The contractor shall provided, as part of this Contract, a minimum of one (1) hour dual line voice telephone set operation training for the building Owner and the Engineer. The training sessions shall be at a time to be stipulated by the Engineer.


CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION PATHWAYS 16783-1 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

SECTION 16783 - CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION PATHWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Closed circuit television systems raceway 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16111 - Conduit 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569 using conduit, sleeves, slots as indicated.

B. Horizontal Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569, using raceway, backboards, and

cabinets as indicated.

C. Wiring: By Owner. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with Owner’s closed circuit television vendor’s rules and regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEMS TERMINATION CABINETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman 2. Square D

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION PATHWAYS 16783-2 FPID 416537-1-52-01 & 416537-2-52-01

B. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches (61 mm)

wide, 6 inches (15 mm) deep. Provide plywood backboard inside cabinet for mounting telephone termination devices.

C. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw

cover front, concealed hinge, double doors, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard.

D. Finish: Gray baked enamel.


A. Finish paint both sides of termination backboards with two coats of durable fire retardant gray paint under the provisions of Section 09912 prior to installation of telephone equipment..

B. Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section

16190.

C. Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.

D. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 1 inch (25

mm) conduits to accessible location above ceiling, below floor at each location.

E. Install pullwire, polyethylene pulling string in each empty closed circuit television conduit over ten feet in length or containing a bend.

F. Mark all backboards and cabinets with the legend "CCTV" under the provisions

of Section 16195. PART 4 - BASIS OF PAYMENT - All of the Work of this Section is included under Pay Item Nos. 735-74-1 Mainline Signature Gantry, 735-88-1 Existing toll Plaza Modifications, 735-74-1 Northbound Ramp Plaza, 735-74-2 Southbound Ramp Plaza. END OF SECTION 16783

WIDEN POLK PARKWAY MP 17.97 TO 23.75 – DESIGN BUILD...

Documents

Transcript of WIDEN POLK PARKWAY MP 17.97 TO 23.75 – DESIGN BUILD...